Preface

Safety instructions and

industrial security 1

Introduction 2
Motion Control
Arithmetic 3
SINAMICS/SIMOTION
Description of the DCC standard
Logic 4
blocks
Conversion 5
Function Manual

System 6

Technology 7

Closed-loop control 8

Messages and parameters A

Appendix B

11/2017
6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in
this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG Document order number: 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 Copyright © Siemens AG 2008 - 2017.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 02/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

SIMOTION documentation
An overview of the SIMOTION documentation can be found in the SIMOTION Documentation
Overview document.
This documentation is included as electronic documentation in the scope of delivery of
SIMOTION SCOUT. It comprises ten documentation packages.
The following documentation packages are available for SIMOTION V4.4:
● SIMOTION Engineering System Handling
● SIMOTION System and Function Descriptions
● SIMOTION Service and Diagnostics
● SIMOTION IT
● SIMOTION Programming
● SIMOTION Programming - References
● SIMOTION C
● SIMOTION P
● SIMOTION D
● SIMOTION Supplementary Documentation

SINAMICS documentation
The SINAMICS documentation is organized into two parts:
● General documentation/catalogs
● Manufacturer/service documentation
An overview of the current documentation in the available languages can be found on the
Internet:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
Select the menu commands "Support" --> "Technical Documentation" --> "Overview of
Publications".
The Internet version of DOConCD (DOConWEB) is available on the Internet:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb
Information on the range of training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) is
available on the Internet:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
Select the menu command "Support".

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 3
Preface

Further documentation for the DCC editor

● SINAMICS/SIMOTION DCC Editor Description

Additional information
Click the following link to find information on the following topics:
● Ordering documentation / overview of documentation
● Additional links to download documents
● Using documentation online (finding and searching in manuals/information)
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu
Please send any questions about the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions for
improvement, corrections) to the following e-mail address:
[email protected]

My Documentation Manager
Click the following link for information on how to compile documentation individually on the
basis of Siemens content and how to adapt it for the purpose of your own machine
documentation:
http://www.siemens.com/mdm

Training
Click the following link for information on SITRAIN - Siemens training courses for automation
products, systems and solutions:
http://www.siemens.com/sitrain

FAQs
Frequently Asked Questions can be found in SIMOTION Utilities & Applications, which are
included in the scope of delivery of SIMOTION SCOUT, and in the Service & Support pages
under Product Support:
http://support.automation.siemens.com

Technical Support
Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided on the Internet under
Contact:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

Description of the DCC standard blocks

4 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
Table of contents

Preface.........................................................................................................................................................3
1 Safety instructions and industrial security..................................................................................................11
1.1 Fundamental safety instructions............................................................................................11
1.1.1 General safety instructions.....................................................................................................11
1.1.2 Warranty and liability for application examples......................................................................11
1.1.3 Industrial security...................................................................................................................12
1.2 Use write and know-how protection.......................................................................................13
1.3 Industrial Security Configuration Manual...............................................................................14
2 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................15
2.1 Introduction to the Drive Control Chart (DCC).......................................................................15
2.2 Libraries.................................................................................................................................17
2.3 Nomenclature of the blocks....................................................................................................19
2.4 Block connections..................................................................................................................22
2.5 Byte ordering..........................................................................................................................23
2.6 Direct interconnection of different data types.........................................................................24
2.7 Initialization of the blocks.......................................................................................................25
2.8 Implementing complex functions in a sample configuration...................................................26
3 Arithmetic....................................................................................................................................................29
3.1 ACOS.....................................................................................................................................29
3.2 ADD........................................................................................................................................31
3.3 ADD_D...................................................................................................................................32
3.4 ADD_l.....................................................................................................................................33
3.5 ADD_M...................................................................................................................................34
3.6 ASIN.......................................................................................................................................36
3.7 ATAN......................................................................................................................................38
3.8 AVA........................................................................................................................................40
3.9 AVA_D....................................................................................................................................42
3.10 COS.......................................................................................................................................44
3.11 DIV.........................................................................................................................................46
3.12 DIV_D.....................................................................................................................................48
3.13 DIV_I......................................................................................................................................50
3.14 MAS.......................................................................................................................................52

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 5
Table of contents

3.15 MIS.........................................................................................................................................53
3.16 MUL........................................................................................................................................54
3.17 MUL_D...................................................................................................................................55
3.18 MUL_I.....................................................................................................................................56
3.19 PLI20......................................................................................................................................57
3.20 SII...........................................................................................................................................62
3.21 SIN.........................................................................................................................................64
3.22 SQR.......................................................................................................................................66
3.23 SUB........................................................................................................................................68
3.24 SUB_D...................................................................................................................................69
3.25 SUB_I.....................................................................................................................................70
3.26 TAN........................................................................................................................................71
4 Logic...........................................................................................................................................................73
4.1 AND........................................................................................................................................73
4.2 AND_W..................................................................................................................................75
4.3 BF...........................................................................................................................................77
4.4 BF_W.....................................................................................................................................79
4.5 BSW.......................................................................................................................................81
4.6 CNM.......................................................................................................................................83
4.7 CNM_D...................................................................................................................................85
4.8 CNM_I....................................................................................................................................87
4.9 CTR........................................................................................................................................89
4.10 DFR........................................................................................................................................92
4.11 DFR_W...................................................................................................................................95
4.12 DLB........................................................................................................................................98
4.13 DX8......................................................................................................................................100
4.14 DX8_D..................................................................................................................................102
4.15 DX8_I...................................................................................................................................104
4.16 ETE......................................................................................................................................106
4.17 LVM......................................................................................................................................108
4.18 MFP......................................................................................................................................110
4.19 MUX8...................................................................................................................................112
4.20 MUX8_D...............................................................................................................................115
4.21 MUX8_I................................................................................................................................118
4.22 NAND...................................................................................................................................121

Description of the DCC standard blocks

6 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Table of contents

4.23 NCM.....................................................................................................................................123
4.24 NCM_D.................................................................................................................................125
4.25 NCM_I..................................................................................................................................127
4.26 NOP1...................................................................................................................................129
4.27 NOP1_B...............................................................................................................................130
4.28 NOP1_D...............................................................................................................................131
4.29 NOP1_I.................................................................................................................................132
4.30 NOP8...................................................................................................................................133
4.31 NOP8_B...............................................................................................................................135
4.32 NOP8_D...............................................................................................................................137
4.33 NOP8_I.................................................................................................................................139
4.34 NOR.....................................................................................................................................141
4.35 NOT......................................................................................................................................143
4.36 NOT_W................................................................................................................................144
4.37 NSW.....................................................................................................................................146
4.38 NSW_D................................................................................................................................148
4.39 NSW_I..................................................................................................................................150
4.40 OR........................................................................................................................................152
4.41 OR_W...................................................................................................................................154
4.42 PCL......................................................................................................................................156
4.43 PDE......................................................................................................................................158
4.44 PDF......................................................................................................................................160
4.45 PST......................................................................................................................................162
4.46 RSR......................................................................................................................................164
4.47 RSS......................................................................................................................................166
4.48 SH........................................................................................................................................168
4.49 SH_DW................................................................................................................................170
4.50 TRK......................................................................................................................................172
4.51 TRK_D..................................................................................................................................174
4.52 XOR.....................................................................................................................................176
4.53 XOR_W................................................................................................................................177
5 Conversion...............................................................................................................................................179
5.1 BY_B....................................................................................................................................179
5.2 BY_W...................................................................................................................................181
5.3 B_BY....................................................................................................................................183

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 7
Table of contents

5.4 B_DW...................................................................................................................................185
5.5 B_W......................................................................................................................................188
5.6 DW_B...................................................................................................................................191
5.7 DW_R...................................................................................................................................194
5.8 DW_W..................................................................................................................................195
5.9 D_I........................................................................................................................................196
5.10 D_R......................................................................................................................................197
5.11 D_SI.....................................................................................................................................198
5.12 D_UI.....................................................................................................................................199
5.13 D_US....................................................................................................................................200
5.14 I_D........................................................................................................................................201
5.15 I_R........................................................................................................................................202
5.16 I_SI.......................................................................................................................................203
5.17 I_UD.....................................................................................................................................204
5.18 I_US.....................................................................................................................................205
5.19 LR_R....................................................................................................................................206
5.20 N2_R....................................................................................................................................207
5.21 N4_R....................................................................................................................................208
5.22 R_D......................................................................................................................................209
5.23 R_DW...................................................................................................................................210
5.24 R_I........................................................................................................................................211
5.25 R_LR....................................................................................................................................212
5.26 R_N2....................................................................................................................................213
5.27 R_N4....................................................................................................................................215
5.28 R_SI.....................................................................................................................................217
5.29 R_UD....................................................................................................................................218
5.30 R_UI.....................................................................................................................................219
5.31 R_US....................................................................................................................................220
5.32 SI_D.....................................................................................................................................221
5.33 SI_I.......................................................................................................................................222
5.34 SI_R.....................................................................................................................................223
5.35 SI_UD...................................................................................................................................224
5.36 SI_UI....................................................................................................................................225
5.37 UD_I.....................................................................................................................................226
5.38 UD_R....................................................................................................................................227

Description of the DCC standard blocks

8 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Table of contents

5.39 UD_SI...................................................................................................................................228
5.40 UI_D.....................................................................................................................................229
5.41 UI_R.....................................................................................................................................230
5.42 UI_SI....................................................................................................................................231
5.43 US_D....................................................................................................................................232
5.44 US_I.....................................................................................................................................233
5.45 US_R....................................................................................................................................234
5.46 W_B......................................................................................................................................235
5.47 W_BY...................................................................................................................................237
5.48 W_DW..................................................................................................................................239
6 System......................................................................................................................................................241
6.1 CTD......................................................................................................................................241
6.2 GTS......................................................................................................................................243
6.3 RAA......................................................................................................................................244
6.4 RDA......................................................................................................................................245
6.5 RDAA...................................................................................................................................247
6.6 RDP......................................................................................................................................249
6.7 RDP_D.................................................................................................................................252
6.8 RDP_I...................................................................................................................................255
6.9 RDP_UD...............................................................................................................................258
6.10 RDP_UI................................................................................................................................261
6.11 RDP_US...............................................................................................................................264
6.12 RMDP...................................................................................................................................267
6.13 SAH......................................................................................................................................274
6.14 SAH_B..................................................................................................................................277
6.15 SAH_BY...............................................................................................................................280
6.16 SAH_D.................................................................................................................................283
6.17 SAH_I...................................................................................................................................286
6.18 SAV......................................................................................................................................289
6.19 SAV_BY...............................................................................................................................292
6.20 SAV_D..................................................................................................................................295
6.21 SAV_I...................................................................................................................................298
6.22 SRA......................................................................................................................................301
6.23 STM......................................................................................................................................304
6.24 WMDP..................................................................................................................................308

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 9
Table of contents

6.25 WRP.....................................................................................................................................315
6.26 WRP_D................................................................................................................................317
6.27 WRP_I..................................................................................................................................319
6.28 WRP_UD..............................................................................................................................321
6.29 WRP_UI...............................................................................................................................323
6.30 WRP_US..............................................................................................................................325
7 Technology...............................................................................................................................................327
7.1 DCA......................................................................................................................................327
7.2 INCO....................................................................................................................................332
7.3 OCA.....................................................................................................................................335
7.4 TTCU....................................................................................................................................337
7.5 WBG.....................................................................................................................................340
8 Closed-loop control...................................................................................................................................343
8.1 DEL......................................................................................................................................343
8.2 DEZ......................................................................................................................................347
8.3 DIF.......................................................................................................................................350
8.4 DT1......................................................................................................................................352
8.5 INT.......................................................................................................................................356
8.6 LIM.......................................................................................................................................359
8.7 LIM_D...................................................................................................................................362
8.8 MVS.....................................................................................................................................365
8.9 PC........................................................................................................................................368
8.10 PIC.......................................................................................................................................371
8.11 PT1.......................................................................................................................................380
8.12 RGE.....................................................................................................................................383
8.13 RGJ......................................................................................................................................390
A Messages and parameters.......................................................................................................................401
A.1 Messages.............................................................................................................................401
A.2 Parameters...........................................................................................................................410
B Appendix...................................................................................................................................................495
B.1 Data types............................................................................................................................495
B.2 Error values in PROFIdrive parameter responses, data types.............................................498
B.3 Block overview.....................................................................................................................501
Index.........................................................................................................................................................507

Description of the DCC standard blocks

10 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
Safety instructions and industrial security 1
1.1 Fundamental safety instructions

1.1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Danger to life if the safety instructions and residual risks are not observed
If the safety instructions and residual risks in the associated hardware documentation are not
observed, accidents involving severe injuries or death can occur.
● Observe the safety instructions given in the hardware documentation.
● Consider the residual risks for the risk evaluation.

WARNING
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in turn
can lead to injuries or death.
● Protect the parameterization (parameter assignments) against unauthorized access.
● Handle possible malfunctions by taking suitable measures, e.g. emergency stop or
emergency off.

1.1.2 Warranty and liability for application examples

The application examples are not binding and do not claim to be complete regarding
configuration, equipment or any eventuality which may arise. The application examples do not
represent specific customer solutions, but are only intended to provide support for typical tasks.
You are responsible for the proper operation of the described products. These application
examples do not relieve you of your responsibility for safe handling when using, installing,
operating and maintaining the equipment.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 11
Safety instructions and industrial security
1.1 Fundamental safety instructions

1.1.3 Industrial security

Note
Industrial security
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens products and solutions only represent one component of such a
concept.
The customer is responsible for preventing unauthorized access to its plants, systems,
machines and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to
the enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate
security measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. For more information about industrial security, please visit:
Industrial security (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always
use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and
failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed at:
Industrial security (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulations (e.g. viruses, trojans, malware or worms) can cause unsafe operating
states in your system that may lead to death, serious injury, and property damage.
● Keep the software up to date.
● Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept for the installation or machine.
● Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security concept.
● Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with
suitable protection measures, e.g. virus scanners.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

12 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Safety instructions and industrial security
1.2 Use write and know-how protection

1.2 Use write and know-how protection

Prevent unauthorized changes by means of know-how protection

WARNING
Danger to life through manipulation of DCC charts and DCC libraries
The use of unprotected DCC charts and libraries entails a higher risk of manipulation of DCC
charts, DCC libraries and backup files.
● Protect important DCC charts and DCC libaries by using know-how protection programs
or via the know-how protection for drive units in the SCOUT/STARTER. You can prevent
manipulation by assigning a strong password.
● For know-how protection programs and the know-how protection of drive units, use
passwords which include at least eight characters, upper and lower cases, numbers and
special characters.
● Make sure that only authorized personnel can access the passwords.
● Protect the backup files on your file system using a write protection.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 13
Safety instructions and industrial security
1.3 Industrial Security Configuration Manual

1.3 Industrial Security Configuration Manual

Manual on industrial security

Further information can be found in the configuration manual "Industrial Security" for
SINAMICS, SINUMERIK and SIMOTION at Security Manual (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/document/108862708/sinumerik-simotion-sinamics-
industrial-security?dti=0&lc=en-DE).
Note in particular the explanations on the cell protection concept in Section "General security
measures - Network segmentation".

Description of the DCC standard blocks

14 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
Introduction 2
2.1 Introduction to the Drive Control Chart (DCC)
Drive Control Chart (DCC) for SINAMICS and SIMOTION means graphic configuration and
expansion of the device functionality by means of freely available control, calculation and logic
blocks.
Drive Control Chart (DCC) expands the facility for the simplest possible configuring of
technological functions both for the SIMOTION motion control system and the SINAMICS drive
system. This opens up a new dimension for users for adapting the specified systems to the
specific functions of their machines. DCC has no restriction with regard to the number of usable
functions; this is only limited by the performance capability of the target platform.

The user-friendly DCC Editor enables easy graphics-based configuration, allows control loop
structures to be clearly represented and provides a high degree of reusability of diagrams that
have already been created.
The open-loop and closed-loop control functionality is defined by using multi-instance-capable
blocks (Drive Control Blocks - DCBs) from a predefined library (DCB library) that are selected
and graphically linked by dragging and dropping. Test and diagnostic functions allow the
program behavior to be verified and, in the case of a fault, the cause identified.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 15
Introduction
2.1 Introduction to the Drive Control Chart (DCC)

The block library contains a large selection of control, arithmetic and logic blocks as well as
extensive open-loop and closed-loop control functions.
All commonly used logic functions are available for selection (AND, XOR, On/Off delay, RS
flip-flop, counters, etc.) for the logic operation, evaluation and acquisition of binary signals.
Numerous calculation functions, such as summation, division and minimum/maximum
evaluation are available for monitoring and evaluating numeric variables. In addition to the
drive control, axial winder functions, PI controllers, ramp-function generators or sweep
generators can be configured simply and without problem.
Almost unlimited programming of control structures is possible in conjunction with the
SIMOTION motion control system. These can then be combined with other program sections
to form an overall program.
Drive Control Chart for SINAMICS drives also provides a convenient basis for resolving drive-
related open-loop and closed-loop control tasks directly in the converter. This results in further
adaptability of SINAMICS for the tasks set. Local data processing in the drive supports the
implementation of modular machine concepts and results in an increase in the overall machine
performance.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

16 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Introduction
2.2 Libraries

2.2 Libraries
Blocks are located in libraries that are imported as technology packages in the DCC editor.
There are two different libraries:
1. The SIMOTION library contains the SIMOTION blocks identified in this document.
2. The SINAMICS library contains the SINAMICS blocks identified in this document.
To find out which of the blocks described here are available within SIMOTION and/or
SINAMICS, you can use both the overview in Appendix A3 and the sections on block
descriptions.

Compatibility

SIMOTION
The compatibility of the standard library for the SIMOTION devices is described on the
SIMOTION SCOUT DVD and at the following link on the Internet:
SIMOTION compatibility list (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/18857317)

SINAMICS
The following standard libraries are executable with SINAMICS V5.1:
● SINAMICS V5.1 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics5_1)
● SINAMICS V4.8 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_8)
● SINAMICS V4.7 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_7)
● SINAMICS V4.6 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_6)
● SINAMICS V4.5 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_5)
● SINAMICS V4.4 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_4)
● SINAMICS V4.3 (dcblibV2_0_sinamics4_3)
The following standard libraries are executable with SINAMICS V4.8:
● SINAMICS V4.8 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_8)
● SINAMICS V4.7 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_7)
● SINAMICS V4.6 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_6)
● SINAMICS V4.5 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_5)
● SINAMICS V4.4 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_4)
● SINAMICS V4.3 (dcblibV2_0_sinamics4_3)
The following standard libraries are executable with SINAMICS V4.7:
● SINAMICS V4.7 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_7)
● SINAMICS V4.6 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_6)
● SINAMICS V4.5 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_5)

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 17
Introduction
2.2 Libraries

● SINAMICS V4.4 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_4)

● SINAMICS V4.3 (dcblibV2_0_sinamics4_3)
The following standard libraries are executable with SINAMICS V4.6:
● SINAMICS V4.6 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_6)
● SINAMICS V4.5 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_5)
● SINAMICS V4.4 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_4)
● SINAMICS V4.3 (dcblibV2_0_sinamics4_3)
With SINAMICS V4.5, the following standard libraries are executable:
● SINAMICS V4.5 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_5)
● SINAMICS V4.4 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_4)
● SINAMICS V4.3 (dcblibV2_0_sinamics4_3)
With SINAMICS V4.4, the following standard libraries are executable:
● SINAMICS V4.4 (dcblibV3_0_sinamics4_4)
● SINAMICS V4.3 (dcblibV2_0_sinamics4_3)
With SINAMICS V4.3.x, the following standard libraries are executable:
● SINAMICS V4.3 (dcblibV2_0_sinamics4_3)
With SINAMICS V2.6.x, the following standard libraries are executable:
● SINAMICS V2.6 (dcblibV2_0_sinamics2_6)
With SINAMICS V2.5.SP1, the following standard libraries are executable:
● SINAMICS V2.5 (dcblibV2_0_sinamics2_5_1)

Description of the DCC standard blocks

18 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Introduction
2.3 Nomenclature of the blocks

2.3 Nomenclature of the blocks

A block is displayed as follows:

DEL
,QSXWYDULDEOH 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
5HVSRQVHWKUHVKROG

  

① Block designator
② Connection designator
③ Connection data type

It is identified using the following attributes:

Block designator
Each data type has its own block type. To simplify differentiation between the blocks for various
data types with the same functionality, these are provided with a postfix corresponding to the
data type, whereby postfix is not usually used for the Real and Bool data types (e.g. MUL_I:
Integer-type multiplier, MUL: Real-type multiplier). The following table lists commonly used
extensions:

Table 2-1 Block designator

Postfix for block designator Data type of the input/output variable

_I Integer
_D Double_Integer
_W Word
_R Real (optional)
_B Bool (optional)
_SI Short Integer
_M Modulo
_BY Byte
_UI Unsigned Integer
_US Unsigned Short Integer
_UD Unsigned Double Integer
_DW Double Word
_LR Long Real

Connection designator
● To identify a field from the input or output variable, the designator is extended by an index
beginning with 1 (e.g. X1, X2, X3, etc.).
● With a generic number of inputs (e.g. ADD), the connection name is indexed beginning with
1 (e.g. X1, X2, X3, etc.).

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 19
Introduction
2.3 Nomenclature of the blocks

The following table shows an overview of common connection designators:

Table 2-2 Connection designator

Connection designator Use

X, X1, X2... Numeric input variable
Y, Y1, Y2... Numeric output variable
I, I1, I2... Binary input variable
Q, Q1, Q2... Binary output variable
IS Bit string input (Word)
QS Bit string output (Word)

If further inputs and outputs are used along with the primary input and output variables (e.g.
limit values, time data, substitute values, status displays), the designators from the pool of the
primary input/output variables are not used. The following table shows the preferred
designators for secondary variables:

Connection designator Use

LU Input: Upper limit
LL Input: Lower limit
SV Input: Setting value
S Input: Setting the setting value
R Input: Resetting the setting value
QU Output: Upper limit reached
QL Output: Lower limit reached
QF Output: Fault flag
QE Output Y equals input X
QN Inverted binary variable

Connection data type

The abbreviated designators of the data types are listed in the following table:

Abbreviation Bit width Data type accord‐ Description

ing to
IEC 61131-3
BO 1 BOOL BOOLEAN
BY 8 BYTE Bit string, Unsigned Integer
SI 8 SINT Signed Short Integer
DI 32 DINT Signed Double Integer
DW 32 DWORD Bit string, Unsigned Integer
I 16 INT Signed Integer
R 32 REAL Floating Point Single Precision acc. to IEEE 754
LR 64 LREAL Floating Point Double Precision according to IEEE
754
T 32 SDTIME Floating Point Single Precision according to
IEEE754

Description of the DCC standard blocks

20 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Introduction
2.3 Nomenclature of the blocks

Abbreviation Bit width Data type accord‐ Description

ing to
IEC 61131-3
W 16 WORD Bit string, Unsigned Integer
AID 32 - Alarm ID

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 21
Introduction
2.4 Block connections

2.4 Block connections

Block connections display the interface of the DCBs, via which interconnection between the
blocks can be performed. A distinction is made between
● Block output
● Block input
here, and these have the following properties:
● Inputs are positioned on the left of the block and are the target of an interconnection
● Outputs are positioned on the right of the block and are the source of an interconnection

Description of the DCC standard blocks

22 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Introduction
2.5 Byte ordering

2.5 Byte ordering

When interconnecting the blocks, the byte ordering of the data does not have to be taken into
consideration. During data type conversions and arithmetic operations, the byte ordering of
the target system is implicitly taken into consideration. Any byte swapping required for handling
data beyond the system boundaries is carried out by the system (e.g. byte swapping may have
to be carried out in Big Endian format before transferring data via PROFIBUS).

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 23
Introduction
2.6 Direct interconnection of different data types

2.6 Direct interconnection of different data types

When interconnecting blocks, the target and source must be of the same data type. If the data
types are different, there are special conversion blocks available which allow the data type to
be converted.
The following permissible implicit conversions are an exception. The table below lists the
permissible conversions.
The following data types, which can be interconnected without a conversion block, are another
exception. In this case, the binary value of the output variable is transferred unchanged as the
input variable.

Table 2-3 Conversions

Input Output Description

WORD INT Interconnection of a word variable to an integer variable
INT WORD Interconnection of an integer variable to a word variable
DWORD DINT Interconnection of a double word variable to a double integer variable
DINT DWORD Interconnection of a double integer variable to a double word variable
BYTE SINT Interconnection of a byte variable to a short integer variable
SINT BYTE Interconnection of a short integer variable to a byte variable
USINT BYTE Interconnection of an unsigned short integer variable to a byte variable
BYTE USINT Interconnection of a byte variable to an unsigned short integer variable
USINT SINT Interconnection of an unsigned short integer variable to a short integer
variable
SINT USINT Interconnection of a short integer variable to an unsigned short integer
variable
UINT WORD Interconnection of an unsigned integer variable to a word variable
WORD UINT Interconnection of a word variable to an unsigned integer variable
UINT INT Interconnection of an unsigned integer variable to an integer variable
INT UINT Interconnection of an integer variable to an unsigned integer variable
UDINT DWORD Interconnection of an unsigned double integer variable to a double word
variable
DWORD UDINT Interconnection of a double word variable to an unsigned double integer
variable
UDINT DINT Interconnection of an unsigned double integer variable to a double in‐
teger variable
DINT UDINT Interconnection of a double integer variable to an unsigned double in‐
teger variable
SDTIME REAL Interconnection of an SDTime variable to a real variable

Description of the DCC standard blocks

24 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Introduction
2.7 Initialization of the blocks

2.7 Initialization of the blocks

Initialization determines the starting condition of the block. It is carried out by the system before
the cyclical processing1) of the block. The sequence for initializing the individual blocks is
implemented according to the configured priority and process sequence. At the time of
initialization, the configured interconnections and constants for a block are already active. At
this point, the values from the interconnection source are already available in a block. Should
a block behave in a special way during initialization, this is described in the respective block
description under "Initialization". In the case of initialization, the blocks must be assigned in a
time slice (SINAMICS) or to a task (SIMOTION).
1)
As of SIMOTION 4.1 SP2, initialization is performed during a STOP/RUN transition
(SIMOTION) or during the transition to cyclical operation (SINAMICS).

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 25
Introduction
2.8 Implementing complex functions in a sample configuration

2.8 Implementing complex functions in a sample configuration

Sample configurations are available for the "convenient ramp-function generator" and
"technology controller". These are based on the "free blocks" of the SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES frequency converter series.
The functionality of the convenient ramp-function generator is implemented by interconnecting
individual DCBs. They are provided in the form of a sample configuration.
Notes relating to the technology controller
● The smoothing filters cannot be deactivated using the time constant T = 0, as the time
constant is limited to the sampling time of the block. The filters must be deactivated explicitly
by a signal. The corresponding binary input must be provided in the sample configuration.
● The D component cannot be deactivated using the delay time Tv = 0. This must be
deactivated explicitly by a binary signal. The corresponding binary input must be provided
in the sample configuration.
● The I component cannot be deactivated using Tn = 0. For this, the I component of PIC must
be reset explicitly using SV = 0 and S = 1.
Note
Here, you should now also use the advantage of DCC and configure/transfer only the blocks
that are required, i.e. not fall back on the sample configurations from the outset and start
with the basic blocks, such as RGJ (ramp-function generator with rounding) or PIC (PI
controller) and expand, if necessary.

Import sample configuration

The sample configuration is archived in the form of exported DCC charts as of SCOUT/
STARTER version V4.3.

SIMOTION
In order to import the DCC chart in SCOUT, a SIMOTION device needs to be present in the
project. In the Programs folder, select the path of the exported DCC chart via the shortcut
menu Expert -> Import object. The files can usually be found under the following path:
C:\Program Files\Siemens\Step7\Examples\dcc\SIMOTION

SINAMICS
To import the DCC chart in SCOUT/STARTER, an S120 drive unit with a drive object (DO)
must be present in the project. On the drive object, select the path of the exported DCC chart
via the shortcut menu Expert -> Import object. The files can usually be found under the following
path:
C:\Program Files\Siemens\Step7\Examples\dcc\SINAMICS
Up to SCOUT/STARTER version V4.3, the sample configuration was archived as a project
export under the following path:

Description of the DCC standard blocks

26 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Introduction
2.8 Implementing complex functions in a sample configuration

C:\Program Files\Siemens\Step7\Examples\dcc\Examples_CRGE_TCLR.xml

Note
The sample project has been created on the basis of a SCOUT project and thus contains both
the configurations for SINAMICS_Integrated and SINAMICS standalone / CU320. When
importing the sample project with STARTER (stand-alone), the SIMOTION components are
naturally rejected; the CU320 components, however, continue to be accurately imported and
are reproducible.

NOT T2
RSS T2
1/22
RS-Flip-Flop, S 1/24

BO I Q BO BO S QP BO
0 = Ramp-function
BO R QN BO generator inital runs
NCM T2
1/23
R X1 QU BO
Acceleration
R X2 QU BO finished
QU BO
NSW T2
NSW T2 NSW T2
1/6 1/7 1/8
Ramp-function generator input
R X1 Y R R X1 Y R R X1 Y R Command Priority:
R X2 0 R X2 0 R X2
Quick stop ramp-function Stop Ramp-function from highest priority to lowest priority:
generator
BO I BO I BO I
generator
1. enamble ramp function generator / set to zero
NOP1_B T2 Bring Ramp-function
2. quick stop ramp function generator
1/1 generator to a standstill
BO I Q BO 3. set ramp function generator to setpoint value

4. bypass ramp function generator

NSW T2
1/10 5. bring ramp function generator to standstill
Set ramp-function NSW T2 0
1/9
R X1 Y R
generator 6. stop ramp function generator
R X1 Y R R X2
NOP1_B T2 Ramp-function generator BO RGJ T2
R X2 I 1/21
1/2 setting value
BO I Ramp-function
BO I Q BO R X Y R
generator output
R NRM YL R
task priority of function blocks:
R EV YA R
MUL it is important, that the blocks in front of the SV- input pin of
T2
NSW T2
AVA T2 R LU YB R the RGJ-block are ranked earlier in the task system than the
1/16 1/17 1/26 blocks in front of the S - input pin of the RGJ-block.
Acceleration
R X1 Y R R R LL QE BO
time X1 Y R R X Y R
1 Otherwise there may occure jumps of the output signal of the
R X2
0
R X2 R SV QU BO
Bypass ramp-function SN IR ramp function generator!
1
R X3 BO I R ASV QL BO
generator
Adaption
R X4 R WD
NOP1_B T2 Factor
R TU NCM T2
1/3
Deceleration time 1/25
BO I Q BO R TD R X1 QU BO
R TRU 0 Ramp-function
R X2 QU BO generator output = 0
MUL R TR1 QU BO
T2 NSW T2 NSW T2 AVA T2
1/19 1/20 1/27
1/18 R TR2
Deceleration R X1 Y R R X1 Y R R X1 Y R R X Y R
time R TRD
1 0 R R
R X2 X2 X2 SN IR
R TR3
1
R X3 BO I BO I
R TR4 switching of drive data sets:
Adaption
R X4 BO CU there is no switching of data sets available like in the sinamics.
Factor
BO CD If there are different data sets necessary, the user has to add aditional
BO CF numerical switches to change between the different data sets.
NOP1 T2 BO ULR
1/5
BSW T2
BO LLR
Quick stop time R X Y R 1/15
Enable rounding
BO I1 Q BO BO RQN ramp end rounding by sudden change of input value at ramp up:
0 BO I2 BO SA
this function is not existing in this program
BO I BO S
BO EN

OR T2 BSW T2 OR T2
OR-Stufe BOOL 1/11 1/12 OR-Stufe BOOL 1/14
BO I0 Q BO BO I1 Q BO BO I0 Q BO
0 0 BO I2 0
BO I1 BO I1
BO I 0
BO I2 BO I2
0
BO I3 BO I3

NOP1_B T2 NOT T2
1/4 1/13
BO I Q BO BO I Q BO
1 = Enable ramp-function generator
0 = Set ramp-function generator to zero Comfort ramp-function generator

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 27
Introduction
2.8 Implementing complex functions in a sample configuration

NOP1 T2 NSW T2 NSW T2

1/1 1/4 1/6
Setpoint Pre - control
R X Y R R X1 Y R R X1 Y R
value
R X2 0 R X2
PT1 T2 BO I BO I
PT1
1/2
R X Y R
ADD T2
PIC PIC
T2 ADD T2 LIM T2
R T 1/30 LIM 1/34
1/16 1 / 31
R SV 0 Output technology
R X1 Y R R W1 Y R R X1 Y R R X Y R
controller
BO S R W2 YE R R LU QU BO
R X2 R X2
0 R X1 YI R 0 R X3 R LL QL BO
R X3
NOP1_B R X2 QU BO 0 R X4
T2 R X4
Enable 1/3
R WP QL BO
Smooth BO I Q BO NSW T2
1/7 R LU MUL T2
1 0
R X1 Y R I Setting R LL 1/35
NOP1_B T2 NOP1 MUL 1 P-component
R X2 T2 T2 value R X1 Y R
1/5 1/17 1/24 R SV
Enable PI 0 = normal PID controller Basic R X2
BO I Q BO BO I R X Y R R X1 Y R R KP
controller 1 = PI controller with D-component Gain
with D 1 R TN R X3
in actual value channel R X2
NOP1 1 R X4
T2 1 BO IC
1/18 R X3
Gain BO EN
R X Y R R X4
Adaption
BO S I-component
NOP1 T2 BO HI
1/19
Integral
R X Y R
time
SUB T2 T2
1/9
NSW
NOP1 1/12 NOP1_B
T2 T2
1/8 R X1 Y R R X1 Y R 1/20
Actual Stop
R X Y R R X2 R X2 BO I Q BO
value P-controller
NSW T2
PT1 BO I DT1 1/15
PT1 T2 DT1 T2 0 NOP1_B
1/10 1/13 R X1 Y R T2
1/21
R X Y R R X Y R R X2 Enable
BO I Q BO
R T R T1 YPT R BO I PIC
R SV R TD NOP1_B T2
BO S R SV 1/22
Set BO I Q BO
BO S I-component
NOP1_B T2
Enable 1/11 NOP1_B T2
Smooth BO I NOP1_B 1/23
Q BO T2 Stop
2 1/14 BO I Q BO
Enable I-controller
BO I Q BO
Derivative term

RGE T2
1/32
Priority of commands: R X Y R
Using the Technology-Controller as P-
Controller: R NRM YA R
in order from highest to lowest priority:

for using the Technology-Controller as P-

R LU QE BO
1. enable PI-controller
Controller, set I_setvalue to zero and R LL QU BO
2. stop P-Controller Set_I_component to true NOP1 T2
1/27 R SV QL BO
3. set I-Component Acceleration
R X Y R R TU
time
4. stop I-Controller R TD
BO CU
disable smoothing: BO CD
enable PI-Controller with D: BO CF
to disable or enable smoothing use the
False: normal PID-Controller
variables enable_smooth_1 for smoothing in NOT T2 BO S
setpoint channel or enable_smooth_2 for 1/26
True: PI-Controller with D-component smoothing in actual value channel
BO I Q BO
in actual value channel

NOP1 T2 MUL T2 RGE T2

1/25 1/28 1/33
Limitation
R X Y R R X1 Y R R X Y R
Ramp-function generator
-1 R NRM YA R
R X2
1 R X3 R LU QE BO
1 R LL QU BO
R X4
R SV QL BO
NOP1 T2 R TU
1/29
Deceleration R TD
R X Y R
time
BO CU
BO CD
BO CF
BO S

Technology Controller

Description of the DCC standard blocks

28 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
Arithmetic 3
3.1 ACOS
Arc cosine function

Symbol

ACOS
$UJXPHQW 5 ; < 5 $UFFRVLQH
4) %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Determination of the arc cosine value for an argument

Method of operation
The block determines the associated arc cosine value in radian measure for an argument to
be entered at input X and outputs the result at output Y.
Y = arccos X
Permitted input range: -1.0 <= X <= +1.0
Output range: 0.0 <= Y <= ∏
If the argument lies outside of the permitted input range, output Y is limited to ∏ (when X <
-1.0) or 0.0 (when X > +1.0) and binary output QF = 1 is set at the same time.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 29
Arithmetic
3.1 ACOS

Transfer function

\
< $5&&26 ; 




















[
                        

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Argument 0.0 REAL
Y Arc cosine ∏/2 REAL
QF Output variable 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

30 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.2 ADD

3.2 ADD
Adder (REAL type)

Symbol

ADD
$GGHQG 5 ; < 5 7RWDO

Brief description
Adder with up to four inputs of the REAL type

Method of operation
The block adds the values entered at the X inputs, taking account of the sign. The result, limited
to the range of -3.402823 E38 to 3.402823 E38, is output at output Y.

Algorithm:
Y = X1 + X2 + X3 + X4

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Addend 0.0 REAL
Y Total 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Can be configured Cyclic tasks
in
Special characteris‐ X comprises up to four inputs (X1 to X4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 31
Arithmetic
3.3 ADD_D

3.3 ADD_D
Adder (double integer type)

Symbol

ADD_D
$GGHQG ', ; < ', 7RWDO
4) %2 2YHUIORZ

Brief description
Adder with up to four inputs of the double integer type

Method of operation
The block adds the values entered at the X inputs, taking account of the sign. The result, limited
to a range of approximately -2147483648 (231) to +2147483647 (231-1), is output at output Y.

Algorithm:
Y = X1 + X2 + X3 + X4

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Addend 0 DINT
Y Total 0 DINT
QF Overflow 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ X comprises up to four inputs (X1 to X4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

32 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.4 ADD_l

3.4 ADD_l
Adder (integer type)

Symbol

ADD_I
$GGHQG , ; < , 7RWDO

Brief description
Adder with up to four inputs of the integer type

Method of operation
The block adds the values entered at the X inputs, taking account of the sign. The result, limited
to the range of -32768 to +32767, is output at output Y.

Algorithm:
Y = X1 + X2 + X3 + X4

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Addend 0 INT
Y Total 0 INT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ X comprises up to four inputs (X1 to X4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 33
Arithmetic
3.5 ADD_M

3.5 ADD_M
Modulo adder for addition in correct axis cycle

Symbol

ADD_M
0RGXORYDOXH D[LVF\FOHOHQJWK ', 02' < ', 0RGXORYDOXHIURP;;
$GGLWLRQYDOXH ', ; 43 %2 3RVLWLYHRYHUIORZ
$GGLWLRQYDOXH ', ; 41 %2 1HJDWLYHRYHUIORZ
$FWLYDWHVWKH %2 (26
RYHUIORZHYDOXDWLRQ

Brief description
The ADD_M block is used to add position values. It can be used to "add up" offsets for position
setpoints or for dead time compensation in the real master.

Block diagram

;

<
;
7$
<Q
 <Q<!0RG
Q 43
<Q


(26




02'
 <Q
<Q<0RG 41
Q
<Q

Description of the DCC standard blocks

34 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.5 ADD_M

Method of operation
This block adds the input values X1 and X2. A modulo value can be specified at the MOD
input. The module value must be in the range of 1 to 231-1 and is applied to the sum of X1 and
X2. Thus, the result Y of the modulo operation is always in the band from 0 to MOD.
The EOS input can be used to activate an overflow evaluation. When EOS = 1:
Positive overflow: QP = Yn-1-Yn> MOD/2
Negative overflow: QN = Yn-1 – Yn < -MOD/2
When EOS = 0: QP = 0; QN = 0
This enables the overflow evaluation to be deactivated when setting offsets. When the modulo
value is changed, the overflow evaluation is switched off for one cycle.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
MOD Modulo value = axis cycle length 1 DINT
X1 Addition value 1 0 DINT
X2 Addition value 2 0 DINT
EOS Activates the overflow evaluation 0 0/1
Y Modulo value from X1+X2 0 DINT
QP Positive overflow 0 0/1
QN Negative overflow 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 35
Arithmetic
3.6 ASIN

3.6 ASIN
Arc sine function

Symbol

ASIN
$UJXPHQW 5 ; < 5 $UFVLQH
4) %2 ,QSXWHUURU

Brief description
Determination of the arc sine value for an argument

Method of operation
The block determines the associated arc sine value in radian measure for an argument to be
entered at input X and outputs the result at output Y.
Y = arcsin X
Permitted input range: -1.0 <= X <= +1.0
Output range: -∏/2 <= Y <= ∏/2
If the argument lies outside of the permitted input range of |X| <= 1.0, output Y is limited to -
∏/2 (when X < -1.0) or ∏/2 (when X > +1.0) and binary output QF = 1 is set at the same time.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

36 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.6 ASIN

XY diagram

\
< $5&6,1 ;












[
                    













Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Argument 0.0 REAL
Y Arc sine 0.0 REAL
QF Input error 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 37
Arithmetic
3.7 ATAN

3.7 ATAN
Arc tangent function

Symbol

ATAN
$UJXPHQW 5 ; < 5 $UFWDQJHQW

Brief description
Determination of the arc tangent value for an argument

Method of operation
The block determines the associated arc tangent value in radian measure for an argument to
be entered at input X and outputs the result at output Y.
Y = arctan X
Permitted input range: -3.402823 E38 to 3.402823 E38
Output range: -∏/2 <= Y <= ∏/2

Description of the DCC standard blocks

38 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.7 ATAN

XY diagram

\
< $5&7$1 ;










[
            











Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Argument 0.0 REAL
Y Arc tangent 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 39
Arithmetic
3.8 AVA

3.8 AVA
Absolute value generator, with sign evaluation

Symbol

AVA
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 $EVROXWHYDOXHRILQSXWYDULDEOH
61 %2 ,QSXWYDULDEOHQHJDWLYH

Brief description
Arithmetic function block for absolute value generation of type real

Method of operation
The block generates the absolute value of the value at input X (input variable). The result is
output at output Y.
Y = |X|
If the input variable is negative, binary output SN = 1 is set at the same time.

Block diagram

<
;
61

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
Y Absolute value of input variable 0.0 REAL
SN Input variable negative 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

40 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.8 AVA

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 41
Arithmetic
3.9 AVA_D

3.9 AVA_D
Absolute value generator (double integer)

Symbol

AVA_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', $EVROXWHYDOXHRILQSXWYDULDEOH
61 %2 ,QSXWYDULDEOHQHJDWLYH

Brief description
Arithmetic function block for absolute value generation of type DOUBLE INTEGER

Method of operation
The block generates the absolute value of the value at input X (input variable). The result is
output at output Y.
Y = |X|
If the input variable is negative, binary output SN = 1 is set at the same time.
Output values Y -2147483648 and SN 1 are set for input value -2147483648.

Block diagram

<
;
61

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 DINT
Y Absolute value of input variable 0 DINT
SN Input variable negative 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

42 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.9 AVA_D

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 43
Arithmetic
3.10 COS

3.10 COS
Cosine function

Symbol

COS
$UJXPHQW 5 ; < 5 &RVLQH

Brief description
Determination of the cosine value for an argument

Method of operation
The block determines the associated cosine value in radian measure for an argument to be
entered at input X and outputs the result at output Y.
Y = cos X

XY diagram

\
< &26 ;










[
            











Description of the DCC standard blocks

44 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.10 COS

X is modular ∏

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Argument 0.0 REAL
Y Cosine 1 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓ (as of V4.1)

SINAMICS ✓ (as of V4.4)
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 45
Arithmetic
3.11 DIV

3.11 DIV
Divider (REAL type)

Symbol

DIV
'LYLGHQG 5 ; < 5 4XRWLHQW
'LYLVRU 5 ; <,1 5 ,QWHJHUTXRWLHQW
02' 5 'LYLVLRQUHPDLQGHU
4) %2 'LYLVRULV]HUR

Brief description
Divider with two real-type inputs

Method of operation
The block divides the value entered at connection X1 by the value entered at connection X2.
The result is output at outputs Y, YIN, and MOD:
● The Y output contains the quotient with integer places and decimal places
● The YIN output contains the integer quotient
● The MOD output contains the division remainder (absolute residual value)
The Y output is limited to a range of approximately -3.4 E38 to +3.4 E38.

;
<=
;
MOD = (Y – YIN) * X2
If the output value Y violates the permissible value range of -3.402823 E38 to 3.402823 E38
(because the divisor X2 is very small or zero), then the limit value of the output range is output
at connection Y with the correct sign. The binary output QF=1 is set at the same time. If X2 is
zero, then the outputs YIN and MOD retain their last values.
With division of 0/0, the block output Y remains unchanged. The binary output QF is set to 1.
With a division by zero, output MOD retains its last value.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

46 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.11 DIV

Truth table(s)
The following truth table lists the block responses in the cases specified above.

X1/X2 Y YIN MOD OF

X/0 Limit value with correct YIN n-1 MOD n-1 1
sign
0/0 Y n-1 YIN n-1 MOD n-1 1
0/X 0 0 0 0

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Dividend 0.0 REAL
X2 Divisor 1 REAL
Y Quotient 0.0 REAL
YIN Integer quotient 0.0 REAL
MOD Division remainder 0.0 REAL
QF Divisor is zero 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 47
Arithmetic
3.12 DIV_D

3.12 DIV_D
Divider (double integer type)

Symbol

DIV_D
'LYLGHQG ', ; < ', 4XRWLHQW
'LYLVRU ', ; 02' ', 'LYLVLRQUHPDLQGHU
4) %2 'LYLVRULV]HUR

Brief description
Divider with two inputs of the double integer type

Method of operation
The block divides the value entered at connection X1 by the value entered at connection X2
taking account of the sign. The quotient, limited to the range of -2147483648 (231) to
2147483647 (231 -1), is output at connection Y.

;
<=
;
The division remainder is output at connection MOD. The sign of the division remainder MOD
matches that of dividend X1.
MOD = X1 MOD X2
When output value Y exceeds the permissible range of -2147483648 (231) to +2147483647
(231-1) (because divisor X2 is zero), then the limit value of the output range with the correct
sign is output at connection Y. The binary output QF = 1 is set at the same time.
With division of 0/0, the block output Y remains unchanged. The binary output QF is set to 1.
With a division by zero, output MOD retains its last value.

Truth table(s)
The following truth table lists the block responses in the cases specified above.

X1/X2 Y MOD OF
X/0 Limit value with correct MOD n-1 1
sign
0/0 Y n-1 MOD n-1 1
0/X 0 0 0

Description of the DCC standard blocks

48 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.12 DIV_D

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Dividend 0 DINT
X2 Divisor 1 DINT
Y Quotient 0 DINT
MOD Division remainder 0 DINT
QF Divisor is zero 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 49
Arithmetic
3.13 DIV_I

3.13 DIV_I
Divider (integer type)

Symbol

DIV_I
'LYLGHQG , ; < , 4XRWLHQW
'LYLVRU , ; 02' , 'LYLVLRQUHPDLQGHU
4) %2 'LYLVRULV]HUR

Brief description
Divider with two integer-type inputs

Method of operation
The block divides the value entered at connection X1 by the value entered at connection X2
taking account of the sign. The quotient is limited to the range of -32768 to +32767 and output
at connection Y.

;
<=
;
The division remainder is output at connection MOD. The sign of the division remainder MOD
matches that of dividend X1.
MOD = X1 MOD X2
When output value Y exceeds the permissible range of -32768 to +32767 (because the divisor
is zero), then the limit value of the output range with the correct sign is output at connection
Y. The binary output QF = 1 is set at the same time.
With division of 0/0, the block output Y remains unchanged. The binary output QF is set to 1.
With a division by zero, output MOD retains its last value.

Truth table(s)
The following truth table lists the block responses in the cases specified above.

X1/X2 Y MOD OF
X/0 Limit value with correct MOD n-1 1
sign
0/0 Y n-1 MOD n-1 1
0/X 0 0 0

Description of the DCC standard blocks

50 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.13 DIV_I

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Dividend 0 INT
X2 Divisor 1 INT
Y Quotient 0 INT
MOD Division remainder 0 INT
QF Divisor is zero 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 51
Arithmetic
3.14 MAS

3.14 MAS
Maximum evaluator

Symbol

MAS
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 0D[LPXPLQSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Comparison block with up to four inputs of the REAL type to determine the largest input value
present at the time of processing

Method of operation
The block determines the largest of the values present at inputs X 1-4.
The result is output at output Y.
Y = max. {X1, X2, X3, X4}
If the same value is present at all inputs, this value is output as the maximum input variable.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable -3.402823 E38 REAL
Y Maximum input variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ X comprises up to four inputs (X1 to X4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

52 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.15 MIS

3.15 MIS
Minimum evaluator

Symbol

MIS
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 0LQLPXPLQSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Comparison block with up to four REAL-type inputs to determine the smallest input value
present at the time of processing.

Method of operation
The block determines the smallest of the values present at inputs X 1-4.
The result is output at output Y.
Y = min. {X1, X2, X3, X4}
If the same value is present at all inputs, this value is output as the minimum input variable.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 3.402823 E38 REAL
Y Minimum input variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ X comprises up to four inputs (X1 to X4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 53
Arithmetic
3.16 MUL

3.16 MUL
Multiplier (REAL type)

Symbol

MUL
)DFWRU 5 ; < 5 3URGXFW

Brief description
Multiplier with up to four real-type inputs

Method of operation
The block multiplies the values entered at the generic inputs X 1-4 taking account of the sign.
The result, limited to the range of -3.402823 E38 to +3.402823 E38, is output at output Y.
Y = X1 x X2 x X3 x X4

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Factor 1.0 REAL
Y Product 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ X comprises up to four inputs (X1 to X4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

54 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.17 MUL_D

3.17 MUL_D
Multiplier (double integer type)

Symbol

MUL_D
)DFWRU ', ; < ', 3URGXFW
4) %2 2YHUIORZ

Brief description
Multiplier with up to four double integer-type inputs

Method of operation
The block multiplies the values entered at the generic inputs X 1-4 taking account of the sign.
The result, limited to a range of approximately -2147483648 (231) to +2147483647 (231-1), is
output at output Y.
Y = X1 x X2 x X3 x X4

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Factor 1 DINT
Y Product 0 DINT
QF Overflow 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ X comprises up to four inputs (X1 to X4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 55
Arithmetic
3.18 MUL_I

3.18 MUL_I
Multiplier (integer type)

Symbol

MUL_I
)DFWRU , ; < , 3URGXFW
<', ', ',17SURGXFW

Brief description
Multiplier with up to four integer-type inputs

Method of operation
The block multiplies the values entered at the generic inputs X 1-4 taking account of the sign.
The result, limited to the range of -32768 to +32767, is output at output Y. In addition, the
result, limited to a range of -2147483648 (231) to +2147483647 (231-1), is output at output YDI.
Y = X1 x X2 x X3 x X4

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Factor 1 INT
Y Product 0 INT
YDI DINT product 0 DINT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ X comprises up to four inputs (X1 to X4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

56 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.19 PLI20

3.19 PLI20
Polyline, 20 breakpoints

Symbol

PLI20
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %
%UHDNSRLQWDEVFLVVD$ 5 $
%UHDNSRLQWRUGLQDWH% 5 %

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 57
Arithmetic
3.19 PLI20

Brief description
Block of the REAL type
● For linearization of characteristic curves
● For simulation of non-linear transfer elements
● For controller gain defined in sections

Method of operation
● The block adapts output variable Y arbitrarily to input variable X by means of up to 20
breakpoints in four quadrants.
● Interpolation is carried out linearly between the breakpoints. Outside of A1 and A20, the
characteristic curve runs horizontally.

Configuration notes
During configuration, you must ensure that the values of A1 to A20 are sorted in ascending
order otherwise incorrect values are output. The ordinate values B1 to B20 can be selected
arbitrarily, i.e. irrespective of the preceding value.
If breakpoints are not needed (e.g. as of A16/B16 ), the following abscissas and ordinates (A16/
B16 to A20/B20) must be assigned the same values as A15/B15.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

58 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.19 PLI20

Example

$%
< $%
$% $%
$%
$%
$%

$%
$%

$%
;Q
;
$%
$%
$%
$%
$%
$%
$% $%
<Q
$%
$%

Simulation of the magnetization characteristic curve

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
A1 Breakpoint abscissa A1 0.0 REAL
B1 Breakpoint ordinate B1 0.0 REAL
O2 Breakpoint abscissa A2 0.0 REAL
B2 Breakpoint ordinate B2 0.0 REAL
O3 Breakpoint abscissa A3 0.0 REAL
B3 Breakpoint ordinate B3 0.0 REAL

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 59
Arithmetic
3.19 PLI20

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
A4 Breakpoint abscissa A4 0.0 REAL
B4 Breakpoint ordinate B4 0.0 REAL
A5 Breakpoint abscissa A5 0.0 REAL
B5 Breakpoint ordinate B5 0.0 REAL
A6 Breakpoint abscissa A6 0.0 REAL
B6 Breakpoint ordinate B6 0.0 REAL
A7 Breakpoint abscissa A7 0.0 REAL
B7 Breakpoint ordinate B7 0.0 REAL
A8 Breakpoint abscissa A8 0.0 REAL
B8 Breakpoint ordinate B8 0.0 REAL
A9 Breakpoint abscissa A9 0.0 REAL
B9 Breakpoint ordinate B9 0.0 REAL
A10 Breakpoint abscissa A10 0.0 REAL
B10 Breakpoint ordinate B10 0.0 REAL
A11 Breakpoint abscissa A11 0.0 REAL
B11 Breakpoint ordinate B11 0.0 REAL
A12 Breakpoint abscissa A12 0.0 REAL
B12 Breakpoint ordinate B12 0.0 REAL
A13 Breakpoint abscissa A13 0.0 REAL
B13 Breakpoint ordinate B13 0.0 REAL
A14 Breakpoint abscissa A14 0.0 REAL
B14 Breakpoint ordinate B14 0.0 REAL
A15 Breakpoint abscissa A15 0.0 REAL
B15 Breakpoint ordinate B15 0.0 REAL
A16 Breakpoint abscissa A16 0.0 REAL
B16 Breakpoint ordinate B16 0.0 REAL
A17 Breakpoint abscissa A17 0.0 REAL
B17 Breakpoint ordinate B17 0.0 REAL
A18 Breakpoint abscissa A18 0.0 REAL
B18 Breakpoint ordinate B18 0.0 REAL
A19 Breakpoint abscissa A19 0.0 REAL
B19 Breakpoint ordinate B19 0.0 REAL
A20 Breakpoint abscissa A20 0.0 REAL
B20 Breakpoint ordinate B20 0.0 REAL
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

60 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.19 PLI20

Can be loaded on‐ Yes

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 61
Arithmetic
3.20 SII

3.20 SII
Inverter

Symbol

SII
)DFWRU 5 ; < 5 3URGXFW

Brief description
● Inverter with one Real-type input
● Arithmetic function block for sign reversal

Method of operation
The block inverts input variable X and outputs the result at block output Y (in accordance with
the following transmission characteristic).
Y=-X

Transfer function

y 
<

y 

y  ;

y 

Description of the DCC standard blocks

62 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.20 SII

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Factor 0.0 REAL
Y Product 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 63
Arithmetic
3.21 SIN

3.21 SIN
Sine function

Symbol

SIN
$UJXPHQW 5 ; < 5 6LQXVRLGDO

Brief description
Determination of the sine value for an argument

Method of operation
● The block determines the associated sine value in radian measure for an argument to be
entered at input X and outputs the result at output Y.
● Y = sin X

XY diagram

\
< 6,1 ;










[
            











Description of the DCC standard blocks

64 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.21 SIN

X is modular ∏

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Argument 0.0 REAL
Y Sinusoidal 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓ (as of V4.1)

SINAMICS ✓ (as of V4.4)
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 65
Arithmetic
3.22 SQR

3.22 SQR
Square-root extractor

Symbol

SQR
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 ,QSXWYDULDEOHQHJDWLYH

Brief description
Arithmetic function block for determining the square root

Method of operation
The block calculates the square root of the value entered at connection X. The result is output
at connection Y.

<= ;
If the input variable is negative, the value zero is output at connection Y. The binary output QF
= 1 is set at the same time.

Truth table(s)

Condition Y QF
X>0 SQR(X) 0
X=0 0 0
X<0 0 1

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL
QF Input variable negative 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓ (as of V4.1)

SINAMICS ✓ (as of V4.4)

Description of the DCC standard blocks

66 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.22 SQR

Can be inserted on‐ Yes

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 67
Arithmetic
3.23 SUB

3.23 SUB
Subtractor (REAL type)

Symbol

SUB
0LQXHQG 5 ; < 5 'LIIHUHQFH
6XEWUDKHQG 5 ;

Brief description
Subtractor with two Real-type inputs

Method of operation
● The block subtracts the value entered at connection X2 from the value entered at
connection X1, taking account of the sign. The result is limited to the range of -3.402823
E38 to 3.402823 E38 and output at output Y.
● Y= X1-X2

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Minuend 0.0 REAL
X2 Subtrahend 0.0 REAL
Y Difference 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

68 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.24 SUB_D

3.24 SUB_D
Subtractor (DOUBLE INTEGER type)

Symbol

SUB_D
0LQXHQG ', ; < ', 'LIIHUHQFH
6XEWUDKHQG ', ; 4) %2 2YHUIORZ

Brief description
Subtractor with two inputs of the DOUBLE INTEGER type

Method of operation
The block subtracts the value entered at connection X2 from the value entered at connection
X1, taking account of the sign. The result, limited to a range of -2147483648 (231) to
+2147483647 (231-1), is output at output Y. An overflow is indicated at the binary output with
QF=1.
Y= X1-X2

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Minuend 0 DINT
X2 Subtrahend 0 DINT
Y Difference 0 DINT
QF Overflow 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 69
Arithmetic
3.25 SUB_I

3.25 SUB_I
Subtractor (INTEGER type)

Symbol

SUB_I
0LQXHQG , ; < , 'LIIHUHQFH
6XEWUDKHQG , ;

Brief description
Subtractor with two inputs of the INTEGER type

Method of operation
● The block subtracts the value entered at connection X2 from the value entered at
connection X1, taking account of the sign. The result, limited to a range of approximately
-32768 to 32767, is output at output Y.
● Y= X1-X2

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Minuend 0 INT
X2 Subtrahend 0 INT
Y Difference 0 INT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

70 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Arithmetic
3.26 TAN

3.26 TAN
Tangent

Symbol

TAN
$UJXPHQW 5 ; < 5 7DQJHQW
4) %2 7DQJHQWRXWVLGH
RIYDOXHUDQJH

Brief description
Determination of the tangent value for an angle

Method of operation
The block determines the associated tangent value in radian measure for an argument to be
entered at input X and outputs the result at output Y.
Y = tan X
Output range: -3.402823 E38 to 3.402823 E38
If the tangent value determined lies outside of the range of -3.402823 E38 to 3.402823 E38,
the block output Y is limited to -3.402823 E38 or +3.402823 E38, and the binary output QF =
1 is set at the same time.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 71
Arithmetic
3.26 TAN

Transfer function

\
< 7$1 ;








[
            











Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Argument 0.0 REAL
Y Tangent 0.0 REAL
QF Tangent outside the value range 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

72 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
Logic 4
4.1 AND
Logic AND operation (BOOL type)

Symbol

AND
%LQDU\LQSXW %2 , 4 %2 %LQDU\YDOXH$1'

Brief description
AND block with up to four inputs of the BOOL type

Method of operation
The block combines the binary values at the inputs I 1-4 to a logic AND and outputs the result
at its binary output Q.
Q = I01∧...∧I04
Output Q = 1, when the value 1 is present at all generic inputs I1 to I4. In all other cases, output
Q = 0.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 73
Logic
4.1 AND

Truth table(s)

,QSXW 2XWSXW

, , , , 4

 

 

 

 

    

$UELWUDU\

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Binary input 1 0/1
Q Binary value AND 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ I comprises up to four connections (I1 to I4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

74 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.2 AND_W

4.2 AND_W
Logic AND operation (WORD type)

Symbol

AND_W
,QSXWVWDWXVZRUG : , 46 : 6WDWXVZRUG$1'
4 %2 %LQDU\RXWSXW

Brief description
AND_W block with up to four inputs of the WORD type

Method of operation
16 binary states are combined in a status word.
This function block links the status words I01 to I16 bit-by-bit according to the logic AND function.
The corresponding bits of status word AND are then set at block output QS.
The following applies for bit k of status word AND:

46N=,N∧  ∧,QQNN=
A bit of the AND status word is equal to 0 when at least one of the equivalent bits on the block
inputs I1 to I4 is equal to 0.
The binary output Q is 1 if at least one bit of the status word AND is equal to 1.

Following state diagram (for 3 inputs)

6WDWXVZRUG
,
              

6WDWXVZRUG
,
               

6WDWXVZRUG
,
               

6WDWXVZRUG
46
               

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 75
Logic
4.2 AND_W

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Input status word 16#FFFF WORD
QS Status word AND 16#0000 WORD
Q Binary output 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ I comprises up to four inputs (I1 to I4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

76 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.3 BF

4.3 BF
Flashing function (BOOL type)

Symbol

BF
)ODVKLQJGXUDWLRQ PV 76 7 4 %2 )ODVKLQJRXWSXW
(QDEOH %2 (1

Brief description
Block of the BOOL type
● For controlling signal encoders
● As clock generator

Method of operation
This block sets its output Q alternately to 1 and 0 at a frequency of interval T, as long as input
EN = 1.
If enable input EN = 0, then output Q = 0.
In this case, T is both the light duration and the dark duration.

Block diagram

(1 4

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 77
Logic
4.3 BF

Time diagram


(1

7 7

4


Flashing pulse Q subject to flashing duration T and the enable EN

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
T Flashing duration (0 ms) 0 SDTIME
EN Enable 0 0/1
Q Flashing output 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

78 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.4 BF_W

4.4 BF_W
Flashing function for status word (WORD type)

Symbol

BF_W
6WDWXVZRUG : ,6 46 : )ODVKLQJRXWSXWVWDWXVZRUG
)ODVKLQJGXUDWLRQ PV 76 7

Brief description
Block of the WORD type for controlling signal encoder combinations

Method of operation
This block sets all bits of the input status word IS that have a logic value of 1 alternately to 1
and 0 in the output status word QS at a frequency of interval T.
In this case, T is both the light duration and the dark duration.

Block diagram

,6 46

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
IS Status word 16#0000 WORD
T Flashing duration (0 ms) 0 WORD
QS Flashing output status word 16#0000 WORD

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 79
Logic
4.4 BF_W

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

80 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.5 BSW

4.5 BSW
Binary change-over switch (BOOL type)

Symbol

BSW
,QSXWYDULDEOH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH %2 ,
6ZLWFKSRVLWLRQ %2 ,

Brief description
The block switches one of two binary input variables to the output.

Method of operation
If input I = 0, then I1 is given to output Q.
If input I = 1, then I2 is given to output Q.

Block diagram

,

4
,

Truth table(s)

Switch position 1 Output variable Q

0 Q = I1
1 Q = I1

Initialization
If input I = 0, then I1 is given to output Q.
If input I = 1, then I2 is given to output Q.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 81
Logic
4.5 BSW

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I1 Input variable 1 0 0/1
I2 Input variable 2 0 0/1
I Switch position 0 0/1
Q Output variable 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

82 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.6 CNM

4.6 CNM
Controllable numeric memory (REAL type)

Symbol

CNM
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 6DYHGLQSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ;
6DYHLQSXWYDULDEOH %2 ,
6DYHLQSXWYDULDEOH %2 ,

Brief description
Block of the REAL type for saving an instantaneous input value (sample-and-hold function)
with
● Selectable input
● Selectable save time
● Rising edge-initiated triggering
The blocks CNM_I and CNM_ D fulfill the same function. They only differ in the data type used.

Method of operation
On a rising edge at I1, X1 is switched through to output Y.
On a rising edge at I2, X2 is switched through to output Y.
The saved input variable remains pending on Y until the next rising edge at I1 or I2 switches
through the next instantaneous value.
In the case of a simultaneous rising edge at I1 and I2, I1 receives priority, and X1 is switched
through to Y.

Initialization
If input I1 or I2 receives the value 1 during initialization of an upstream output, the block does
not detect a positive edge during the first cyclic pass. Otherwise, the block detects a positive
edge during the first cyclic pass. In START mode (edge memory bit), the values for I1 and I2
are stored temporarily.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 83
Logic
4.6 CNM

Block diagram

;
,
<
,
;

Truth table(s)

Input Output Y at the time of triggering

I1 I2
* * Yn = Yn-1
* 0 -> 1 Yn = X2n
0 -> 1 * Yn = X1n
0 -> 1 0 -> 1 Yn = X1n

*: No rising edge, 0 -> 1: Rising edge

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Input variable 1 0.0 REAL
X2 Input variable 2 0.0 REAL
I1 Save input variable 1 0.0 0/1
I2 Save input variable 2 0.0 0/1
Y Saved input variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

84 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.7 CNM_D

4.7 CNM_D
Controllable numeric memory (DOUBLE INTEGER type)

Symbol

CNM_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 6DYHGLQSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ;
6DYHLQSXWYDULDEOH %2 ,
6DYHLQSXWYDULDEOH %2 ,

Brief description
Block of the DOUBLE INTEGER type for saving a current input value (sample and hold
function) with
● Selectable input
● Selectable save time
● Rising edge-initiated triggering
The blocks CNM and CNM_ i fulfill the same function. They only differ in the data type used.

Method of operation
On a rising edge at I1, X1 is switched through to output Y.
On a rising edge at I2, X2 is switched through to output Y.
The saved input variable remains pending on Y until the next rising edge at I1 or I2 switches
through the next momentary value.
In the case of a simultaneous rising edge at I1 and I2, I1 receives priority, and X1 is switched
through to Y.

Initialization
If input I1 or I2 receives the value 1 during initialization of an upstream output, the block does
not detect a positive edge during the first cyclic pass. The block detects a positive edge during
the first cyclic pass. In START mode, the values for I1 and I2 are stored temporarily.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 85
Logic
4.7 CNM_D

Block diagram

;
,
<
,
;

Truth table(s)

Input Output Y at the time of triggering

I1 I2
* * Yn = Yn-1
* 0 -> 1 Yn = X2n
0 -> 1 * Yn = X1n
0 -> 1 0 -> 1 Yn = X1n

*: No rising edge, 0 -> 1: Rising edge

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Input variable 1 0 DINT
X2 Input variable 2 0 DINT
I1 Save input variable 1 0 0/1
I2 Save input variable 2 0 0/1
Y Saved input variable 0 DINT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

86 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.8 CNM_I

4.8 CNM_I
Controllable numeric memory (INTEGER type)

Symbol

CNM_I
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < , 6DYHGLQSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ;
6DYHLQSXWYDULDEOH %2 ,
6DYHLQSXWYDULDEOH %2 ,

Brief description
Block of the INTEGER type for saving a current input value (sample and hold function) with
● Selectable input
● Selectable save time
● Rising edge-initiated triggering
The CNM and CNM_D blocks have the same function. They only differ in the data type used.

Method of operation
On a rising edge at I1, X1 is switched through to output Y.
On a rising edge at I2, X2 is switched through to output Y.
The saved input variable remains pending on Y until the next rising edge at I1 or I2 switches
through the next momentary value.
In the case of a simultaneous rising edge at I1 and I2, I1 receives priority, and X1 is switched
through to Y.

Initialization
If input I1 or I2 receives the value 1 during initialization of an upstream output, the block does
not detect a positive edge during the first cyclic pass. The block detects a positive edge during
the first cyclic pass. In START mode, the values for I1 and I2 are stored temporarily.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 87
Logic
4.8 CNM_I

Block diagram

;
,
<
,
;

Truth table(s)

Input Output Y at the time of triggering

I1 I2
* * Yn = Yn-1
* 0 -> 1 Yn = X2n
0 -> 1 * Yn = X1n
0 -> 1 0 -> 1 Yn = X1n

*: No rising edge, 0 -> 1: Rising edge

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Input variable 1 0 INT
X2 Input variable 2 0 INT
I1 Save input variable 1 0 0/1
I2 Save input variable 2 0 0/1
Y Saved input variable 0 INT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

88 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.9 CTR

4.9 CTR
Counter (BOOL type)

Symbol

CTR
8SSXOVH %2 ,8 < , &RXQWHUYDOXH
'RZQSXOVH %2 ,' 48 %2 &RXQWHUDWXSSHUOLPLW
5HVHWWLQJ %2 5 4 %2 =HURFRXQWHUYDOXH
6HW %2 6 4/ %2 &RXQWHUDWORZHUOLPLW
6HWWLQJYDOXH , 69
8SSHUFRXQWHUOLPLW , /8
/RZHUFRXQWHUOLPLW , //
2YHUIORZPRGH %2 02'

Brief description
Block for counting up and down with the following counter functions:
● Set counter to zero
● Hold counter at zero (disable)
● Set counter to initial value
Independent setting of upper and lower counter limit.

Method of operation
This block forms an edge-triggered up-down counter. With a rising edge of a pulse at input IU,
the counter value is incremented.
With a rising edge of a pulse at input ID, the counter value is decremented. The counter value
is present at output Y. Controlling the counter (see also truth table). With S=1, the counter
value Y can be preset with the set value SV.
However, the reset input R has priority over the set input. As long as R is logic 1, Y is held at
0. The counter is disabled. If Y is not in the counting range between LL and LU, the output is
set to the active limit value when R = 1.
The working area of the counter can be specified via LU (upper counter limit value) or LL (lower
counter limit value).
The setting value (SV) is in the range from LL >= SV >= LU.

MOD=0 When these limits are reached, the counter stops counting and the display QU
(counter at upper limit) or QL (counter at lower limit) is set.
MOD=1 When the upper limit (LU) is reached, the counter value is set to the lower limit
when the next Up pulse occurs; QU = 1 indicates positive overflow for a cycle.
When the lower limit (LL) is reached, the counter value is set to the upper limit
when the next Down pulse occurs; QL = 1 indicates negative overflow for a cycle.

When the counter value is zero, the output Q0 is set to 1.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 89
Logic
4.9 CTR

Block diagram

6 0

// /8

,8
48
,' <
69
 4/
4

Truth table(s)

Binary command Binary command Counter value Y

S R
0 0 Y is retained
0 1 Y is reset
1 0 Y = SV (set value)
1 1 Y is reset

Counter value when set/reset command is given

Initialization
The initialization defines the start value for the first cyclic pass. If input ID or IU is preset with
1, the block cannot detect a positive edge during the first cyclic pass.
Boundary conditions:
● LL <= Y <= LU for LL <LU
● Y = LU for LL >= LU

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
IU Up pulse 0 0/1
ID Down pulse 0 0/1
R Resetting 0 0/1
S Set 0 0/1
SV Setting value 0 INT

Description of the DCC standard blocks

90 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.9 CTR

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
LU Upper counter limit 0 INT
LL Lower counter limit 0 INT
MOD Overflow mode 0 0/1
Y Counter value 0 INT
QU Counter at upper limit 0 0/1
Q0 Zero counter value 0 0/1
QL Counter at lower limit 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 91
Logic
4.10 DFR

4.10 DFR
Reset-dominant D-type flip-flop (BOOL type)

Symbol

DFR
7ULJJHULQSXW %2 , 4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
'LQSXW %2 ' 41 %2 ,QYHUWHGELQDU\YDULDEOH
6HW %2 6
5HVHWWLQJ %2 5

Brief description
Block of the BOOL type for use as reset-dominant D-type flip-flop

Method of operation
If the two inputs S and R are logic 0, the D input information is switched through to output Q
on a rising edge at trigger input I. Output QN always has the value inverse to Q. With logic 1
at input S, output Q is set to logic 1. If input R is set to logic 1, then output Q is set to logic 0.
If both inputs are logic 0, then Q does not change. However, if the two inputs S and R are logic
1, then Q is logic 0, since the reset input dominates.

Initialization
If input I receives the value 1 during initialization from an upstream output, the block does not
detect a positive edge during the first cyclic pass.
Otherwise, the block detects a positive edge during the first cyclic pass. In START mode, the
value for I is stored temporarily.

Block diagram

4
'
,
41

Description of the DCC standard blocks

92 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.10 DFR

Truth table(s)

D I Binary command Output states

S R Q QN
0 0 -> 1 0 0 0 1
1 0 -> 1 0 0 1 0
* 1 -> 0 0 0 Qn-1 Qn-1
* * 0 1 0 1
* * 1 0 1 0
* * 1 1 0 1

Time diagram
With D and I


,


'


4

41 


Output pulse Q subject to the D input and input pulse I for S = R = 0

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Trigger input 0 0/1
D D input 0 0/1
S Set 0 0/1
R Resetting 0 0/1
Q Binary variable 0 0/1
QN Inverted binary variable 1 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 93
Logic
4.10 DFR

Can be loaded on‐ Yes

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

94 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.11 DFR_W

4.11 DFR_W
Reset-dominant D-type flip-flop (WORD type)

Symbol

DFR_W
'LQSXW : ,6 46 : 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
7ULJJHULQSXW %2 , 461 : ,QYHUWHGRXWSXWYDULDEOH
6HW %2 6
5HVHWWLQJ %2 5

Brief description
Block of the WORD type for use as reset-dominant D-type flip-flop

Method of operation
If the two inputs S and R = 0, the D input information is switched through to output QS on a
rising edge at trigger input I. Output QSN always has the value inverse to QS. If S = 1, all bits
of output variable QS are set to 1. If R = 1, all bits of output variable QS are set to 0. If both
inputs S and R = 0, then QS does not change. If the two inputs S and R = 1, all bits of output
variable QS are set to 0, since the reset input R dominates.

Initialization
If input I receives the value 1 during initialization from an upstream output, the block does not
detect a positive edge during the first cyclic pass.
Otherwise, the block detects a positive edge during the first cyclic pass. In START mode, the
value for I is stored temporarily.

Block diagram

46
,6
,
461

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 95
Logic
4.11 DFR_W

Truth table(s)

I Binary command Output states

S R QS QSN
0 -> 1 0 0 IS IS inverted
* 0 1 0 1
* 1 0 1 0
* 1 1 0 1

* Arbitrary

Time diagram
With I and IS


,


,6Q


46Q

461Q 


Output variables QS and QSN depending on trigger input I and D-input IS for S = R = 0 (n is
the bit number)

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
IS D input 16#0000 WORD
I Trigger input 0 0/1
S Set 0 0/1
R Resetting 0 0/1
QS Output variable 16#0000 WORD
QSN Inverted output variable 16#FFFF WORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -

Description of the DCC standard blocks

96 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.11 DFR_W

Can be loaded on‐ Yes

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 97
Logic
4.12 DLB

4.12 DLB
Delay element (REAL type)

Symbol

DLB
1XPEHURIVWRUDEOHYDOXHV , 7%/ < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; 476 %2 2SHUDWLQJVWDWH
1XPEHURIF\FOHVIRUWKHGHOD\ , $'5

Brief description
Block of the REAL type for the output of an input variable which is delayed by a specifiable
number of sampling times.

Method of operation
If the operating state is QTS = 1, the block contains a delay memory of the TBL variable. The
input variable specified at input X is output after a delay as output variable Y. The delay is
specified by the integer multiple ADR of the sampling time (time slice in which the block is
calculated). When operating mode QTS = 0, the delay memory is not activated. In this case,
the input variable specified at input X is output immediately as output variable Y.

Initialization
During initialization, the delay memory is requested for the purpose of acquiring TBL input
variables. The delay memory can contain a maximum of 1000 values. If TBL < 0, TBL is limited
to 0. QTS = 1 indicates that the delay memory requested in TBL is available. QTS = 0 indicates
that the system was not able to make the memory available, due to a lack of resources, or a
TBL value > 1000 has been defined. In this case, output Y is corrected to input X during cyclic
operation.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
TBL Number of storable values 100 0...1000
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
ADR Number of cycles for the delay 0 0...1000
Y Output variable 0.0 INT
QTS Operating state 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

98 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.12 DLB

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 99
Logic
4.13 DX8

4.13 DX8
Demultiplexer, eight outputs, cascadable (REAL type)

Symbol

DX8
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
&RQWUROLQSXW , ;6 < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
6DYHPRGH %2 06 < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
5HVHWWLQJ %2 5 < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
&KDQJHHQDEOH %2 (1& < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
< 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
< 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
< 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
<6 , &RQWURORXWSXW

Brief description
Block of the REAL type for demultiplex operation. This block is cascadable.

Method of operation
Depending on ENC, R, MS and XS = 1 to 8, the block switches through its input X to one of
the eight selectable outputs Y1 to Y8 (example: XS = 3 means Y3 = X).
When XS = 0 or XS >= 9, none of the block inputs Y1 to Y8 is selected. Non-selected outputs
are either set to zero or retain their previous value until the next change.
The following priority sequence applies for the control inputs:

ENC before R before MS

When ENC = 0, all outputs Y1 to Y8 remain unchanged, regardless of R and MS.
When ENC = 1, outputs Y1 to Y8 are enabled for change.
When R = 1, all outputs Y1 to Y8 receive the value 0, irrespective of MS.
When MS = 0 (non-latching mode), all outputs Y1 to Y8 not selected by XS receive the value
0.
When MS = 1 (storing mode), all outputs not selected by XS remain unchanged.

Truth table(s)

ENC R MS XS Outputs Y1 to Y8
0 * * * The previous values are retained
1 1 * * Y1 to Y8 = 0
1 0 0 1 <= XS <= 8 ● Selected output = X
● Output not selected = 0

Description of the DCC standard blocks

100 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.13 DX8

ENC R MS XS Outputs Y1 to Y8
1 0 0 XS = 0 or XS >= 9 Y1 to Y8 = 0
1 0 1 1 <= XS <= 8 ● Selected output = X
● Outputs not selected remain unchanged
1 0 1 XS = 0 or XS >= 9 All previous values remain unchanged

Cascading
The block output YS must be connected to the block input XS of the following block.
For XS = 0 to 8, YS = 0
When XS > 8: YS = XS-8
(use for cascading)

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
XS Control input 0 INT
MS Save mode 0 0/1
R Resetting 0 0/1
ENC Change enable 0 0/1
Y1 Output variable 1 0.0 REAL
Y2 Output variable 2 0.0 REAL
Y3 Output variable 3 0.0 REAL
Y4 Output variable 4 0.0 REAL
Y5 Output variable 5 0.0 REAL
Y6 Output variable 6 0.0 REAL
Y7 Output variable 7 0.0 REAL
Y8 Output variable 8 0.0 REAL
YS Control output 0 INT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 101
Logic
4.14 DX8_D

4.14 DX8_D
Demultiplexer, eight outputs, cascadable (DOUBLE INTEGER type)

Symbol

DX8_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
&RQWUROLQSXW , ;6 < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
0HPRU\PRGH %2 06 < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
5HVHWWLQJ %2 5 < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
&KDQJHHQDEOH %2 (1& < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
< ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
< ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
< ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
<6 , &RQWURORXWSXW

Brief description
Block of the DOUBLE INTEGER type for demultiplex operation. This block is cascadable.

Method of operation
Depending on ENC, R, MS and XS = 1 to 8, the block switches through its input X to one of
the eight selectable outputs Y1 to Y8 (example: XS = 3 means Y3 = X).
When XS = 0 or XS ≥ 9, none of the block inputs Y1 to Y8 is selected. Non-selected outputs
are either set to zero or retain their previous value until the next change.
The following priority sequence applies for the control inputs:
ENC before R before MS
When ENC = 0, all outputs Y1 to Y8 remain unchanged, regardless of R and MS. When ENC
= 1, outputs Y1 to Y8 are enabled for change. When R = 1, all outputs Y1 to Y8 receive the
value 0, irrespective of MS. When MS = 0 (non-latching mode), all outputs Y1 to Y8 not selected
by XS receive the value 0. When MS = 1 (storing mode), all outputs not selected by XS remain
unchanged.

Truth table(s)

ENC R MS XS Outputs Y1 to Y8
0 * * * The previous values are retained
1 1 * * Y1 to Y8 = 0
1 0 0 1 <= XS <= 8 ● Selected output = X
● Output not selected = 0
1 0 0 XS = 0 or XS >= 9 Y1 to Y8 = 0

Description of the DCC standard blocks

102 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.14 DX8_D

ENC R MS XS Outputs Y1 to Y8
1 0 1 1 <= XS <= 8 ● Selected output = X
● Outputs not selected remain unchanged
1 0 1 XS = 0 or XS >= 9 All previous values remain unchanged

* Arbitrary
For XS = 0 to 8, YS = 0.When XS > 8: YS = XS - 8 (use for cascading).

Cascading
The block output YS must be connected to the block input XS of the following block.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 DINT
XS Control input 0 INT
MS Memory mode 0 0/1
R Resetting 0 0/1
ENC Change enable 0 0/1
Y1 Output variable 1 0 DINT
Y2 Output variable 2 0 DINT
Y3 Output variable 3 0 DINT
Y4 Output variable 4 0 DINT
Y5 Output variable 5 0 DINT
Y6 Output variable 6 0 DINT
Y7 Output variable 7 0 DINT
Y8 Output variable 8 0 DINT
YS Control output 0 INT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 103
Logic
4.15 DX8_I

4.15 DX8_I
Demultiplexer, eight outputs, cascadable (INTEGER type)

Symbol

DX8_I
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
&RQWUROLQSXW , ;6 < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
6DYHPRGH %2 06 < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
5HVHWWLQJ %2 5 < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
&KDQJHHQDEOH %2 (1& < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
< , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
< , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
< , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
<6 , &RQWURORXWSXW

Brief description
Block of the INTEGER type for demultiplex operation. This block is cascadable.

Method of operation
Depending on ENC, R, MS and XS = 1 to 8, the block switches through its input X to one of
the eight selectable outputs Y1 to Y8 (example: XS = 3 means Y3 = X).
When XS = 0 or XS >= 9, none of the block inputs Y1 to Y8 is selected. Non-selected outputs
are either set to zero or retain their previous value until the next change.
The following priority sequence applies for the control inputs:

ENC before R before MS

When ENC = 0, all outputs Y1 to Y8 remain unchanged, regardless of R and MS.
When ENC = 1, outputs Y1 to Y8 are enabled for change.
When R = 1, all outputs Y1 to Y8 receive the value 0, irrespective of MS.
When MS = 0 (non-latching mode), all outputs Y1 to Y8 not selected by XS receive the value
0.
When MS = 1 (storing mode), all outputs not selected by XS remain unchanged.

Truth table(s)

ENC R MS XS Outputs Y1 to Y8
0 * * * The previous values are retained
1 1 * * Y1 to Y8 = 0
1 0 0 1 <= XS <= 8 ● Selected output = X
● Output not selected = 0

Description of the DCC standard blocks

104 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.15 DX8_I

ENC R MS XS Outputs Y1 to Y8
1 0 0 XS = 0 or XS >= 9 Y1 to Y8 = 0
1 0 1 1 <= XS <= 8 ● Selected output = X
● Outputs not selected remain unchanged
1 0 1 XS = 0 or XS >= 9 All previous values remain unchanged

* Arbitrary
For XS = 0 to 8, YS = 0.When XS > 8: YS = XS - 8 (use for cascading)

Cascading
The block output YS must be connected to the block input XS of the following block.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 INT
XS Control input 0 INT
MS Save mode 0 0/1
R Resetting 0 0/1
ENC Change enable 0 0/1
Y1 Output variable 1 0 INT
Y2 Output variable 2 0 INT
Y3 Output variable 3 0 INT
Y4 Output variable 4 0 INT
Y5 Output variable 5 0 INT
Y6 Output variable 6 0 INT
Y7 Output variable 7 0 INT
Y8 Output variable 8 0 INT
YS Control output 0 INT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 105
Logic
4.16 ETE

4.16 ETE
Edge evaluator (BOOL type)

Symbol

ETE
,QSXWSXOVH %2 , 43 %2 2XWSXWSXOVH
41 %2 2XWSXWSXOVH

Brief description
Edge evaluation

Method of operation
This block detects a signal change at input I. With a positive edge (0→1) at input I, output QP
= 1 is set for scan time TA.
With a negative edge (1→0) at input I, output QN = 1 is set for scan time TA.

Initialization
The initialization defines the start value for the first cyclic pass. If input I receives the value 1
during initialization of an upstream block, the block cannot detect a positive edge during the
first cyclic pass. If input I receives the value 0 during initialization of an upstream block, the
block cannot detect a negative edge during the first cyclic pass.

Block diagram

43
,
41

Description of the DCC standard blocks

106 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.16 ETE

Time diagram


,  7$ 7$


43

7$

41 

Output pulses QP and QN as a function of scan time TA and input pulse I

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Input pulse 0 0/1
QP Output pulse 0 0/1
QN Output pulse 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 107
Logic
4.17 LVM

4.17 LVM
Double-sided limit monitor with hysteresis (BOOL type)

Symbol

LVM
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; 48 %2 (LQJDQJVJU¸¡HREHUKDOE
,QWHUYDOPHDQYDOXH 5 0 LQWHUYDO
,QWHUYDOOLPLW 5 / 40 %2 (LQJDQJVJU¸¡HLQQHUKDOE
+\VWHUHVLV 5 +< LQWHUYDO
4/ %2 ,QSXWYDULDEOHEHORZ
LQWHUYDO

Brief description
● The block of the BOOL type monitors an input variable through comparison with selectable
reference variables.
● Can be used for monitoring setpoints, actual values and measured values, as well as for
the suppression of frequent switching (chatter).
● The block provides a window discriminator function.

Method of operation
The block calculates an intermediate value based on a transmission characteristic (see
Transmission characteristic) with hysteresis. This intermediate value is compared with the
interval limits, and the result is output at outputs QU, QM, and QL. The transfer characteristic
is configured with the values for the mean value M, the interval limit L and the hysteresis HY.

Block diagram

0 / +<

48
; 40
4/

Description of the DCC standard blocks

108 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.17 LVM

Transfer function


48



40



4/

0/ 0 0/
+< +<
/ /

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
M Interval mean value 0.0 REAL
L Interval limit 0.0 REAL
HY Hysteresis 0.0 REAL
QU Input variable above the interval 0 0/1
QM Input variable above the interval 0 0/1
QL Input variable above the interval 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 109
Logic
4.18 MFP

4.18 MFP
Pulse generator (BOOL type)

Symbol

MFP
,QSXWSXOVH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWSXOVH
3XOVHGXUDWLRQ PV 76 7

Brief description
● Timer for generating a pulse with a fixed duration.
● Used as a pulse-contracting or pulse-stretching monoflop.

Method of operation
The rising edge of a pulse at input I sets output Q to 1 for the pulse duration T. The pulse
generator cannot be retriggered. When T=0, a pulse duration of 1 cycle is active.

Initialization
The initialization defines the start value for the first cyclic pass.
If input I receives the value 1 during initialization from the upstream block output, the block
cannot detect a positive edge during the first cyclic pass.
If output Q receives the default value 1, output Q = 1 is set after initialization for the pulse
duration T.

Block diagram

, 7 W


Description of the DCC standard blocks

110 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.18 MFP

Time diagram


,
 7 7 7

4


Output pulse Q as a function of pulse duration T and input pulse I

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Input pulse 0 0/1
T Pulse duration ( ms ) 0 SDTIME
Q Output pulse 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 111
Logic
4.19 MUX8

4.19 MUX8
Multiplexer, cascadable (REAL type)

Symbol

MUX8
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; &&6 , &DVFDGLQJFRQWUROZRUG
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; 4) %2 (UURUPHVVDJH
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ;
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ;
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ;
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ;
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ;
&DVFDGHLQSXW 5 &&,
&RQWUROZRUG , ;&6
(QDEOH %2 (1

Brief description
Block of the REAL type for 8-fold multiplex operation. This block is cascadable.

Method of operation
This block outputs the value of the cascading input CCI at output Y as long as the enable input
EN is logic 0.
When EN is logic 1, one of the input variables X1 to X8 is switched through to output Y as long
as the 16-bit control word XCS assumes a value between 1 and 8.
If the value of the input XCS > 8, output Y assumes the value 0, and output QF becomes logic
1. The cascading control word assumes the value CCS = XCS-8, see truth table.
The outputs Y, CCS, and QF can be used to cascade the blocks. In this case, output Y of the
first block is connected to input CCI of the downstream multiplexer, output CCS to the following
XCS, and output QF to the following input EN.

Block diagram

;&6 (1

; <

; &&6
&&, 08; 4)

Description of the DCC standard blocks

112 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.19 MUX8

Truth table(s)

EN XCS Y CSS QF
0 Any CCI 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
1 1 X1 0 0
1 2 X2 0 0
1 3 X3 0 0
1 4 X4 0 0
1 5 X5 0 0
1 6 X6 0 0
1 7 X7 0 0
1 8 X8 0 0
1 >8 0 XCS-8 1

Cascading

08; 08;
9DU 5 ;, < 5 9DU 5 ;, < 5 2XWSXW
9DU ; &&6 , 9DU ; &&6 , &DVF
9DU ; 4) %2 9DU ; 4) %2 )DXOW
9DU ; 9DU ;
9DU ; 9DU ;
9DU ; 9DU ;
9DU ; 9DU ;
9DU ; 9DU ;
&DVF &&,
&WUO , &&,
;&6 , ;&6
ZRUG
%2 (1
(QDE %2 (1

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Input variable 1 0.0 REAL
X2 Input variable 2 0.0 REAL
X3 Input variable 3 0.0 REAL
X4 Input variable 4 0.0 REAL
X5 Input variable 5 0.0 REAL
X6 Input variable 6 0.0 REAL
X7 Input variable 7 0.0 REAL
X8 Input variable 8 0.0 REAL
CCI Cascade input 0.0 REAL
XCS Control word 0 0…32767
EN Enable 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 113
Logic
4.19 MUX8

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
CCS Cascading control word 0 0…32767
QF Error message 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

114 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.20 MUX8_D

4.20 MUX8_D
Multiplexer, cascadable (DOUBLE-INTEGER type)

Symbol

MUX8_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; &&6 , &DVFDGLQJFRQWUROZRUG
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; 4) %2 (UURUPHVVDJH
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ;
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ;
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ;
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ;
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ;
&DVFDGHLQSXW ', &&,
&RQWUROZRUG , ;&6
(QDEOH %2 (1

Brief description
Block of the DOUBLE INTEGER type for 8-fold multiplex operation. This block is cascadable.

Method of operation
This block outputs the value of the cascading input CCI at output Y as long as the enable input
EN is logic 0. When EN is logic 1, one of the input variables X1 to X8 is switched through to
output Y as long as the 16-bit control word XCS assumes a value between 1 and 8. If the value
of the input XCS > 8, output Y assumes the value 0, and output QF becomes logic 1. The
cascading control word assumes the value CCS = XCS-8, see truth table. The outputs Y, CCS,
and QF can be used to cascade the blocks. In this case, output Y of the first block is connected
to input CCI of the downstream multiplexer, output CCS to the following XCS, and output QF
to the following input EN.

Block diagram

;&6 (1

; <
; &&6
&&, 4)
08;

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 115
Logic
4.20 MUX8_D

Truth table(s)

EN XCS Y CSS QF
0 Any CCI 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
1 1 X1 0 0
1 2 X2 0 0
1 3 X3 0 0
1 4 X4 0 0
1 5 X5 0 0
1 6 X6 0 0
1 7 X7 0 0
1 8 X8 0 0
1 >8 0 XCS-8 1

Cascading

08; ' 08; '

9DU ', ;, < ', 9DU ', ;, < ', 2XWSXW
9DU ; &&6 , 9DU ; &&6 &DVF
9DU ; 4) %2 9DU ; 4) %2 )DXOW
9DU ; 9DU ;
9DU ; 9DU ;
9DU ; 9DU ;
9DU ; 9DU ;
9DU ; 9DU ;
&DVF &&,
&WUO &&,
;&6 ;&6
ZRUG
%2 (1
(QDE %2 (1

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Input variable 1 0 DINT
X2 Input variable 2 0 DINT
X3 Input variable 3 0 DINT
X4 Input variable 4 0 DINT
X5 Input variable 5 0 DINT
X6 Input variable 6 0 DINT
X7 Input variable 7 0 DINT
X8 Input variable 8 0 DINT
CCI Cascade input 0 DINT
XCS Control word 0 0…32767
EN Enable 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0 DINT

Description of the DCC standard blocks

116 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.20 MUX8_D

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
CCS Cascading control word 0 0…32767
QF Error message 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 117
Logic
4.21 MUX8_I

4.21 MUX8_I
Multiplexer, cascadable (INTEGER type)

Symbol

MUX8_I
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; &&6 , &DVFDGLQJFRQWUROZRUG
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; 4) %2 (UURUPHVVDJH
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ;
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ;
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ;
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ;
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ;
&DVFDGHLQSXW , &&,
&RQWUROZRUG , ;&6
(QDEOH %2 (1

Brief description
Block of the INTEGER type for 8-fold multiplex operation. This block is cascadable.

Method of operation
This block outputs the value of the cascading input CCI at output Y as long as the enable input
EN is logic 0.
When EN is logic 1, one of the input variables X1 to X8 is switched through to output Y as long
as the 16-bit control word XCS assumes a value between 1 and 8.
If the value of the input XCS > 8, output Y assumes the value 0, and output QF becomes logic
1. The cascading control word assumes the value CCS = XCS-8, see truth table.
The outputs Y, CCS, and QF can be used to cascade the blocks. In this case, output Y of the
first block is connected to input CCI of the downstream multiplexer, output CCS to the following
XCS, and output QF to the following input EN.

Block diagram

;&6 (1

; <
; &&6
&&, 4)
08;

Description of the DCC standard blocks

118 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.21 MUX8_I

Truth table(s)

EN XCS Y CSS QF
0 Any CCI 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
1 1 X1 0 0
1 2 X2 0 0
1 3 X3 0 0
1 4 X4 0 0
1 5 X5 0 0
1 6 X6 0 0
1 7 X7 0 0
1 8 X8 0 0
1 >8 0 XCS-8 1

Cascading

08;B, 08;B,
9DU , ;, < , 9DU , ;, < , 2XWSXW
9DU ; &&6 , 9DU ; &&6 &DVF
9DU ; 4) %2 9DU ; 4) %2 )DXOW
9DU ; 9DU ;
9DU ; 9DU ;
9DU ; 9DU ;
9DU ; 9DU ;
9DU ; 9DU ;
&DVF &&,
&WUO &&,
;&6 ;&6
ZRUG
%2 (1
(QDE %2 (1

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Input variable 1 0 INT
X2 Input variable 2 0 INT
X3 Input variable 3 0 INT
X4 Input variable 4 0 INT
X5 Input variable 5 0 INT
X6 Input variable 6 0 INT
X7 Input variable 7 0 INT
X8 Input variable 8 0 INT
CCI Cascade input 0 INT
XCS Control word 0 0…32767
EN Enable 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0 INT

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 119
Logic
4.21 MUX8_I

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
CCS Cascading control word 0 0…32767
QF Error message 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

120 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.22 NAND

4.22 NAND
Logic AND operation (BOOL type)

Symbol

NAND
%LQDU\LQSXW %2 , 4 %2 1$1'ELQDU\YDULDEOH

Brief description
NAND block with up to four inputs of the BOOL type

Method of operation
The block combines the binary values at the inputs I 1-4 to a logic AND, inverts the result and
outputs it at binary output Q.

4=,∧  ∧ ,

Output Q = 0, when the value 1 is present at all generic inputs I1 to I4. In all other cases, output
Q = 1.

Truth table(s)

,QSXW 2XWSXW

, , , , 4

 

 

 

 

    

$UELWUDU\

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 121
Logic
4.22 NAND

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Binary input 1 0/1
Q NAND binary variable 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ I comprises up to four inputs (I1 to I4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

122 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.23 NCM

4.23 NCM
Numeric comparator (REAL type)

Symbol

NCM
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; 48 %2 ;!;
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; 4( %2 ; ;
4/ %2 ;;

Brief description
Block for comparison operations of two numeric variables of the REAL type

Method of operation
The input variables X1 and X2 are compared and one of binary outputs QU, QE, or QL is set
depending on the result of the comparison operation.

Truth table(s)

Comparison of input variables Output signals Output signals Y Output signals Y

QU QE QL
X1 > X2 1 0 0
X1 = X2 0 1 0
X1 < X2 0 0 1

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Input variable 1 0 REAL
X2 Input variable 2 0 REAL
QU X1 > X2 0 0/1
QE X1 = X2 1 0/1
QL X1 < X2 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 123
Logic
4.23 NCM

Can be loaded on‐ Yes

line
Special characteris‐ If the execution group of the DCC chart is set to "Do not calculate", the default
tics value is set at the output.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

124 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.24 NCM_D

4.24 NCM_D
Numeric comparator (DOUBLE INTEGER type)

Symbol

NCM_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; 48 %2 ;!;
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; 4( %2 ; ;
4/ %2 ;;

Brief description
Block for comparison operations of two numeric variables of the DOUBLE INTEGER type

Method of operation
The input variables X1 and X2 are compared and one of binary outputs QU, QE, or QL is set
depending on the result of the comparison operation.

Truth table(s)

Comparison of input variables Description Default Value range

QU QE QL
X1 > X2 1 0 0
X1 = X2 0 1 0
X1 < X2 0 0 1

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Input variable 1 0 DINT
X2 Input variable 2 0 DINT
QU X1 > X2 0 0/1
QE X1 = X2 1 0/1
QL X1 < X2 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 125
Logic
4.24 NCM_D

Can be loaded on‐ Yes

line
Special characteris‐ If the execution group of the DCC chart is set to "Do not calculate", the default
tics value is set at the output.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

126 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.25 NCM_I

4.25 NCM_I
Numeric comparator (INTEGER type)

Symbol

NCM_I
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; 48 %2 ;!;
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; 4( %2 ; ;
4/ %2 ;;

Brief description
Block for comparison operations of two numeric variables of the INTEGER type

Method of operation
The input variables X1 and X2 are compared and one of binary outputs QU, QE, or QL is set
depending on the result of the comparison operation.

Truth table(s)

Comparison of input variables Output signals Output signals Y Output signals Y

QU QE QL
X1 > X2 1 0 0
X1 = X2 0 1 0
X1 < X2 0 0 1

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Input variable 1 0 INT
X2 Input variable 2 0 INT
QU X1 > X2 0 0/1
QE X1 = X2 1 0/1
QL X1 < X2 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 127
Logic
4.25 NCM_I

Can be loaded on‐ Yes

line
Special characteris‐ If the execution group of the DCC chart is set to "Do not calculate", the default
tics value is set at the output.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

128 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.26 NOP1

4.26 NOP1
Dummy block (REAL type)

Symbol

NOP1
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
The block of the REAL type is used as dummy block (No Operation). It is used to provide a
constant value for several blocks.

Method of operation
The block outputs the value present at input X without change at output Y. This is a so-called
DUMMY or No Operation block.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 129
Logic
4.27 NOP1_B

4.27 NOP1_B
Dummy block (BOOL type)

Symbol

NOP1_B
,QSXWYDULDEOH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
The block of the BOOL type is used as dummy block (No Operation). It is used to provide a
constant value for several blocks.

Method of operation
The block outputs the value present at input I without change at output Q. This is a so-called
DUMMY or No Operation block.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Input variable 0 0/1
Q Output variable 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

130 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.28 NOP1_D

4.28 NOP1_D
Dummy block (DOUBLE INTEGER type)

Symbol

NOP1_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
The block of the DOUBLE INTEGER type is used as dummy block (No Operation). It is used
to provide a constant value for several blocks.

Method of operation
The block outputs the value present at input X without change at output Y. This is a so-called
DUMMY or No Operation block.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 DINT
Y Output variable 0 DINT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 131
Logic
4.29 NOP1_I

4.29 NOP1_I
Dummy block (INT type)

Symbol

NOP1_I
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
The block of the INT type is used as dummy block (No Operation). It is used to provide a
constant value for several blocks.

Method of operation
The block outputs the value present at input X without change at output Y. This is a so-called
DUMMY or No Operation block.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 INT
Y Output variable 0 INT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

132 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.30 NOP8

4.30 NOP8
Dummy block (REAL type)

Symbol

NOP8
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
The block of the REAL type is used as dummy block (No Operation). It is used to provide up
to eight constant values for several blocks.

Method of operation
The block outputs the values present at inputs X1-X8 without change at outputs Y1 to Y8. This
is a so-called DUMMY or No Operation block.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Input variable 1 0.0 REAL
X2 Input variable 2 0.0 REAL
X3 Input variable 3 0.0 REAL
X4 Input variable 4 0.0 REAL
X5 Input variable 5 0.0 REAL
X6 Input variable 6 0.0 REAL
X7 Input variable 7 0.0 REAL
X8 Input variable 8 0.0 REAL
Y1 Output variable 1 0.0 REAL
Y2 Output variable 2 0.0 REAL
Y3 Output variable 3 0.0 REAL
Y4 Output variable 4 0.0 REAL
Y5 Output variable 5 0.0 REAL
Y6 Output variable 6 0.0 REAL
Y7 Output variable 7 0.0 REAL
Y8 Output variable 8 0.0 REAL

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 133
Logic
4.30 NOP8

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

134 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.31 NOP8_B

4.31 NOP8_B
Dummy block (BOOL type)

Symbol

NOP8_B
,QSXWYDULDEOH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
The block of the BOOL type is used as dummy block (No Operation). It is used to provide up
to eight constant values for several blocks.

Method of operation
The block outputs the values present at inputs I1-I8 without change at outputs Q1 to Q8. This
is a so-called DUMMY or No Operation block.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I1 Input variable 1 0 0/1
I2 Input variable 2 0 0/1
I3 Input variable 3 0 0/1
I4 Input variable 4 0 0/1
I5 Input variable 5 0 0/1
I6 Input variable 6 0 0/1
I7 Input variable 7 0 0/1
I8 Input variable 8 0 0/1
Q1 Output variable 1 0 0/1
Q2 Output variable 2 0 0/1
Q3 Output variable 3 0 0/1
Q4 Output variable 4 0 0/1
Q5 Output variable 5 0 0/1
Q6 Output variable 6 0 0/1
Q7 Output variable 7 0 0/1
Q8 Output variable 8 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 135
Logic
4.31 NOP8_B

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

136 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.32 NOP8_D

4.32 NOP8_D
Dummy block (DOUBLE INTEGER type)

Symbol

NOP8_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
The block of the DOUBLE INTEGER type is used as dummy block (No Operation). It is used
to provide up to eight constant values for several blocks.

Method of operation
The block outputs the values present at inputs X1-X8 without change at outputs Y1 to Y8. This
is a so-called DUMMY or No Operation block.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Input variable 1 0 DINT
X2 Input variable 2 0 DINT
X3 Input variable 3 0 DINT
X4 Input variable 4 0 DINT
X5 Input variable 5 0 DINT
X6 Input variable 6 0 DINT
X7 Input variable 7 0 DINT
X8 Input variable 8 0 DINT
Y1 Output variable 1 0 DINT
Y2 Output variable 2 0 DINT
Y3 Output variable 3 0 DINT
Y4 Output variable 4 0 DINT
Y5 Output variable 5 0 DINT
Y6 Output variable 6 0 DINT
Y7 Output variable 7 0 DINT
Y8 Output variable 8 0 DINT

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 137
Logic
4.32 NOP8_D

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

138 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.33 NOP8_I

4.33 NOP8_I
Dummy block (INTEGER type)

Symbol

NOP8_I
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
The block of the INTEGER type is used as dummy block (No Operation). It is used to provide
up to eight constant values for several blocks.

Method of operation
The block outputs the values present at inputs X1-X8 without change at outputs Y1 to Y8. This
is a so-called DUMMY or No Operation block.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Input variable 1 0 INT
X2 Input variable 2 0 INT
X3 Input variable 3 0 INT
X4 Input variable 4 0 INT
X5 Input variable 5 0 INT
X6 Input variable 6 0 INT
X7 Input variable 7 0 INT
X8 Input variable 8 0 INT
Y1 Output variable 1 0 INT
Y2 Output variable 2 0 INT
Y3 Output variable 3 0 INT
Y4 Output variable 4 0 INT
Y5 Output variable 5 0 INT
Y6 Output variable 6 0 INT
Y7 Output variable 7 0 INT
Y8 Output variable 8 0 INT

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 139
Logic
4.33 NOP8_I

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

140 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.34 NOR

4.34 NOR
Logic OR operation (BOOL type)

Symbol

NOR
%LQDU\LQSXW %2 , 4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH125

Brief description
NOR block with up to four inputs of the BOOL type

Method of operation
The block combines the binary values at the inputs I 1-4 to a logic OR, inverts the result and
outputs it at binary output Q.

4=,∨  ∨,

Output Q = 1, when the value 0 is present at all inputs I1 to I4. In all other cases, output Q =
0.

Truth table(s)

,QSXW 2XWSXW

, , , , 4

 

 

 

 

    

$UELWUDU\

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 141
Logic
4.34 NOR

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Binary input 0 0/1
Q Binary variable NOR 1 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ I comprises up to four connections (I1 to I4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

142 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.35 NOT

4.35 NOT
Inverter (BOOL type)

Symbol

NOT
%LQDU\LQSXW %2 , 4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH127

Brief description
Inverter of the BOOL type

Method of operation
The block inverts the binary variable at input I and outputs the result at output Q.

4=,

Truth table(s)

Input 1 Output Q
1 0

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Binary input 0 0/1
Q Binary variable NOT 1 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 143
Logic
4.36 NOT_W

4.36 NOT_W
Status word inverter (WORD type)

Symbol

NOT_W
6WDWXVZRUG : ,6 46 : ,QYHUWHGVWDWXVZRUG

Brief description
● Inverter for WORD-type status word
● One's complement formation of IS

Method of operation
16 binary states are combined in a status word.
The block inverts the status word IS bit-by-bit and outputs it at output QS.
The following applies for the bit k of the inverted status word:

46N=,6N

Complement formation
Example: IS = 15 -> QS = -16

6WDWXVZRUG
,6
              

,QYHUWHGVWDWXVZRUG
46
               

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
IS Status word 16#0000 WORD
QS Inverted status word 16#FFFF WORD

Description of the DCC standard blocks

144 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.36 NOT_W

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 145
Logic
4.37 NSW

4.37 NSW
Numeric change-over switch (REAL type)

Symbol

NSW
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ;
6ZLWFKSRVLWLRQ %2 ,

Brief description
The block switches one of two numeric input variables (REAL type) to the output.

Method of operation
If input I = 0, then X1 is given to output Y.
If input I = 1, then X2 is given to output Y.

Block diagram

;, <

;

Truth table(s)

Switch position 1 Output variable Y

0 Y = X1
1 Y = X2

Description of the DCC standard blocks

146 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.37 NSW

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Input variable 1 0 REAL
X2 Input variable 2 0 REAL
I Switch position 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 147
Logic
4.38 NSW_D

4.38 NSW_D
Numeric change-over switch (DOUBLE INTEGER type)

Symbol

NSW_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ;
6ZLWFKSRVLWLRQ %2 ,

Brief description
The block switches one of two numeric input variables (DOUBLE INTEGER type) to the output

Method of operation
If input I = 0, then X1 is given to output Y.
If input I = 1, then X2 is given to output Y.

Block diagram

;, <

;

Truth table(s)

Switch position 1 Output variable Y

0 Y = X1
1 Y = X2

Description of the DCC standard blocks

148 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.38 NSW_D

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Input variable 1 0 DINT
X2 Input variable 2 0 DINT
I Switch position 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0 DINT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 149
Logic
4.39 NSW_I

4.39 NSW_I
Numeric change-over switch (INTEGER type)

Symbol

NSW_I
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ;
6ZLWFKSRVLWLRQ %2 ,

Brief description
The block switches one of two numeric input variables (INTEGER type) to the output.

Method of operation
If input I = 0, then X1 is given to output Y.
If input I = 1, then X2 is given to output Y.

Block diagram

;

<
;

Truth table(s)

Switch position 1 Output variable Y

0 Y = X1
1 Y = X2

Description of the DCC standard blocks

150 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.39 NSW_I

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X1 Input variable 1 0 INT
X2 Input variable 2 0 INT
I Switch position 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0 INT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 151
Logic
4.40 OR

4.40 OR
Logic OR operation (BOOL type)

Symbol

OR
%LQDU\YDOXHLQSXW %2 , 4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH25

Brief description
OR block with up to four inputs of the BOOL type

Method of operation
The block combines the binary values at the inputs I 1-4 to a logic OR (disjunction) and outputs
the result at its binary output Q.
Q = I01∨...∨I04
Output Q = 0, when the value 0 is present at all inputs I1 to I4. In all other cases, output Q =
1.

Truth table(s)

,QSXW 2XWSXW

, , , , 4

 

 

 

 

    

$UELWUDU\

Description of the DCC standard blocks

152 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.40 OR

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Binary value input 0 0/1
Q Binary variable OR 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ I comprises up to four connections (I1 to I4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 153
Logic
4.41 OR_W

4.41 OR_W
Logic OR operation (WORD type)

Symbol

OR_W
,QSXWVWDWXVZRUG : , 46 : 6WDWXVZRUG25
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH

Brief description
OR block with up to four inputs of the WORD type

Method of operation
16 binary states are combined in a status word.
The block combines the status words I1 to I4 bit-by-bit according to the logic OR function.
The result is given to the block output QS (status word OR).
The following applies for bit k of status word OR:
QSk = I02k∨ I02k, k = 1...16
A bit of the OR status word is equal to 1 when at least one of the equivalent bits on the block
inputs I1 to I4 is equal to 1.
The binary output Q is 1 if at least one bit of the status word OR is equal to 1.

Following state diagram (for 3 inputs)

6WDWXVZRUG
,
              

6WDWXVZRUG RU
,
               

6WDWXVZRUG25
46
               

Description of the DCC standard blocks

154 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.41 OR_W

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Input status word 16#0000 WORD
QS Status word OR 16#0000 WORD
Q Binary variable 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ I comprises up to four connections (I1 to I4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 155
Logic
4.42 PCL

4.42 PCL
Pulse shortener (BOOL type)

Symbol

PCL
,QSXWSXOVH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWSXOVH
3XOVHGXUDWLRQ PV 76 7

Brief description
Timer for limiting the pulse duration

Method of operation
The rising edge of a pulse at input I sets output Q to 1. Output Q becomes 0 when input I = 0
or pulse duration T has expired. When T=0, a pulse duration of 1 cycle is active.

Initialization
The initialization defines the start value for the first cyclic pass.
If input I receives the value 1 during initialization from the upstream block output, the block
cannot detect a positive edge during the first cyclic pass.
If output Q receives the default value 1, output Q = 1 is set after initialization for the pulse
duration T.

Block diagram

, W

Description of the DCC standard blocks

156 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.42 PCL

Time diagram


, 
7 7

4


Output pulse Q as a function of pulse duration T and input pulse I

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Input pulse 0 0/1
T Pulse duration ( ms ) 0 SDTIME
Q Output pulse 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 157
Logic
4.43 PDE

4.43 PDE
Switch-on delay (BOOL type)

Symbol

PDE
,QSXWSXOVH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWSXOVH
3XOVHGHOD\WLPH PV 76 7

Brief description
BOOL-type timer with on-delay

Method of operation
The pulse delay time at the input T is taken over with the rising edge at input I. After this time
has elapsed, output Q is set to 1.
Output Q becomes 0 when I = 0.
If the duration of input pulse I is less than pulse delay time T, then Q remains at 0.
If time T is so long that the maximum value that can be displayed internally (T/ta as 32-bit
value, where ta = sampling time) is exceeded, the maximum value is set (e.g. when ta = 1 ms,
approx. 50 days).
When T=0, a pulse delay time of 1 cycle is active.

Method of operation
The initialization defines the start value for the first cyclic pass.
If input I receives the value 1 during initialization from the upstream block output, the block
cannot detect a positive edge during the first cyclic pass. The pulse delay time T is therefore
not taken over in the first cyclic pass with I = 1, the specified time from the initialization remains
effective.
If output Q receives a value of 1 during initialization, then output Q = 1 is set immediately after
initialization when I = 1.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

158 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.43 PDE

Block diagram

, W

7 

Time diagram


,
 7

4


Output pulse Q as a function of pulse duration T and input pulse I

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Input pulse 0 0/1
T Pulse delay time ( ms ) 0 SDTIME
Q Output pulse 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 159
Logic
4.44 PDF

4.44 PDF
Switch-off delay (BOOL type)

Symbol

PDF
,QSXWSXOVH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWSXOVH
3XOVHVWUHWFKLQJWLPH PV 76 7

Brief description
BOOL-type timer with off-delay

Method of operation
The falling edge of a pulse at block input I resets output Q to 0 after pulse stretching time T.
Output Q becomes 1 when I = 1.
Output Q becomes 0 when input pulse I = 0 and the off-delay time T has expired.
If input I is reset to 1 before time T expires, then output Q remains at 1.
When T=0, a pulse stretching time of 1 cycle is active.

Initialization
The initialization defines the start value for the first cyclic pass.
If input I receives the value 1 during initialization from the upstream block output, the block
cannot detect a negative edge during the first cyclic pass.
If output Q receives the value 1 during initialization, output Q = 1 is set after initialization for
the pulse stretching time T.

Block diagram

, 4

 7

Description of the DCC standard blocks

160 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.44 PDF

Time diagram


,
 7 7

4


Output pulse Q as a function of pulse duration T and input pulse I

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Input pulse 0 0/1
T Pulse stretching time (ms) 0 SDTIME
Q Output pulse 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 161
Logic
4.45 PST

4.45 PST
Pulse stretching block (BOOL type)

Symbol

PST
,QSXWSXOVH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWSXOVH
5HVHWWLQJ %2 5
3XOVHGXUDWLRQ PV 76 7

Brief description
Block for the generation of a pulse with a minimum duration and with additional reset input.

Method of operation
The rising edge of a pulse at input I sets output Q to 1.
Output Q does not fall back to 0 until input pulse I = 0 and the pulse duration T has expired.
Output Q can be set to zero at any time by means of the reset input R with R = 1.
When T=0, a pulse duration of 1 cycle is active.

Initialization
The initialization defines the start value for the first cyclic pass.
If input I receives the value 1 during initialization from the upstream block output, the block
cannot detect a positive edge during the first cyclic pass.
If output Q receives the value 1 during initialization, output Q = 1 is set after initialization for
the pulse duration T.

Block diagram

, 4

Description of the DCC standard blocks

162 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.45 PST

Time diagram


,

7 7 7

4

Figure 4-1 Output pulse Q as a function of pulse duration T and input pulse I (with R = 0)

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Input pulse 0 0/1
R Resetting 0 0/1
T Pulse duration ( ms ) 0 SDTIME
Q Output pulse 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 163
Logic
4.46 RSR

4.46 RSR
RS flip-flop, R-dominant (BOOL type)

Symbol

RSR
6HW %2 6 4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
5HVHWWLQJ %2 5 41 %2 ,QYHUVHELQDU\YDULDEOH

Brief description
Used as static binary value memory

Method of operation
With logic 1 at input S, output Q is set to logic 1. If input R is set to logic 1, then output Q is
set to logic 0. If both inputs are logic 0, then Q does not change. However, if the two inputs
are logic 1, then Q is logic 0, since the reset input dominates.
Output QN always has the value inverse to Q.

Block diagram

6 4

5 41

Truth table(s)
Binary values when set/reset command is given

Binary command Output status Q

S R
0 0 Q does not change
0 1 Q=0
1 0 Q=1
1 1 Q=0

Description of the DCC standard blocks

164 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.46 RSR

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
S Set 0 0/1
R Resetting 0 0/1
Q Binary variable 0 0/1
QN Inverse binary variable 1 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 165
Logic
4.47 RSS

4.47 RSS
RS flip-flop, S-dominant (BOOL type)

Symbol

RSS
6HW %2 6 4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
5HVHWWLQJ %2 5 41 %2 ,QYHUVHELQDU\YDULDEOH

Brief description
Block of the BOOL type for use as a static binary value memory

Method of operation
With logic 1 at input S, output Q is set to logic 1. If input R is set to logic 1, then output Q is
set to logic 0. If both inputs are logic 0, then Q does not change. However, if the two inputs
are logic 1, then Q is also logic 1, since the setting input dominates.
Output QN always has the value inverse to Q.

Block diagram

6 4

5 41

Truth table(s)
Binary values when set/reset command is given

Binary command Output status Q

S R
0 0 Q does not change
0 1 Q=0
1 0 Q=1
1 1 Q=0

Description of the DCC standard blocks

166 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.47 RSS

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
S Set 0 0/1
R Resetting 0 0/1
Q Binary variable 0 0/1
QN Inverse binary variable 1 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 167
Logic
4.48 SH

4.48 SH
Shift block (WORD type)

Symbol

SH
6WDWXVZRUG : ,6 46 : 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
1XPEHURIVKLIWV , ;' 4& %2 /DVWELWVKLIWHGRXW
LQWKHYDOXHUDQJH 4= %2 ;'!
OLPLWHGWR

Brief description
The block of the WORD type shifts a status word bit-by-bit to the left or right.

Method of operation
The block shifts the status word present at input IS bit-by-bit by the number of positions
specified at input XD.
New positions created by the shifting are filled with zeros irrespective of the shift direction.
The last bit shifted out is output on output QC. When XD = 0, QC = 0 is always true. When |
XD| > 15, QC = 0, QS = 0 and QZ = 1 are always true.

Shift to the left - example:

XD = 2; IS = 15
-> QS = 60; QC = 0

%LQDU\QXPEHURI,6
        

%LQDU\QXPEHURI46
        

Shift to the right - example:

XD = -2; IS = 15
-> QS = 3 (remainder is omitted); QC = 1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

168 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.48 SH

%LQDU\QXPEHURI,6
        

%LQDU\QXPEHURI46
        
;'SODFHVDUH
ORVW

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
IS Status word 16#0000 WORD
XD Number of shifts in the value range 0 INT
limited to +/-15
QS Output variable 16#0000 WORD
QC Last bit shifted out 0 0/1
QZ XD>15 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 169
Logic
4.49 SH_DW

4.49 SH_DW
Shift block (DWORD type)

Symbol

SH_DW
6WDWXVZRUG ': ,6 46 ': 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
6KLIWQXPEHU , ;' 4& %2 /DVWELWVKLIWHGRXW
4= %2 ,;',!

Brief description
The block of the DWORD type shifts a status word bit-by-bit to the left or right.

Method of operation
The block shifts the status word present at input IS bit-by-bit by the number of positions
specified at input XD.
New positions created by the shifting are filled with zeros irrespective of the shift direction.
The last bit shifted out is output on output QC. When XD = 0, QC = 0 is always true. When |
XD| > 31, QC = 0, QS = 0 and QZ = 1 are always true.

Shift to the left - example:

XD = 2; IS = 15
-> QS = 60; QC = 0

%LQDU\QXPEHURI,6
        

%LQDU\QXPEHURI46
        

Shift to the right - example:

XD = -2; IS = 15
-> QS = 3 (remainder is omitted); QC = 1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

170 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.49 SH_DW

%LQDU\QXPEHURI,6
        

%LQDU\QXPEHURI46
        
;'SODFHVDUH
ORVW

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
IS Status word 16#00000000 DWORD
XD Shift number 0 +/-31
QS Output variable 16#00000000 DWORD
QC Last bit shifted out 0 0/1
QZ IXDI > 31 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 171
Logic
4.50 TRK

4.50 TRK
Tracking/memory element (REAL type)

Symbol

TRK
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
7UDFNVDYH %2 75
LQSXWYDULDEOH
5HVHWLQSXWYDULDEOH %2 5

Brief description
Block of the REAL type for saving a current input value with the following properties:
● Edge-controlled latch functions for the input value
● Level-controlled correction of the output value

Method of operation

TRACK TR = 1 Direct tracking of output value Y = X.

TR = 1-> 0 With a negative edge at TR, the current input variable is saved and output on output Y.
TR = 0 The value at output Y does not change.
RESET R=1 Output Y is reset to 0. The reset input is dominant.

Initialization
If input TR receives the value 1 during initialization of an upstream block output, a negative
edge can be detected during the first cyclic pass. In START mode, the value for TR is stored
temporarily.
If input TR receives the value 0 during initialization of the upstream block output, the block
cannot detect a negative edge during the first cyclic pass.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

172 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.50 TRK

Block diagram

;
<
75

Truth table(s)

Input Output Y at the time of triggering

TR R
0 0 Yn = Yn-1
1 0 Yn = Xn
1 1 Yn = 0
1->0 0 Yn = Xn
1->0 1 Yn = 0

1 -> 0: Fall

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
TR Track/save input variable 0 0/1
R Reset input variable 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 173
Logic
4.51 TRK_D

4.51 TRK_D
Tracking/memory element (DOUBLE INTEGER type)

Symbol

TRK_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
7UDFNVDYH %2 75
,QSXWYDULDEOH
5HVHWLQSXWYDULDEOH %2 5

Brief description
Block of the DOUBLE INTEGER type for saving a current input value with the following
properties:
● Edge-controlled latch functions for the input value
● Level-controlled correction of the output value

Method of operation

TRACK TR = 1 Direct tracking of output value Y = X.

TR = 1-> 0 With a negative edge at TR, the current input variable is saved and output on output Y.
TR = 0 The value at output Y does not change.
RESET R=1 Output Y is reset to 0. The reset input is dominant.

Initialization
If input TR receives the value 1 during initialization of an upstream block output, a negative
edge can be detected during the first cyclic pass. In START mode, the value for TR is stored
temporarily.
If input TR receives the value 0 during initialization of the upstream block output, the block
cannot detect a negative edge during the first cyclic pass.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

174 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.51 TRK_D

Block diagram

;
<
75

Truth table(s)

Input Output Y at the time of triggering

TR R
0 0 Yn = Yn-1
1 0 Yn = Xn
1 1 Yn = 0
1->0 0 Yn = Xn
1->0 1 Yn = 0

1 -> 0: Fall

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attributes

X Input variable 0 DINT
TR Track/save input variable 0 0/1
R Reset input variable 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0 DINT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special character‐ -
istics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 175
Logic
4.52 XOR

4.52 XOR
Logic exclusive OR operation (BOOL type)

Symbol

XOR
%LQDU\YDOXHLQSXW %2 , 4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH;25

Brief description
XOR block with up to four inputs of the BOOL type

Method of operation
The block combines the binary values at the inputs I 1-4 according to the logic exclusive OR
function and outputs the result at its binary output Q.
Output Q is 0, when a 0 is present at all inputs I1 to I4 or when a 1 is present at an even number
of the inputs I1 to I4.
Output Q is 1, when a 1 is present at an odd number of the inputs I1 to I4.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Binary value input 0 0/1
Q Binary variable XOR 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ I comprises up to four connections (I1 to I4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

176 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Logic
4.53 XOR_W

4.53 XOR_W
Logic exclusive OR operation (WORD type)

Symbol

XOR_W
,QSXWVWDWXVZRUG : , 46 : ;25VWDWXVZRUG
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH

Brief description
XOR block with up to four inputs of the WORD type

Method of operation
The block combines the status words I1 to I4 bit-by-bit according to the logic exclusive OR
function.
The result is given to the block output QS (status word XOR).
The following applies for bit k of status word XOR:

46N= ,N∧,N ∨ ,N∧,N N=

A bit of status word XOR equals 1 if an odd number of the equivalent bits at the generic block
inputs I1 to I4 equals 1.
The binary output Q is 1 if at least one bit of the status word XOR is equal to 1.

Following state diagram (for 3 inputs)

6WDWXVZRUG
,
              

6WDWXVZRUG [RU
,
               

;25VWDWXVZRUG
46
               

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 177
Logic
4.53 XOR_W

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Input status word 16#0000 WORD
QS XOR status word 16#0000 WORD
Q Binary variable 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ Up to four connections (I1 to I4)
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

178 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
Conversion 5
5.1 BY_B
Status byte to eight binary variables converter

Symbol

BY_B
6WDWXVZRUG %< ,6 4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH

Brief description
Status word decoding to eight binary variables

Method of operation
This block decodes the status word IS to eight binary variables and gives the result to its outputs
Q1 to Q8.
The binary variable of outputs Q1 to Q8 is assigned to each dual equivalent 20 to 27 of the
status byte.

Block diagram

4
4
,6 

'
4

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 179
Conversion
5.1 BY_B

Mapping scheme

Bit position (dual equivalent) of status byte IS Output variable

0 (2 )
0
Q1
1 (2 )
1
Q2
2 (22) Q3
3 (2 )
3
Q4
4 (2 )
4
Q5
5 (25) Q6
6 (2 )
6
Q7
7 (27) Q8

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
IS Status word 16#00 BYTE
Q1 Binary variable 1 0 0/1
Q2 Binary variable 2 0 0/1
Q3 Binary variable 3 0 0/1
Q4 Binary variable 4 0 0/1
Q5 Binary variable 5 0 0/1
Q6 Binary variable 6 0 0/1
Q7 Binary variable 7 0 0/1
Q8 Binary variable 8 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

180 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.2 BY_W

5.2 BY_W
Status byte to status word converter

Symbol

BY_W
+LJKLQSXWE\WH %< ,%+ 46 : 6WDWXVZRUG
/RZLQSXWE\WH %< ,%/

Brief description
Combining two bytes into one word

Method of operation
The block combines two bytes into one word. The low byte of the output word is assigned to
the input byte IBL and the high byte of the output word is assigned to the input byte IBH. The
output word is present on QS according to the following conversion scheme.

Conversion scheme

,QSXW,%+

 

,QSXW,%/

 

2XWSXW46

   

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 181
Conversion
5.2 BY_W

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
IBH High input byte 16#00 BYTE
IBL Low input byte 16#00 BYTE
QS Status word 16#0000 WORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

182 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.3 B_BY

5.3 B_BY
Eight binary variables to status byte converter

Symbol

B_BY
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 , 46 %< 6WDWXVE\WH
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,

Brief description
Status byte generation from eight binary variables

Method of operation
This block combines the binary variables from I1 to I8 into a status byte and gives the result
to its output QS.
Each binary variable of inputs I1 to I8 is assigned the dual equivalent 20 to 27 from which the
status word is generated.

Block diagram

,
,
' 46

,

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 183
Conversion
5.3 B_BY

Mapping scheme

Input variable Bit position (dual equivalent) of status byte QS

I1 0 (20)
I2 1 (21)
I3 2 (22)
I4 3 (23)
I5 4 (24)
I6 5 (25)
I7 6 (26)
I8 7 (27)

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I1 Binary variable 1 0 0/1
I2 Binary variable 2 0 0/1
I3 Binary variable 3 0 0/1
I4 Binary variable 4 0 0/1
I5 Binary variable 5 0 0/1
I6 Binary variable 6 0 0/1
I7 Binary variable 7 0 0/1
I8 Binary variable 8 0 0/1
QS Status byte 16#00 BYTE

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

184 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.4 B_DW

5.4 B_DW
32 binary variables to status double word converter

Symbol

B_DW
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 , 46 ': 6WDWXVGRXEOHZRUG
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,

Brief description
Status double word generation from 32 binary variables

Method of operation
The block combines the binary variables of I1 to I32 into a status double word and outputs the
result at output QS. Each binary variable of inputs I1 to I32 is assigned the dual equivalent 20
to 231 from which the status double word is generated.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 185
Conversion
5.4 B_DW

Block diagram

,
,
' 46

,

Mapping scheme

Input parameters Bit position (dual equivalent) of status byte QS

|1 0 (20)
|2 1 (21)
|3 2 (22)
... ...
|32 31 (231)

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I1 Binary variable 1 0 0/1
I2 Binary variable 2 0 0/1
I3 Binary variable 3 0 0/1
I4 Binary variable 4 0 0/1
I5 Binary variable 5 0 0/1
I6 Binary variable 6 0 0/1
I7 Binary variable 7 0 0/1
I8 Binary variable 8 0 0/1
I9 Binary variable 9 0 0/1
I10 Binary variable 10 0 0/1
I11 Binary variable 11 0 0/1
I12 Binary variable 12 0 0/1
I13 Binary variable 13 0 0/1
I14 Binary variable 14 0 0/1
I15 Binary variable 15 0 0/1
I16 Binary variable 16 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

186 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.4 B_DW

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I17 Binary variable 17 0 0/1
I18 Binary variable 18 0 0/1
I19 Binary variable 19 0 0/1
I20 Binary variable 20 0 0/1
I21 Binary variable 21 0 0/1
I22 Binary variable 22 0 0/1
I23 Binary variable 23 0 0/1
I24 Binary variable 24 0 0/1
I25 Binary variable 25 0 0/1
I26 Binary variable 26 0 0/1
I27 Binary variable 27 0 0/1
I28 Binary variable 28 0 0/1
I29 Binary variable 29 0 0/1
I30 Binary variable 30 0 0/1
I31 Binary variable 31 0 0/1
I32 Binary variable 32 0 0/1
QS Status double word 16#00000000 DWORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 187
Conversion
5.5 B_W

5.5 B_W
16 binary variables to status word converter

Symbol

B_W
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 , 46 : 6WDWXVZRUG
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,
%LQDU\YDULDEOH %2 ,

Brief description
Status word generation from 16 binary variables

Method of operation
This block combines the binary variables from I1 to I16 into a status word and gives the result
to its output QS.
Each binary variable of inputs I1 to I16 is assigned the dual equivalent 20 to 215 from which the
status word is generated.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

188 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.5 B_W

Block diagram

,
,
' 46

,

Conversion scheme

,QSXWV

, , , , , ,

'XDOHTXLYDOHQW

     

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I1 Binary variable 1 0 0/1
I2 Binary variable 2 0 0/1
I3 Binary variable 3 0 0/1
I4 Binary variable 4 0 0/1
I5 Binary variable 5 0 0/1
I6 Binary variable 6 0 0/1
I7 Binary variable 7 0 0/1
I8 Binary variable 8 0 0/1
I9 Binary variable 9 0 0/1
I10 Binary variable 10 0 0/1
I11 Binary variable 11 0 0/1
I12 Binary variable 12 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 189
Conversion
5.5 B_W

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I13 Binary variable 13 0 0/1
I14 Binary variable 14 0 0/1
I15 Binary variable 15 0 0/1
I16 Binary variable 16 0 0/1
QS Status word 16#0000 WORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

190 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.6 DW_B

5.6 DW_B
Status double word to 32 binary variables converter

Symbol

DW_B
6WDWXVGRXEOHZRUG ': ,6 4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH

Brief description
Status double word decryption to 32 binary variables

Method of operation
This block decodes the status double word IS to 32 binary variables and gives the result to its
outputs Q1 to Q32.
The binary variable of outputs Q1 to Q32 is assigned to each dual equivalent 20 to 231 of the
status word.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 191
Conversion
5.6 DW_B

Block diagram

4
4
,6 

'
4

Mapping scheme

Bit position (dual equivalent) of status double word IS Output variable

0 (2 )0
Q1
1 (21) Q2
2 (2 )2
Q3
... ...
31 (2 ) 31
Q32

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
IS Status double word 16#00000000 DWORD
Q1 Binary variable 1 0 0/1
Q2 Binary variable 2 0 0/1
Q3 Binary variable 3 0 0/1
Q4 Binary variable 4 0 0/1
Q5 Binary variable 5 0 0/1
Q6 Binary variable 6 0 0/1
Q7 Binary variable 7 0 0/1
Q8 Binary variable 8 0 0/1
Q9 Binary variable 9 0 0/1
Q10 Binary variable 10 0 0/1
Q11 Binary variable 11 0 0/1
Q12 Binary variable 12 0 0/1
Q13 Binary variable 13 0 0/1
Q14 Binary variable 14 0 0/1
Q15 Binary variable 15 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

192 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.6 DW_B

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
Q16 Binary variable 16 0 0/1
Q17 Binary variable 17 0 0/1
Q18 Binary variable 18 0 0/1
Q19 Binary variable 19 0 0/1
Q20 Binary variable 20 0 0/1
Q21 Binary variable 21 0 0/1
Q22 Binary variable 22 0 0/1
Q23 Binary variable 23 0 0/1
Q24 Binary variable 24 0 0/1
Q25 Binary variable 25 0 0/1
Q26 Binary variable 26 0 0/1
Q27 Binary variable 27 0 0/1
Q28 Binary variable 28 0 0/1
Q29 Binary variable 29 0 0/1
Q30 Binary variable 30 0 0/1
Q31 Binary variable 31 0 0/1
Q32 Binary variable 32 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 193
Conversion
5.7 DW_R

5.7 DW_R
Acceptance of bit string as REAL value

Symbol

DW_R
,QSXWYDULDEOH GRXEOHZRUG ': ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
6XEVWLWXWHYDOXH,1) 5 693 ,)3 %2 ,QILQLW\
6XEVWLWXWHYDOXH,1) 5 691 ,)1 %2 1HJDWLYHLQILQLW\
6XEVWLWXWHYDOXH1D1 5 69 1$1 %2 1RWD1XPEHU

Brief description
This block accepts the bit string at the input as a REAL variable and checks the value for validity

Method of operation
The DW_R block accepts the bit string at the input as a REAL variable and supplies it at output
Y.
The bit pattern of input variable X is checked. If the bit pattern corresponds to the representation
for +/-infinite or NaN according to IEEE 754, the corresponding binary outputs IFP, IFN, and
NAN are set to 1, and the substitute value predefined for each are applied at output Y.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable (double word) 16#00000000 DWORD
SVP Substitute value INF 3.402823 E38 REAL
SVN Substitute value -INF -3.402823 E38 REAL
SV Substitute value NaN 0.0 REAL
IFP Infinity 0 0/1
IFN Negative infinity 0 0/1
NAN Not a Number 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

194 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.8 DW_W

5.8 DW_W
Status double word to status word converter

Symbol

DW_W
ELWLQSXWGRXEOHZRUG ': ,6 4:+ : 2XWSXWZRUGKLJK
4:/ : 2XWSXWZRUGORZ

Brief description
A 32-bit double word is divided into two 16-bit words.

Method of operation
Output variables are calculated according to the following regulation:
QWL = IS mod 216
QWH = IS / 216

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
IS 32-bit input double word 16#00000000 DWORD
QWH Output word high 16#0000 WORD
QWL Output word low 16#0000 WORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 195
Conversion
5.9 D_I

5.9 D_I
DOUBLE INTEGER to INTEGER converter

Symbol

D_I
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZRIYDOXHUDQJH

Brief description
Conversion of a DOUBLE INTEGER variable to an INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts a DOUBLE INTEGER variable to an INTEGER variable, i.e. the least
significant word of the DOUBLE INTEGER input variable is applied to the output variable Y.
If the value of input variable X exceeds the value range of output variable Y, then QF = 1 is
set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 DINT
Y Output variable 0 INT
QF Overflow of value range 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

196 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.10 D_R

5.10 D_R
DOUBLE INTEGER to REAL converter

Symbol

D_R
,QSXWYDULDEOH GRXEOHZRUG ', ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Conversion of a DOUBLE INTEGER variable to a REAL variable

Method of operation
This block converts a DOUBLE INTEGER variable to a REAL variable.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable (double word) 0 DINT
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 197
Conversion
5.11 D_SI

5.11 D_SI
DOUBLE INTEGER to SHORT INTEGER converter

Symbol

D_SI
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < 6, 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZRIYDOXHUDQJH

Brief description
Conversion of a DOUBLE INTEGER variable to a SHORT INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts a DOUBLE INTEGER variable to a SHORT INTEGER variable, i.e. the
least significant byte of the DOUBLE INTEGER input variable is applied to output variable Y.
If the value of input variable X exceeds the value range of output variable Y, then QF = 1 is
set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 DINT
Y Output variable 0 SINT
QF Overflow of value range 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

198 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.12 D_UI

5.12 D_UI
DOUBLE INTEGER to UNSIGNED INTEGER converter

Symbol

D_UI
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < 8, 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZRIYDOXHUDQJH

Brief description
Conversion of a DOUBLE INTEGER variable to an UNSIGNED INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts a DOUBLE INTEGER variable to an UNSIGNED INTEGER variable, i.e.
the least significant word of the DOUBLE INTEGER input variable is applied to the output
variable.
If the value of input variable X exceeds the value range of output variable Y, then QF = 1 is
set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 DINT
Y Output variable 0 UINT
QF Overflow of value range 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 199
Conversion
5.13 D_US

5.13 D_US
DOUBLE INTEGER to UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER converter

Symbol

D_US
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < 86 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZRIYDOXHUDQJH

Brief description
Conversion of a DOUBLE INTEGER variable to an UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts a DOUBLE INTEGER variable to an UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER
variable, i.e. the least significant word of the DOUBLE INTEGER input variable is applied to
the output variable.
If the value of input variable X exceeds the value range of output variable Y, then QF = 1 is
set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 DINT
Y Output variable 0 USINT
QF Overflow of value range 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

200 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.14 I_D

5.14 I_D
INTEGER to DOUBLE INTEGER converter

Symbol

I_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Conversion of an INTEGER variable to a DOUBLE INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts an INTEGER variable to a DOUBLE INTEGER variable.
The input variable of data type INTEGER is copied to the least significant word of the output
variable. If the input variable has a positive sign, the most significant word of the output variable
is filled with 16#0000. If, on the other hand, the sign is negative, the most significant word
receives the value 16#FFFF.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 INT
Y Output variable 0 DINT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 201
Conversion
5.15 I_R

5.15 I_R
INTEGER to REAL converter

Symbol

I_R
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Conversion of an INTEGER variable to a REAL variable

Method of operation
This block converts an INTEGER variable to a REAL variable.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 INT
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

202 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.16 I_SI

5.16 I_SI
INTEGER to SHORT INTEGER converter

Symbol

I_SI
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < 6, 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZRIYDOXHUDQJH

Brief description
Conversion of an INTEGER variable to a SHORT INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts an INTEGER variable to a SHORT INTEGER variable, i.e. the least
significant byte of the INTEGER input variable is applied to output variable Y.
If the value of input variable X exceeds the value range of output variable Y, then QF = 1 is
set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 INT
Y Output variable 0 SINT
QF Overflow of value range 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 203
Conversion
5.17 I_UD

5.17 I_UD
INTEGER to UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER converter

Symbol

I_UD
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < 8' 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 ,QSXWYDULDEOHQHJDWLYH

Brief description
Conversion of an INTEGER variable to an UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts an INTEGER variable to an UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER variable.
The input variable of data type INTEGER is copied to the least significant word of the output
variable.
The most significant word of the output variable is filled with 16#0000.
If the value of the input variable is negative, QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 INT
Y Output variable 0 UDINT
QF Input variable negative 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

204 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.18 I_US

5.18 I_US
INTEGER to UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER converter

Symbol

I_US
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < 86 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZRIYDOXHUDQJH

Brief description
Conversion of an INTEGER variable to an UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts an INTEGER variable to an UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER variable, i.e.
the least significant byte of the INTEGER input variable is applied to output variable Y.
If the value of input variable X exceeds the value range of output variable Y, then QF = 1 is
set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 INT
Y Output variable 0 USINT
QF Overflow of value range 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 205
Conversion
5.19 LR_R

5.19 LR_R
LONG REAL to REAL converter

Symbol

LR_R
,QSXWYDULDEOH GRXEOHZRUG /5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZ

Brief description
Conversion of a LONG REAL variable to a REAL variable

Method of operation
This block converts a LONG REAL variable to a REAL variable. The result is limited to the
maximum range of data type REAL. If the output variable has been limited, then QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable (double word) 0 LREAL
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL
QF Overflow 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

206 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.20 N2_R

5.20 N2_R
16-bit fixed-point format (N2) to REAL converter

Symbol

N2_R
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
1RUPDOL]DWLRQIDFWRU 5 1)
5HIHUHQFHYDOXH , %9

Brief description
Conversion of a 16-bit fixed-point variable to a REAL variable. For the case X and BV= 16384
(corresponds to 100% in normalized PROFIdrive representation), output Y assumes the value
at input NF.

Method of operation
Input variable X is mapped to output Y according to the following formula:

(;⋅1))
<=
%9

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 INT
NF Normalization factor 1.0 REAL
BV Reference value 16384 INT
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 207
Conversion
5.21 N4_R

5.21 N4_R
32-bit fixed-point format (N4) to REAL converter

Symbol

N4_R
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
1RUPDOL]DWLRQIDFWRU 5 1)
5HIHUHQFHYDOXH ', %9

Brief description
Conversion of a 32-bit fixed-point variable to a REAL variable. For the case X and BV=
1073741824 (corresponds to 100% in normalized PROFIdrive representation), output Y
assumes the value at input NF.

Method of operation
Input variable X is mapped to output Y according to the following formula:

(;⋅1))
<=
%9

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 DINT
NF Normalization factor 1.0 REAL
BV Reference value 1073741824 DINT
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

208 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.22 R_D

5.22 R_D
REAL to DOUBLE INTEGER converter

Symbol

R_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZ

Brief description
Conversion of a REAL variable to a DOUBLE INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts a REAL variable to a DOUBLE INTEGER variable. During the conversion,
decimal places of the input variable are truncated.

Note
The number is not rounded off.

The result is limited to the data type of the output variable corresponding to -231 or 231-1. If the
output variable has been limited, then QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
Y Output variable 0 DINT
QF Overflow 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 209
Conversion
5.23 R_DW

5.23 R_DW
Acceptance of bit string as DWORD

Symbol

R_DW
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < ': 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
This block copies the bit string of the input variable to the output variable.

Method of operation
This block copies the bit string of input variable X to the output variable Y.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
Y Output variable 16#00000000 DWORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

210 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.24 R_I

5.24 R_I
REAL to INTEGER converter

Symbol

R_I
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZ

Brief description
Conversion of a REAL variable to an INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts a REAL variable to an INTEGER variable. During the conversion, decimal
places of the input variable are truncated. The number is not rounded off. The result is limited
to the data type of the output variable corresponding to +32767 or -32768. If the output variable
has been limited, then QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
Y Output variable 0 INT
QF Overflow 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 211
Conversion
5.25 R_LR

5.25 R_LR
REAL to LONG REAL converter

Symbol

R_LR
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < /5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Conversion of a REAL variable to a LONG REAL variable

Method of operation
This block converts a REAL variable to a LONG REAL variable.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
Y Output variable 0.0 LREAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

212 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.26 R_N2

5.26 R_N2
REAL to 16-bit fixed-point format (N2) converter

Symbol

R_N2
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
1RUPDOL]DWLRQIDFWRU 5 1) 4) %2 2YHUIORZ
5HIHUHQFHYDOXH , %9

Brief description
Conversion of a REAL variable to a 16-bit fixed-point variable. For the case X = NF and BV =
16384 (default), output Y assumes the value 16384 (corresponds to 100% in normalized
PROFIdrive representation).

Method of operation
Input variable X is mapped to output Y according to the following formula (result is rounded):

;⋅%9
<=
1)
Y is limited to the range -32768 ≤ Y ≤ 32767 (corresponds to -200% ≤ Y < 200%).
Output QF (overflow) is set to "1" if X cannot be mapped on Y because of a range violation,
or if NF = 0 has been set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
NF Normalization factor 1.0 REAL
BV Reference value 16384 INT
Y Output variable 0 INT
QF Overflow 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 213
Conversion
5.26 R_N2

Can be inserted on‐ Yes

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

214 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.27 R_N4

5.27 R_N4
REAL to 32-bit fixed-point format (N4) converter

Symbol

R_N4
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
1RUPDOL]DWLRQIDFWRU 5 1) 4) %2 2YHUIORZ
5HIHUHQFHYDOXH ', %9

Brief description
Conversion of a REAL variable to a 32-bit fixed-point variable. For the case X = NF and BV =
1073741824 (default), output Y assumes the value 1073741824 (corresponds to 100%).

Method of operation
Input variable X is mapped to output Y according to the following formula (result is rounded):

;⋅%9
<=
1)
Y is limited to the range -2147483648 ≤ Y ≤ 2147483647 (decimal) or 16#8000000 ≤ Y ≤
16#7FFFFFF (hexadecimal) (corresponds to -200% ≤ Y < 200%).
Output QF (overflow) is set to "1" if X cannot be mapped on Y because of a range violation,
or if NF = 0 has been set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
NF Normalization factor 1.0 REAL
BV Reference value 1073741824 DINT
Y Output variable 0 DINT
QF Overflow 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 215
Conversion
5.27 R_N4

Can be inserted on‐ Yes

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

216 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.28 R_SI

5.28 R_SI
REAL to SHORT INTEGER converter

Symbol

R_SI
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 6, 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZRIYDOXHUDQJH

Brief description
Conversion of a REAL variable to a SHORT INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts a REAL variable to a SHORT INTEGER variable. During the conversion,
decimal places of the input variable are truncated. The number is not rounded off. The result
is limited to the data type of the output variable corresponding to -128 or 127. If the output
variable has been limited, then QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
Y Output variable 0 SINT
QF Overflow of value range 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 217
Conversion
5.29 R_UD

5.29 R_UD
REAL to UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER converter

Symbol

R_UD
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 8' 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZRIYDOXHUDQJH

Brief description
Conversion of a REAL variable to an UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts a REAL variable to an UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER variable. During
the conversion, decimal places of the input variable are truncated. The number is not rounded
off. The result is limited to the data type of the output variable corresponding to 0 or 232 -1. If
the output variable has been limited, then QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
Y Output variable 0 UDINT
QF Overflow of value range 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

218 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.30 R_UI

5.30 R_UI
REAL to UNSIGNED INTEGER converter

Symbol

R_UI
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 8, 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZRIYDOXHUDQJH

Brief description
Conversion of a REAL variable to an UNSIGNED INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts a REAL variable to an UNSIGNED INTEGER variable. During the
conversion, decimal places of the input variable are truncated. The number is not rounded off.
The result is limited to the data type of the output variable corresponding to 0 or 216 -1. If the
output variable has been limited, then QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
Y Output variable 0 UINT
QF Overflow of value range 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 219
Conversion
5.31 R_US

5.31 R_US
REAL to UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER converter

Symbol

R_US
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 86 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZRIYDOXHUDQJH

Brief description
Conversion of a REAL variable to an UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts a REAL variable to an UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER variable.
During the conversion, decimal places of the input variable are truncated. The number is not
rounded off. The result is limited to the data type of the output variable corresponding to 0 or
28 -1. If the output variable has been limited, then QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
Y Output variable 0 USINT
QF Overflow of value range 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

220 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.32 SI_D

5.32 SI_D
SHORT INTEGER to DOUBLE INTEGER converter

Symbol

SI_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH 6, ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Conversion of a SHORT INTEGER variable to a DOUBLE INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts a SHORT INTEGER variable to a DOUBLE INTEGER variable.
The input variable of data type SHORT INTEGER is copied to the least significant byte of the
output variable. If the input variable has a positive sign, the most significant bytes of the output
variable are filled with 16#00. If, on the other hand, the sign is negative, the most significant
bytes receive the value 16#FF.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 SINT
Y Output variable 0 DINT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 221
Conversion
5.33 SI_I

5.33 SI_I
SHORT INTEGER to INTEGER converter

Symbol

SI_I
,QSXWYDULDEOH 6, ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Conversion of a SHORT INTEGER variable to an INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts a SHORT INTEGER variable to an INTEGER variable.
The input variable of data type SHORT INTEGER is copied to the least significant byte of the
output variable. If the input variable has a positive sign, the most significant byte of the output
variable is filled with 16#00. If, on the other hand, the sign is negative, the most significant byte
receives the value 16#FF.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 SINT
Y Output variable 0 INT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

222 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.34 SI_R

5.34 SI_R
SHORT INTEGER to REAL converter

Symbol

SI_R
,QSXWYDULDEOH 6, ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Conversion of a SHORT INTEGER variable to a REAL variable

Method of operation
This block converts a SHORT INTEGER variable to a REAL variable.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 SINT
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 223
Conversion
5.35 SI_UD

5.35 SI_UD
SHORT INTEGER to UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER converter

Symbol

SI_UD
,QSXWYDULDEOH 6, ; < 8' 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 ,QSXWYDULDEOHQHJDWLYH

Brief description
Conversion of a SHORT INTEGER variable to an UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts a SHORT INTEGER variable to an UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER
variable.
The input variable of data type SHORT INTEGER is copied to the least significant byte of the
output variable. The most significant bytes of the output variable are filled with 16#00. If the
value of the input variable is negative, QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 SINT
Y Output variable 0 UDINT
QF Input variable negative 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

224 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.36 SI_UI

5.36 SI_UI
SHORT INTEGER to UNSIGNED INTEGER converter

Symbol

SI_UI
,QSXWYDULDEOH 6, ; < 8, 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 ,QSXWYDULDEOHQHJDWLYH

Brief description
Conversion of a SHORT INTEGER variable to an UNSIGNED INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts a SHORT INTEGER variable to an UNSIGNED INTEGER variable.
The input variable of data type SHORT INTEGER is copied to the least significant byte of the
output variable. The most significant byte of the output variable is filled with 16#00. If the value
of the input variable is negative, QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 SINT
Y Output variable 0 UDINT
QF Input variable negative 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 225
Conversion
5.37 UD_I

5.37 UD_I
UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER to INTEGER converter

Symbol

UD_I
,QSXWYDULDEOH 8' ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZRIYDOXHUDQJH

Brief description
Conversion of an UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER variable to an INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts an UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER variable to an INTEGER variable, i.e.
the least significant word of the UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER input variable is applied to
output variable Y.
If the value of input variable X exceeds the value range of output variable Y, then QF = 1 is
set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 UDINT
Y Output variable 0 INT
QF Overflow of value range 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

226 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.38 UD_R

5.38 UD_R
UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER to REAL converter

Symbol

UD_R
,QSXWYDULDEOH 8' ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Conversion of an UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER variable to a REAL variable

Method of operation
This block converts an UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER variable to a REAL variable.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 UDINT
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 227
Conversion
5.39 UD_SI

5.39 UD_SI
UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER to SHORT INTEGER converter

Symbol

UD_SI
,QSXWYDULDEOH 8' ; < 6, 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZRIYDOXHUDQJH

Brief description
Conversion of an UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER variable to a SHORT INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts an UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER variable to a SHORT INTEGER
variable, i.e. the least significant byte of the UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER input variable is
applied to output variable Y. If the value of input variable X exceeds the value range of output
variable Y, then QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 UDINT
Y Output variable 0 SINT
QF Overflow of value range 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

228 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.40 UI_D

5.40 UI_D
UNSIGNED INTEGER to DOUBLE INTEGER converter

Symbol

UI_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH 8, ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Conversion of an UNSIGNED INTEGER variable to a DOUBLE INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts an UNSIGNED INTEGER variable to a DOUBLE INTEGER variable.
The input variable of data type UNSIGNED INTEGER is copied to the least significant word
of output variable Y. The most significant word is filled with 16#0000.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 UINT
Y Output variable 0 DINT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 229
Conversion
5.41 UI_R

5.41 UI_R
UNSIGNED INTEGER to REAL converter

Symbol

UI_R
,QSXWYDULDEOH 8, ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Conversion of an UNSIGNED INTEGER variable to a REAL variable

Method of operation
This block converts an UNSIGNED INTEGER variable to a REAL variable.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 UINT
Y Output variable 0 DINT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

230 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.42 UI_SI

5.42 UI_SI
UNSIGNED INTEGER to SHORT INTEGER converter

Symbol

UI_SI
,QSXWYDULDEOH 8, ; < 6, 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
4) %2 2YHUIORZRIYDOXHUDQJH

Brief description
Conversion of an UNSIGNED INTEGER variable to a SHORT INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts an UNSIGNED INTEGER variable to a SHORT INTEGER variable, i.e.
the least significant byte of the UNSIGNED INTEGER input variable is applied to output
variable Y. If the value of input variable X exceeds the value range of output variable Y, then
QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 UINT
Y Output variable 0 SINT
QF Overflow of value range 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 231
Conversion
5.43 US_D

5.43 US_D
UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER to DOUBLE INTEGER converter

Symbol

US_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH 86 ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Conversion of an UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER variable to a DOUBLE INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts an UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER variable to a DOUBLE INTEGER
variable.
The input variable of data type UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER is copied to the least significant
byte of output variable Y. The remaining most significant bytes are filled with 16#00.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 USINT
Y Output variable 0 DINT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

232 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.44 US_I

5.44 US_I
UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER to INTEGER converter

Symbol

US_I
,QSXWYDULDEOH 86 ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Conversion of an UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER variable to an INTEGER variable

Method of operation
This block converts an UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER variable to an INTEGER variable.
The input variable of data type UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER is copied to the least significant
byte of output variable Y. The remaining most significant bytes are filled with 16#00.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 USINT
Y Output variable 0 INT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 233
Conversion
5.45 US_R

5.45 US_R
UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER to REAL converter

Symbol

US_R
,QSXWYDULDEOH 86 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH

Brief description
Conversion of an UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER variable to a REAL variable

Method of operation
This block converts an UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER variable to a REAL variable.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 USINT
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

234 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.46 W_B

5.46 W_B
Status word to 16 binary variables converter

Symbol

W_B
6WDWXVZRUG : ,6 4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH
4 %2 %LQDU\YDULDEOH

Brief description
Status word decoding to 16 binary variables

Method of operation
This block decodes the status word IS to 16 binary variables and gives the result to its outputs
Q1 to Q16.
The binary variable of outputs Q1 to Q16 is assigned to each dual equivalent 20 to 215 of the
status word.

,
,
' 46

,

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 235
Conversion
5.46 W_B

Conversion scheme

'XDOHTXLYDOHQW
  
     

2XWSXWV

4 4 4 4 4 4

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
IS Status word 16#0000 WORD
I1 Binary variable 1 0 0/1
I2 Binary variable 2 0 0/1
I3 Binary variable 3 0 0/1
I4 Binary variable 4 0 0/1
I5 Binary variable 5 0 0/1
I6 Binary variable 6 0 0/1
I7 Binary variable 7 0 0/1
I8 Binary variable 8 0 0/1
I9 Binary variable 9 0 0/1
I10 Binary variable 10 0 0/1
I11 Binary variable 11 0 0/1
I12 Binary variable 12 0 0/1
I13 Binary variable 13 0 0/1
I14 Binary variable 14 0 0/1
I15 Binary variable 15 0 0/1
I16 Binary variable 16 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

236 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.47 W_BY

5.47 W_BY
Status word to status byte converter

Symbol

W_BY
6WDWXVZRUG : ,6 4%+ %< +LJKRXWSXWE\WH
4%/ %< /RZRXWSXWE\WH

Brief description
Conversion of a word to 2 bytes

Method of operation
This block splits the input word at IS into two bytes. These can be output to the I/O via the
SBQ block. The most significant byte of the word at input IS is output at output QBH, and the
least significant byte of the word at input IS is output at output QBL (see conversion scheme
below):

Conversion scheme

,QSXW,6

   

2XWSXW4%+

 

2XWSXW4%/

 

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 237
Conversion
5.47 W_BY

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
IS Status word 16#0000 WORD
QBH High output byte 16#00 BYTE
QBL Low output byte 16#00 BYTE

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

238 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Conversion
5.48 W_DW

5.48 W_DW
Status word to status double word converter

Symbol

W_DW
+LJKLQSXWZRUG : ,:+ 46 ': 6WDWXVGRXEOHZRUG
/RZLQSXWZRUG : ,:/

Brief description
Two 16-bit words are copied to one 32-bit double word.

Method of operation
The input variables are mapped according to the formula
QS = (IWL + IWH) * 216
to output QS.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
IWH High input word 16#0000 WORD
IWH Low input word 16#0000 WORD
QS Status double word 16#00000000 DWORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 239
Conversion
5.48 W_DW

Description of the DCC standard blocks

240 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
System 6
6.1 CTD
Time difference determination from an internal time stamp

Symbol

CTD
&DOFXODWHWLPHGLIIHUHQFH %2 (1 7' 8' 7LPHGLIIHUHQFHLQPLFURVHFRQGV
,QWHUQDOWLPHVWDPS 8' ,76 09 5 &XUUHQWPHDQYDOXH
4 %2 0HDQYDOXHJHQHUDWLRQHQGHG

Brief description
Block for determining a time difference in microseconds.

Method of operation
If EN = 1, the time difference relative to time stamp ITS is determined and output at output TD.
Time stamp ITS must be determined beforehand with block GTS. A positive edge at EN starts
the mean value generation of TD, and the output is output at MV. After 10000 mean value
determinations, the mean value generation ends and output Q is set to 1. If input EN = 0 is
set, the mean value generation and output Q is reset. Outputs TD and MV retain their last
value.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
EN Calculate time difference 0 0/1
ITS Internal time stamp 0 UDINT
TD Time difference in microseconds 0 UDINT
MV Current mean value 0 REAL
Q Mean value generation ended 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 241
System
6.1 CTD

Can be loaded on‐ Yes

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

242 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.2 GTS

6.2 GTS
Reads out a time stamp

Symbol

GTS
2XWSXWWLPHVWDPS %2 (1 ,76 8' ,QWHUQDOWLPHVWDPS

Brief description
Blocks for reading out an internal time stamp for determination of runtimes. The determined
time stamp can then be indicated at the CTD block for calculating a time difference in
microseconds.

Method of operation
If EN = 1, an internal time stamp is determined and output at output TS. If EN = 0 is predefined,
the last determined time stamp is output at TS.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
EN Output time stamp 0 0/1
ITS Internal time stamp 0 UDINT

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS -
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 243
System
6.3 RAA

6.3 RAA
Reset all messages

Symbol

RAA
5HVHWDOOPHVVDJHV %2 5 4 %2 $OOPHVVDJHVUHVHW

Brief description
All active messages are reset with the RAA (Reset all Alarms) block.

Method of operation
As long as input R = 1, all active messages are reset. Output Q indicates that the reset has
been performed.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
R Reset all messages 0 0/1
Q All messages reset 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓ (as of V4.3)

SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

244 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.4 RDA

6.4 RDA
Reads out a message

Symbol

RDA
5HDGRXWPHVVDJHVWDWH %2 5' & %2 ,QFRPLQJPHVVDJH &20(
0HVVDJH,' $,' 0,' * %2 2XWJRLQJPHVVDJH *21(
5 %2 0HVVDJHDFNQRZOHGJHG 5(&(,37('
4) %2 (UURU

Brief description
The block reads the state of a message and its acknowledgement state.

Method of operation
● The message is configured in SIMOTION SCOUT and referenced via a project-wide unique
ID.
● Input MID contains the message ID, e.g. _alarm.Message.
● The state of the message is determined as long as input RD=1.
● A change of the message ID is possible. The state of the message ID specified at input
MID is read out in each cycle.
● The outputs display the state of the message. The following combinations are possible:

C (incoming message) G (outgoing message) R (message acknowl‐ Meaning

edged)
0 1 0 Outgoing message, not acknowl‐
edged
1 0 0 Incoming message, not acknowl‐
edged
1 0 1 Incoming message, acknowledged
0 0 0 Message not in the message buffer *)

*) Message not in the message buffer - there are three options:

● Message never triggered.
● Message triggered via AlarmS, but also sent.
● Message triggered via _AlarmSq, sent and acknowledged at the display device.
The outputs are refreshed as long as RD=1. With RD=0, the last state of the message buffer
is retained. Output Q is set when an error occurs, e.g. message ID not configured.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 245
System
6.4 RDA

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attributes

RD Read out message state 0 0/1
MID Message ID STRUCTALAR‐ StructAlarmId
MID#NIL
C Incoming message (COME) 0 0/1
G Outgoing message (GONE) 0 0/1
R Message acknowledged (RECEIPTED) 0 0/1
QF Error 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓ (as of V4.3)

SINAMICS -
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

246 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.5 RDAA

6.5 RDAA
Reads out all messages

Symbol

RDAA
5HDGRXWPHVVDJHEXIIHU %2 5' 180 8, 1XPEHURIDFWLYH
PHVVDJHV
$/$506 /LVWRIDFWLYH
PHVVDJHV

Brief description
The list of active messages in the SIMOTION target device is read out.

Method of operation
● The reading out of all active messages is initiated with a rising edge at input RD.
● The number of active messages is returned at NUM output.
● A field of up to 40 active messages is displayed at the ALARMS output.
The following is displayed for each alarm:
– The message ID
– The identifier for message not acknowledgeable (0), acknowledgeable message (1)
– The state of the alarm: OUTGOING_ALARM (0), INCOMING_ALARM (1)
● The outputs are refreshed as long as RD=1. With RD=0, the last state of the message
buffer is retained.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attributes

RD Read out message buffer 0 0/1
NUM Number of active messages 0 0..40
ALARMS List of active messages
ALARMS[] Up to 40 messages can be active 0
ALARMS[].Id Message ID STRUCTALAR‐ StructAlarmId
MID#NIL
ALARMS[].type Corresponds to enumAlarmIdType (0: 0 0/1
ALARM_S, 1: ALARM_SQ)
ALARMS[].InOut Corresponds to enumAlarmState OUTGO‐ 0 0/1
ING_ALARM (0), INCOMING_ALARM (1)

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 247
System
6.5 RDAA

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓ (as of V4.3)

SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

248 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.6 RDP

6.6 RDP
Reads drive parameters (REAL type)

Symbol

RDP
1XPHURSDUDPHWUR ', 3$5 < 5 9DORUHSDUDPHWUR
,QGLFHSDUDPHWUR ', ,'; %6< %2 -REGLOHWWXUDDWWLYR
$YYLRGHOMREGLOHWWXUD %2 5' 4 %2 -REGLOHWWXUDULXVFLWR
4) %2 (UURUH
(5& : &RGLFHGLHUURUH

Brief description
The block enables the asynchronous reading of drive parameters of the REAL type on the
local drive object.

Method of operation
The parameter number and the index of the parameter to be read must be specified at inputs
PAR and IDX, respectively. If a parameter is not indexed, IDX = 0 must be set. The parameter
is always read on the drive object on which the chart with the block is calculated. It is not
possible to access parameters on several drive objects.
The asynchronous read job is started on a positive edge at input RD. As long as the job is
active, the BSY flag is set. The number of cycles for a parameter access is dependent on the
system utilization and can vary from job to job. During an active read job, any additional positive
edges at input RD are ignored.
Output Q = 1 indicates that the parameter has been read successfully and the value is available
at output Y. Y holds its value until a new value has been read. If an error occurs during an
access, this is signaled with QF = 1. Output Y retains its last value.
For error diagnostics, the error code ERC can be evaluated. ERC corresponds to the error
code for parameter accesses according to PROVIdrive DPV1. The possible error codes can
be found in Appendix A.2 of this document or in the SINAMICS Function Manual FH1 in Section
PROFIBUS DP / PROFINET IO Communication and there in the Subsection Communication
according to PROFIdrive → Acyclic communication → Configuration of the jobs and responses
in Table Error values in DPV1 parameter responses.
ERC is only valid as long as QF = 1.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 249
System
6.6 RDP

Time diagram

5'

%6<

4)

5HDGMRELV
QRWUHVWDUWHG

Quantity framework
Any number of asynchronous jobs of different block instances can be issued in parallel. Each
block instance can only process one job.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
PAR Parameter number 0 0..216
IDX Parameter index 0 0..216
RD Start read job 0 0/1
Y Parameter value 0.0 REAL
BSY Read job is active 0 0/1
Q Read job is successful 0 0/1
QF Error 0 0/1
ERC Error code 16#0000 DWORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

250 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.6 RDP

Can be loaded on‐ No

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 251
System
6.7 RDP_D

6.7 RDP_D
Reads drive parameters (DOUBLE INTEGER type)

Symbol

RDP_D
3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU ', 3$5 < ', 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH
3DUDPHWHULQGH[ ', ,'; %6< %2 5HDGMRELVDFWLYH
6WDUWUHDGMRE %2 5' 4 %2 5HDGMRELVVXFFHVVIXO
4) %2 (UURU
(5& : (UURUFRGH

Brief description
The block enables the asynchronous reading of drive parameters of the DOUBLE INTEGER
type on the local drive object.

Method of operation
The parameter number and the index of the parameter to be read must be specified at inputs
PAR and IDX, respectively. If a parameter is not indexed, IDX = 0 must be set. The parameter
is always read on the drive object on which the chart with the block is calculated. It is not
possible to access parameters on several drive objects.
The asynchronous read job is started on a positive edge at input RD. As long as the job is
active, the BSY flag is set. The number of cycles for a parameter access is dependent on the
system utilization and can vary from job to job. During an active read job, any additional positive
edges at input RD are ignored.
Output Q = 1 indicates that the parameter has been read successfully and the value is available
at output Y. Y holds its value until a new value has been read. If an error occurs during an
access, this is signaled with QF = 1. Output Y retains its last value.
For error diagnostics, the error code ERC can be evaluated. ERC corresponds to the error
code for parameter accesses according to PROVIdrive DPV1. The possible error codes can
be found in Appendix A.2 of this document or in the SINAMICS Function Manual FH1 in Section
PROFIBUS DP / PROFINET IO Communication and there in the Subsection Communication
according to PROFIdrive → Acyclic communication → Configuration of the jobs and responses
in Table Error values in DPV1 parameter responses.
ERC is only valid as long as QF = 1.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

252 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.7 RDP_D

Time diagram

5'

%6<

4)

5HDGMRELV
QRWUHVWDUWHG

Quantity framework
Any number of asynchronous jobs of different block instances can be issued in parallel. Each
block instance can only process one job.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
PAR Parameter number 0 0..216
IDX Parameter index 0 0..216
RD Start read job 0 0/1
Y Parameter value 0 DINT
BSY Read job is active 0 0/1
Q Read job is successful 0 0/1
QF Error 0 0/1
ERC Error code 16#0000 WORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 253
System
6.7 RDP_D

Can be loaded on‐ No

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

254 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.8 RDP_I

6.8 RDP_I
Reads drive parameters (INTEGER type)

Symbol

RDP_I
3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU ', 3$5 < , 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH
3DUDPHWHULQGH[ ', ,'; %6< %2 5HDGMRELVDFWLYH
6WDUWUHDGMRE %2 5' 4 %2 5HDGMRELVVXFFHVVIXO
4) %2 (UURU
(5& : (UURUFRGH

Brief description
The block enables the asynchronous reading of drive parameters of the INTEGER type on the
local drive object.

Method of operation
The parameter number and the index of the parameter to be read must be specified at inputs
PAR and IDX, respectively. If a parameter is not indexed, IDX = 0 must be set. The parameter
is always read on the drive object on which the chart with the block is calculated. It is not
possible to access parameters on several drive objects.
The asynchronous read job is started on a positive edge at input RD. As long as the job is
active, the BSY flag is set. The number of cycles for a parameter access is dependent on the
system utilization and can vary from job to job. During an active read job, any additional positive
edges at input RD are ignored.
Output Q = 1 indicates that the parameter has been read successfully and the value is available
at output Y. Y holds its value until a new value has been read. If an error occurs during an
access, this is signaled with QF = 1. Output Y retains its last value.
For error diagnostics, the error code ERC can be evaluated. ERC corresponds to the error
code for parameter accesses according to PROVIdrive DPV1. The possible error codes can
be found in Appendix A.2 of this document or in the SINAMICS Function Manual FH1 in Section
PROFIBUS DP / PROFINET IO Communication and there in the Subsection Communication
according to PROFIdrive → Acyclic communication → Configuration of the jobs and responses
in Table Error values in DPV1 parameter responses.
ERC is only valid as long as QF = 1.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 255
System
6.8 RDP_I

Time diagram

5'

%6<

4)

5HDGMRELV
QRWUHVWDUWHG

Quantity framework
Any number of asynchronous jobs of different block instances can be issued in parallel. Each
block instance can only process one job.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
PAR Parameter number 0 0..216
IDX Parameter index 0 0..216
RD Start read job 0 0/1
Y Parameter value 0 INT
BSY Read job is active 0 0/1
Q Read job is successful 0 0/1
QF Error 0 0/1
ERC Error code 16#0000 WORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

256 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.8 RDP_I

Can be loaded on‐ No

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 257
System
6.9 RDP_UD

6.9 RDP_UD
Reads drive parameters (UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER type)

Symbol

RDP_UD
3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU ', 3$5 < 8' 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH
3DUDPHWHULQGH[ ', ,'; %6< %2 5HDGMRELVDFWLYH
6WDUWUHDGMRE %2 5' 4 %2 5HDGMRELVVXFFHVVIXO
4) %2 (UURU
(5& : (UURUFRGH

Brief description
RDP_UD (Read Parameter) enables the asynchronous reading of drive parameters of the
UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER type on the local drive object.

Method of operation
The parameter number and the index of the parameter to be read must be specified at inputs
PAR and IDX, respectively. If a parameter is not indexed, IDX = 0 must be set. The parameter
is always read on the drive object on which the chart with the block is calculated. It is not
possible to access parameters on several drive objects.
The asynchronous read job is started on a positive edge at input RD. As long as the job is
active, the BSY flag is set. The number of cycles for a parameter access is dependent on the
system utilization and can vary from job to job. During an active read job, any additional positive
edges at input RD are ignored.
Output Q = 1 indicates that the parameter has been read successfully and the value is available
at output Y. Y holds its value until a new value has been read. If an error occurs during an
access, this is signaled with QF = 1. Output Y retains its last value.
For error diagnostics, the error code ERC can be evaluated. ERC corresponds to the error
code for parameter accesses according to PROVIdrive DPV1. The possible error codes can
be found in Appendix A.2 of this document or in the SINAMICS Function Manual FH1 in Section
PROFIBUS DP / PROFINET IO Communication and there in the Subsection Communication
according to PROFIdrive → Acyclic communication → Configuration of the jobs and responses
in Table Error values in DPV1 parameter responses.
ERC is only valid as long as QF = 1.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

258 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.9 RDP_UD

Time diagram

5'

%6<

4)

5HDGMRELV
QRWUHVWDUWHG

Quantity framework
Any number of asynchronous jobs of different block instances can be issued in parallel. Each
block instance can only process one job.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
PAR Parameter number 0 0..216
IDX Parameter index 0 0..216
RD Start read job 0 0/1
Y Parameter value 0 UDINT
BSY Read job is active 0 0/1
Q Read job is successful 0 0/1
QF Error 0 0/1
ERC Error code 16#0000 WORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 259
System
6.9 RDP_UD

Can be loaded on‐ No

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

260 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.10 RDP_UI

6.10 RDP_UI
Reads drive parameters (UNSIGNED INTEGER type)

Symbol

RDP_UI
3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU ', 3$5 < 8, 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH
3DUDPHWHULQGH[ ', ,'; %6< %2 5HDGMRELVDFWLYH
6WDUWUHDGMRE %2 5' 4 %2 5HDGMRELVVXFFHVVIXO
4) %2 (UURU
(5& : (UURUFRGH

Brief description
RDP_UI (Read Parameter) enables the asynchronous reading of drive parameters of the
UNSIGNED INTEGER type on the local drive object.

Method of operation
The parameter number and the index of the parameter to be read must be specified at inputs
PAR and IDX, respectively. If a parameter is not indexed, IDX = 0 must be set. The parameter
is always read on the drive object on which the chart with the block is calculated. It is not
possible to access parameters on several drive objects.
The asynchronous read job is started on a positive edge at input RD. As long as the job is
active, the BSY flag is set. The number of cycles for a parameter access is dependent on the
system utilization and can vary from job to job. During an active read job, any additional positive
edges at input RD are ignored.
Output Q = 1 indicates that the parameter has been read successfully and the value is available
at output Y. Y holds its value until a new value has been read. If an error occurs during an
access, this is signaled with QF = 1. Output Y retains its last value.
For error diagnostics, the error code ERC can be evaluated. ERC corresponds to the error
code for parameter accesses according to PROVIdrive DPV1. The possible error codes can
be found in Appendix A.2 of this document or in the SINAMICS Function Manual FH1 in Section
PROFIBUS DP / PROFINET IO Communication and there in the Subsection Communication
according to PROFIdrive → Acyclic communication → Configuration of the jobs and responses
in Table Error values in DPV1 parameter responses.
ERC is only valid as long as QF = 1.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 261
System
6.10 RDP_UI

Time diagram

5'

%6<

4)

5HDGMRELV
QRWUHVWDUWHG

Quantity framework
Any number of asynchronous jobs of different block instances can be issued in parallel. Each
block instance can only process one job.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
PAR Parameter number 0 0..216
IDX Parameter index 0 0..216
RD Start read job 0 0/1
Y Parameter value 0 UINT
BSY Read job is active 0 0/1
Q Read job is successful 0 0/1
QF Error 0 0/1
ERC Error code 16#0000 WORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

262 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.10 RDP_UI

Can be loaded on‐ No

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 263
System
6.11 RDP_US

6.11 RDP_US
Reads drive parameters (UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER type)

Symbol

RDP_US
3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU ', 3$5 < 86 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH
3DUDPHWHULQGH[ ', ,'; %6< %2 5HDGMRELVDFWLYH
6WDUWUHDGMRE %2 5' 4 %2 5HDGMRELVVXFFHVVIXO
4) %2 (UURU
(5& : (UURUFRGH

Brief description
RDP_US (Read Parameter) enables the asynchronous reading of drive parameters of the
UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER type on the local drive object.

Method of operation
The parameter number and the index of the parameter to be read must be specified at inputs
PAR and IDX, respectively. If a parameter is not indexed, IDX = 0 must be set. The parameter
is always read on the drive object on which the chart with the block is calculated. It is not
possible to access parameters on several drive objects.
The asynchronous read job is started on a positive edge at input RD. As long as the job is
active, the BSY flag is set. The number of cycles for a parameter access is dependent on the
system utilization and can vary from job to job. During an active read job, any additional positive
edges at input RD are ignored.
Output Q = 1 indicates that the parameter has been read successfully and the value is available
at output Y. Y holds its value until a new value has been read. If an error occurs during an
access, this is signaled with QF = 1. Output Y retains its last value.
For error diagnostics, the error code ERC can be evaluated. ERC corresponds to the error
code for parameter accesses according to PROVIdrive DPV1. The possible error codes can
be found in Appendix A.2 of this document or in the SINAMICS Function Manual FH1 in Section
PROFIBUS DP / PROFINET IO Communication and there in the Subsection Communication
according to PROFIdrive → Acyclic communication → Configuration of the jobs and responses
in Table Error values in DPV1 parameter responses.
ERC is only valid as long as QF = 1.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

264 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.11 RDP_US

Time diagram

5'

%6<

4)

5HDGMRELV
QRWUHVWDUWHG

Quantity framework
Any number of asynchronous jobs of different block instances can be issued in parallel. Each
block instance can only process one job.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
PAR Parameter number 0 0..216
IDX Parameter index 0 0..216
RD Start read job 0 0/1
Y Parameter value 0 USINT
BSY Read job is active 0 0/1
Q Read job is successful 0 0/1
QF Error 0 0/1
ERC Error code 16#0000 WORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 265
System
6.11 RDP_US

Can be loaded on‐ No

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

266 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.12 RMDP

6.12 RMDP
Reads drive parameters from the controller

Symbol

RMDP
/RJLFDOVWDUWDGGUHVVDV , ,27< %6< %2 5HDGMREDFWLYHPHVVDJH
LQSXWRXWSXW 4 %2 5HDGMREH[HFXWHGVXFFHVVIXOO\
/RJLFDOVWDUWDGGUHVVRIWKH ', /$'5 PHVVDJH
GULYH 4) %2 (UURU
,'RIWKHGULYHREMHFWIRU 8' '2,' (5& ', 5HWXUQVWDWXVRIWKHHQWLUHMRE
GLUHFWDGGUHVVLQJ < (UURUPHVVDJHW\SH
1XPEHURISDUDPHWHUV ; YDOXHVSHFLILHGIRUHDFK
SDUDPHWHUQXPEHUVDQGLQGLFHV SDUDPHWHU
WREHUHDG
6WDUWUHDGLQJ %2 5'
$ERUWRIWKHDFWLYHMRE %2 $%57

Brief description
The RMDP block enables up to 39 SINAMICS parameters to be read from the DCC SIMOTION
program. Only SINAMICS drives are supported. For error diagnostics, the error code ERC can
be evaluated. ERC corresponds to the error code for parameter accesses according to
PROVIdrive DPV1. The possible error codes can be found in Appendix A.2 of this document
or in the SIMOTION Communication System Manual in Section PROFIdrive and there in the
Subsection Acyclic communication (Base Mode Parameter Access) → Error evaluation in table
Error codes in Base Mode Parameter Access responses.
The RMDP block is available as of SIMOTION V4.2.

Method of operation
First the block inputs for addressing the drive are entered as well as the selection of the
parameters to be read. The asynchronous read job is started by the positive edge at input RD.
As long as the job is active, the BSY flag is set. The number of cycles for a parameter access
is dependent on the system utilization and communication load and can vary from job to job.
During an active read job, any additional positive edges at input RD are ignored. The actual
reading/writing of the parameters is not performed in the DCC task. The block instance only
controls the communication command. The results of the read/write job must be polled at the
block outputs in the following task cycles. The evaluation is performed via global variables or
user-defined block types. Output Q = 1 indicates that the parameters have been read
successfully and the values are available at output Y. Y retains its value until a new job has
been completed successfully. If an error occurs during an access, this is signaled with QF =
1. Output Y retains its last value. For error diagnostics, the error code ERC can be evaluated.
If the entire job is successful (output Q=1) and individual jobs are not successful (ERC not
equal to 0), the values that are read from the drive are displayed. The other parameters with
ERC = 0 have been read error-free.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 267
System
6.12 RMDP

The error status of the individual read jobs can be evaluated on the parameter-specific return
value PRES. An active job is aborted with the positive edge on the ABRT input. The ABRT
signal must have the value 1 for at least one cycle.

Time diagram

5'

%6<

4)

5HDGMRELV
QRWUHVWDUWHG

Brief description
The block enables up to 39 SINAMICS parameters to be read.
Data set 47 is always read out for PROFIBUS (external or integrated) irrespective of whether
the function is called with a valid (0>=doId<=254) or invalid 'doId' (doId=255).
Two data sets are available for PROFINET:
● Base Mode Parameter Access - local (data set 0xB02E)
● Base Mode Parameter Access - global (data set 0xB02F)
Data set 0xB02E is used for SIMOTION if either no 'dold' or an invalid 'dold' (dold=255) is
specified in the function. Access to the appropriate DO is then performed via the Parameter
Access Point (PAP). Either the PAP address can be specified directly or the log. address of
the cyclic data (e.g. 256 for a DO axis) can be specified. SIMOTION then determines the
corresponding PAP from this address before accessing the correct address. PAP must always
be at subslot 1 (HW Config configuration).
Data set 0xB02F is used if a valid 'dold' (0>=doId<=254) is entered. Any valid PAP or address
can be specified because the assignment is only performed via the 'doId'.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

268 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.12 RMDP

Description of the block inputs

'IOTY' input/output assignment of the logical start address of the drive.
With 198: INPUT, the logical address of the drive is in the input range.
With 199: OUTPUT, the logical address of the drive is in the output range.
Diagnostic addresses are always of type INPUT.
'LADR': Specification of the logical start address of the drive. If the optional parameter DOID
is also used, any arbitrary address of the station (preferably the diagnostics address of the
station) can be specified.
With PROFINET, parameter access is via the Parameter Access Point (PAP) of a drive object.
As an alternative to the logical start address of the drive, specification of the diagnostic address
of the associated PAP is recommended.
'DOID': For the direct addressing of a drive object. The DOID can be unspecified or specified
as invalid (>254) under the following conditions:
● Access via the DOID is not supported by the DP slave / IO device (P978 is not implemented).
● Data set 0xB02F is not supported (PROFINET only).
● Access is to be via the parameter access point of a DO (PROFINET only).
'X': The parameters to be read are specified under input X.
'X.NUMP': Number of parameters to be read.
'X.PAR[].NUM': Specifies the parameter numbers from which the values are to be read.
'X.PAR[].IDX': Parameter index; for indexed values, 0 means index 0. For non-indexed values,
parameter index 0 must be specified.
'RD': Start read job
'ABRT': Abort active job

Description of the block inputs

'Q': Job completed without errors.
'QF': Job completed with errors.
'ERC': Corresponds to the values of the return value 'functionResult' of the
_readDriveMultiParameter function.
'Y': Description of the parameter values. An error code, the data type and the value are read
out for each parameter. Further information on the return value parameterResult can be found
in the SIMOTION List Manual System Functions/Variables Devices → System Functions -
Devices 1 → _readDriveMultiParameterDescription
'Y[].PRES': Corresponds to the parameter-specific return value. Coding corresponds to the
return parameter parameterResult of the _readDriveMultiParameter ST function. Further
information on the return parameter parameterResult can be found in the SIMOTION List
Manual System Functions/Variables Devices → System Functions - Devices 1 →
_readDriveMultiParameterDescription
'Y[].DTYP': Returns the data type of the parameter (for the coding, see PROFIdrive profile).
'Y[].VAL': Parameter values read from the drive; the data type results from the returned data
type. A conversion block must be called for different data types. When accessing REAL
parameters, the conversion is performed via the conversion block DW_R.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 269
System
6.12 RMDP

Parameterization example
In order to be able to write certain parameters of a drive object (in the example: SERVO_03),
proceed as follows:
First set the correct telegram configuration.

Then set the desired DO address in the RMDP block. To do this, set the block input 'LADR' to
the address (260) set in the telegram and the block input 'DOID' to the number (3) set in the
telegram.

Select the parameters to be read at block input 'X', e.g. r37(2) power unit temperatures, rectifier
maximum value in the expert list.

To do this, double-click block input 'X', select the first structure element and enter the parameter
number (37) at 'num' and the index (2) at 'idx'.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

270 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.12 RMDP

Then set the block input 'RD' to 1 to start the reading.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 271
System
6.12 RMDP

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attributes

IOTY Logical start address as input/ 0 0: Invalid
output 198: Input ad‐
dress
199: Output ad‐
dress
LADR Logical start address of the drive -1 DINT
DOID ID of the drive object for direct addressing 255 0 .. 254, 255: In‐
valid
X Number of parameters, parameter
numbers and indices to be read
X.NUMP Number of parameters to be read 1 1..39
X.PAR Description of a parameter
X.PAR[].NUM Parameter number 1 1..65535
X.PAR[].IDX Parameter index 0 0..65535
RD Start reading 0 0/1
ABRT Abort of the active job 0 0/1
BSY Read job active message 0 0/1
Q Read job executed successfully message 0 0/1
QF Error 0 0/1
ERC Return status of the entire job 16#0000 DWORD
Y Error message, type, value specified for
each parameter
Y[].PRES Parameter-specific return value 0 DINT
Y[].DTYP Data type of the read parameter 0 USINT
Y[].VAL Parameter value read from the drive 0 DWORD

Description of the DCC standard blocks

272 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.12 RMDP

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓ (as of V4.2)

SINAMICS -
Can be loaded on‐ No
line
Process context Cyclic, equidistant
Special character‐ -
istics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 273
System
6.13 SAH

6.13 SAH
Sample & hold (REAL type)

Symbol

SAH
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
&\FOHFORFNUDWLR ', &5

Brief description
Sample & hold block for equidistant value transfer (REAL type) between blocks with different
scanning procedures.

Method of operation
The value of the input variable X is taken over in the output variable Y in every CR cycle. The
value transfer cycle clock is synchronized with the cycle control point of the execution system.
The cycle control point defines the cycle clock in which all sampling times of the execution
system are restarted.
A value transfer takes place every CR cycle clock relative to the cycle control point. The
absolute value of CR is always generated for the cycle clock ratio. In the special case of CR
= 0, the block behaves as for CR = 1. The block must always be configured in the faster
sampling time. If the value from the slower scan time is transferred, it should be at the very
beginning of the run sequence. If the value is to taken from the faster into the slower sampling
time, the block should be computed last in the execution sequence.
The following figure shows the transfer of values from a 1 ms level to a 3 ms level. The time
diagram is shown for the calculation of the execution group.

PV
&5= =
PV

Description of the DCC standard blocks

274 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.13 SAH

VDKVKRXOGEHDW
WKHEDFNRIWKHUXQVHTXHQFH

7
IDVW PV

9DOXHDFFHSWDQFH

7
VORZ PV

The following figure shows the transfer of values from a 3 ms level to a 1 ms level. The time
diagram is shown for the calculation of the execution group.

PV
&5= =
PV

VDKVKRXOGEHDW
WKHIURQWRIWKHUXQVHTXHQFH

7
IDVW PV

9DOXHDFFHSWDQFH

7
VORZ PV

If the slower scan time is not a multiple of the faster scan time, the value can only be transferred
consistently if both scanning procedures are restarted synchronously after CR cycles. This
corresponds to the least common multiple of both scan times. CR is then calculated as follows:

J(7IDVW7VORZ )
&5=
7IDVW

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 275
System
6.13 SAH

g(Tfast,Tslow): least common multiple

The following shows the value transfer for Tfast = 3 ms and Tslow = 4 ms. The value transfer is
made in both directions.

J(PVPV ) PV
&5= = =
PV PV

7
IDVW PV

          PV

7
VORZ PV

       PV

To enable values to be transferred at an optimal speed, it is recommended that the slower

scan time is always a multiple of the faster scan time.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
CR Cycle clock ratio 1 0 - (231-1)
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

276 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.14 SAH_B

6.14 SAH_B
Sample & hold (BOOL type)

Symbol

SAH_B
,QSXWYDULDEOH %2 , 4 %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
&\FOHFORFNUDWLR ', &5

Brief description
Sample & hold block for equidistant value transfer (BOOL type) between blocks with different
scanning procedures.

Method of operation
The value of the input variable I is taken over in the output variable Q in every CR cycle. The
value transfer cycle clock is synchronized with the cycle control point of the execution system.
The cycle control point defines the cycle clock in which all sampling times of the execution
system are restarted.
A value transfer takes place every CR cycle clock relative to the cycle control point. The
absolute value of CR is always generated for the cycle clock ratio. In the special case of CR
= 0, the block behaves as for CR = 1. The block must always be configured in the faster
sampling time. If the value from the slower scan time is transferred, it should be at the very
beginning of the run sequence. If the value is to taken from the faster into the slower sampling
time, the block should be computed last in the execution sequence.
The following figure shows the transfer of values from a 1 ms level to a 3 ms level. The time
diagram is shown for the calculation of the execution group.

PV
&5= =
PV

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 277
System
6.14 SAH_B

VDKVKRXOGEHDW
WKHEDFNRIWKHUXQVHTXHQFH

7
IDVW PV

9DOXHDFFHSWDQFH

7
VORZ PV

The following figure shows the transfer of values from a 3 ms level to a 1 ms level. The time
diagram is shown for the calculation of the execution group.

PV
&5= =
PV

VDKVKRXOGEHDW
WKHIURQWRIWKHUXQVHTXHQFH

7
IDVW PV

9DOXHDFFHSWDQFH

7
VORZ PV

If the slower scan time is not a multiple of the faster scan time, the value can only be transferred
consistently if both scanning procedures are restarted synchronously after CR cycles. This
corresponds to the least common multiple of both scan times. CR is then calculated as follows:

J(7IDVW7VORZ )
&5=
7IDVW

Description of the DCC standard blocks

278 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.14 SAH_B

g(Tfast,Tslow): least common multiple

The following shows the value transfer for Tfast = 3 ms and Tslow = 4 ms. The value transfer is
made in both directions.

J(PVPV ) PV
&5= = =
PV PV

7
IDVW PV

          PV

7
VORZ PV

       PV

To enable values to be transferred at an optimal speed, it is recommended that the slower

scan time is always a multiple of the faster scan time.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
I Input variable 0 0/1
CR Cycle clock ratio 1 0 - (231-1)
Q Output variable 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 279
System
6.15 SAH_BY

6.15 SAH_BY
Sample & hold (BYTE type)

Symbol

SAH_BY
,QSXWYDULDEOH %< ,6 46 %< 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
&\FOHFORFNUDWLR ', &5

Brief description
Sample & hold block for the equidistant value transfer (BYTE type) between blocks with
different sampling times.

Method of operation
The value of the input variable IS is taken over in the output variable QS in every CR cycle.
The value transfer cycle clock is synchronized with the cycle control point of the execution
system. The cycle control point defines the cycle clock in which all sampling times of the
execution system are restarted.
A value transfer takes place every CR cycle clock relative to the cycle control point. The
absolute value of CR is always generated for the cycle clock ratio. In the special case of CR
= 0, the block behaves as for CR = 1. The block must always be configured in the faster
sampling time. If the value from the slower scan time is transferred, it should be at the very
beginning of the run sequence. If the value is to taken from the faster into the slower sampling
time, the block should be computed last in the execution sequence.
The following figure shows the transfer of values from a 1 ms level to a 3 ms level. The time
diagram is shown for the calculation of the execution group.

PV
&5= =
PV

Description of the DCC standard blocks

280 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.15 SAH_BY

VDKVKRXOGEHDW
WKHEDFNRIWKHUXQVHTXHQFH

7
IDVW PV

9DOXHDFFHSWDQFH

7
VORZ PV

The following figure shows the transfer of values from a 3 ms level to a 1 ms level. The time
diagram is shown for the calculation of the execution group.

PV
&5= =
PV

VDKVKRXOGEHDW
WKHIURQWRIWKHUXQVHTXHQFH

7
IDVW PV

9DOXHDFFHSWDQFH

7
VORZ PV

If the slower scan time is not a multiple of the faster scan time, the value can only be transferred
consistently if both scanning procedures are restarted synchronously after CR cycles. This
corresponds to the least common multiple of both scan times. CR is then calculated as follows:

J(7IDVW7VORZ )
&5=
7IDVW

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 281
System
6.15 SAH_BY

g(Tfast,Tslow): least common multiple

The following figure shows the value transfer for Tfast = 3 ms and Tslow = 4 ms. The value transfer
is made in both directions.

J(PVPV ) PV
&5= = =
PV PV

7
IDVW PV

          PV

7
VORZ PV

       PV

To enable values to be transferred at an optimal speed, it is recommended that the slower

scan time is always a multiple of the faster scan time.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
IS Input variable 16#00 BYTE
CR Cycle clock ratio 1 0 - (231-1)
QS Output variable 16#00 BYTE

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

282 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.16 SAH_D

6.16 SAH_D
Sample & hold (DOUBLE INTEGER type)

Symbol

SAH_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
&\FOHFORFNUDWLR ', &5

Brief description
Sample & hold block for equidistant value transfer (DOUBLE INTEGER type) between blocks
with different scanning procedures.

Method of operation
The value of the input variable X is taken over in the output variable Y in every CR cycle. The
value transfer cycle clock is synchronized with the cycle control point of the execution system.
The cycle control point defines the cycle clock in which all sampling times of the execution
system are restarted.
A value transfer takes place every CR cycle clock relative to the cycle control point. The
absolute value of CR is always generated for the cycle clock ratio. In the special case of CR
= 0, the block behaves as for CR = 1. The block must always be configured in the faster
sampling time. If the value from the slower scan time is transferred, it should be at the very
beginning of the run sequence. If the value is to taken from the faster into the slower sampling
time, the block should be computed last in the execution sequence.
The following figure shows the transfer of values from a 1 ms level to a 3 ms level. The time
diagram is shown for the calculation of the execution group.

PV
&5= =
PV

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 283
System
6.16 SAH_D

VDKVKRXOGEHDW
WKHEDFNRIWKHUXQVHTXHQFH

7
IDVW PV

9DOXHDFFHSWDQFH

7
VORZ PV

The following figure shows the transfer of values from a 3 ms level to a 1 ms level. The time
diagram is shown for the calculation of the execution group.

PV
&5= =
PV

VDKVKRXOGEHDW
WKHIURQWRIWKHUXQVHTXHQFH

7
IDVW PV

9DOXHDFFHSWDQFH

7
VORZ PV

If the slower scan time is not a multiple of the faster scan time, the value can only be transferred
consistently if both scanning procedures are restarted synchronously after CR cycles. This
corresponds to the least common multiple of both scan times. CR is then calculated as follows:

J(7IDVW7VORZ )
&5=
7IDVW

Description of the DCC standard blocks

284 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.16 SAH_D

g(Tfast,Tslow): least common multiple

The following figure shows the value transfer for Tfast = 3 ms and Tslow = 4 ms. The value transfer
is made in both directions.

J(PVPV ) PV
&5= = =
PV PV

7
IDVW PV

          PV

7
VORZ PV

       PV

To enable values to be transferred at an optimal speed, it is recommended that the slower

scan time is always a multiple of the faster scan time.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 DINT
CR Cycle clock ratio 1 0 - (231-1)
Y Output variable 0 DINT

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 285
System
6.17 SAH_I

6.17 SAH_I
Sample & hold (INTEGER type)

Symbol

SAH_I
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
&\FOHFORFNUDWLR ', &5

Brief description
Sample & hold block for the equidistant value transfer (INTEGER type) between blocks with
different sampling times.

Method of operation
The value of the input variable X is taken over in the output variable Y in every CR cycle. The
value transfer cycle clock is synchronized with the cycle control point of the execution system.
The cycle control point defines the cycle clock in which all sampling times of the execution
system are restarted.
A value transfer takes place every CR cycle clock relative to the cycle control point. The
absolute value of CR is always generated for the cycle clock ratio. In the special case of CR
= 0, the block behaves as for CR = 1. The block must always be configured in the faster
sampling time. If the value from the slower scan time is transferred, it should be at the very
beginning of the run sequence. If the value is to taken from the faster into the slower sampling
time, the block should be computed last in the execution sequence.
The following figure shows the transfer of values from a 1 ms level to a 3 ms level. The time
diagram is shown for the calculation of the execution group.

PV
&5= =
PV

Description of the DCC standard blocks

286 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.17 SAH_I

VDKVKRXOGEHDW
WKHEDFNRIWKHUXQVHTXHQFH

7
IDVW PV

9DOXHDFFHSWDQFH

7
VORZ PV

The following figure shows the transfer of values from a 3 ms level to a 1 ms level. The time
diagram is shown for the calculation of the execution group.

PV
&5= =
PV

VDKVKRXOGEHDW
WKHIURQWRIWKHUXQVHTXHQFH

7
IDVW PV

9DOXHDFFHSWDQFH

7
VORZ PV

If the slower scan time is not a multiple of the faster scan time, the value can only be transferred
consistently if both scanning procedures are restarted synchronously after CR cycles. This
corresponds to the least common multiple of both scan times. CR is then calculated as follows:

J(7IDVW7VORZ )
&5=
7IDVW

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 287
System
6.17 SAH_I

g(Tfast,Tslow): least common multiple

The following figure shows the value transfer for Tfast = 3 ms and Tslow = 4 ms. The value transfer
is made in both directions.

J(PVPV ) PV
&5= = =
PV PV

7
IDVW PV

          PV

7
VORZ PV

       PV

To enable values to be transferred at an optimal speed, it is recommended that the slower

scan time is always a multiple of the faster scan time.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 INT
CR Cycle clock ratio 1 0 - (231-1)
Y Output variable 0 INT

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

288 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.18 SAV

6.18 SAV
Value buffering (REAL type)

Symbol

SAV
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
2SHUDWLQJPRGH %2 0 9/' %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOHYDOLG
4) %2 1RUHWHQWLYHPHPRU\

Brief description
SAV (Save) enables retentive storage of a REAL-type input variable.

Method of operation
The block is a retentive read/write memory for a REAL value.
The saved value of a SAV block is not retained when:
● The retentive memory on the target device has been cleared through a user action.
● The chart on which the block was configured, has been deleted and the change transferred
to the target device.
● The block has been deleted and the change transferred to the target system.
● The instance name of a block has been changed and transferred to the target system.
The value is retained when:
● The instance name does not change during a download.
● The target device ramps up without configuration data on the memory card. The memory
of the missing SAV blocks is only released after a download. In this way, the data is also
retained when the firmware is updated.
● Another SAV block has been added or removed.
● A download of the configuration is performed after an update of the DCBLIB.
● Another DO has been added or removed and downloaded to the target device.
● Another chart has been added or removed and downloaded to the target device.
● The target device ramps up with the same configuration as before the power failure.
The block is only active when a 0 on output QF indicates that retentive memory space is
available on the target device for storing the input values.
The block mode is set at input M:

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 289
System
6.18 SAV

Write mode (M =1)

● Input variable X is written cyclically to output Y.
● In addition, input variable X is transferred to the system for retentive storage. In so doing,
an already saved value is overwritten.

Read mode (M = 0)
● The current saved value is output at output Y. The values at input X are not saved.
● Output VLD = 1 indicates the validity of Y. If the retentive memory of the system was
recreated when the block is initialized, VLD = 0. In this case, Y is invalid and contains its
default value. The status of VLD changes to 1 the first time a value is written (M = 1).

Initialization
The assignment between the SAV block and the value in the retentive memory is performed
via the instance name of the block. The unique instance name is automatically generated by
the DCC editor when the block is inserted in a chart. The instance name is made up of the call
path of the block as follows:
(Chart name)/(Name of subchart 1)/(Name of subchart 2)/../(Name of the block)
The instance name could look like this:
DCC_1/CFC1/CFC2/CFC3/SAV1

Chart name DCC_1

Name of subchart 1 CFC1
Name of subchart 2 CFC2
Name of subchart 3 CFC3
Name of the block SAV1

This instance name controls whether output Y is initialized with its default value or outputs the
last saved value in the INIT mode. A check is made on the target device whether a retentive
value has been saved for this instance name of the block. If this is not the case, the system
recreates the memory space, the default value of output variable Y is transferred to the system
for retentive storage and VLD is set to 0. If a retentive value has been saved for the instance
name, it is read and written to output Y and status VLD = 1 is output.
If no retentive memory is available for the block, output QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
M Operating mode 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL
VLD Output variable valid 0 0/1
QF No retentive memory 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

290 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.18 SAV

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ No
line
Special characteris‐ A maximum of ten blocks can be used for the retentive storage (SAV, SAV_BY,
tics SAV_I, SAV_D) for each SINAMICS or SINAMICS INTEGRATED drive unit. Re‐
tentive memory is available for a maximum of 40 bytes of user data. As of
STARTER/SCOUT V4.2, the number of blocks is only checked in the consistency
check (menu "Project -> Check consistency" or "Check consistency" in the short‐
cut menu of the drive unit).

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 291
System
6.19 SAV_BY

6.19 SAV_BY
Value buffering (BYTE type)

Symbol

SAV_BY
,QSXWYDULDEOH %< ,6 46 %< 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
2SHUDWLQJPRGH %2 0 9/' %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOHYDOLG
4) %2 1RUHWHQWLYHPHPRU\

Brief description
SAV_BY (Save) enables retentive storage of a BYTE-type input variable.

Method of operation
The block is a retentive read/write memory for a BYTE value.
The saved value of a SAV block is not retained when:
● The retentive memory on the target device has been cleared through a user action.
● The chart on which the block was configured, has been deleted and the change transferred
to the target device.
● The block has been deleted and the change transferred to the target system.
● The instance name of a block has been changed and transferred to the target system.
The value is retained when:
● The instance name does not change during a download.
● The target device ramps up without configuration data on the memory card. The memory
of the missing SAV blocks is only released after a download. In this way, the data is also
retained when the firmware is updated.
● Another SAV block has been added or removed.
● A download of the configuration is performed after an update of the DCBLIB.
● Another DO has been added or removed and downloaded to the target device.
● Another chart has been added or removed and downloaded to the target device.
● The target device ramps up with the same configuration as before the power failure.
The block is only active when a 0 on output QF indicates that retentive memory space is
available on the target device for storing the input values.
The block mode is set at input M:

Description of the DCC standard blocks

292 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.19 SAV_BY

Write mode (M =1)

● Input variable IS is written cyclically to output QS.
● Input variable IS is also transferred to the system for retentive storage. In so doing, an
already saved value is overwritten.

Read mode (M = 0)
● The currently saved value is output at output QS. The values at input IS are not saved
● Output VLD = 1 displays the validity of QS. If the retentive memory of the system was
recreated when the block is initialized, VLD = 0. In this case, QS is invalid and contains its
default value. The status of VLD changes to 1 the first time a value is written (M = 1).

Initialization
The assignment between the SAV block and the value in the retentive memory is performed
via the instance name of the block. The unique instance name is automatically generated by
the DCC editor when the block is inserted in a chart. The instance name is made up of the call
path of the block as follows:
(Chart name)/(Name of subchart 1)/(Name of subchart 2)/../(Name of the block)
The instance name could look like this:
DCC_1/CFC1/CFC2/CFC3/SAV1

Chart name DCC_1

Name of subchart 1 CFC1
Name of subchart 2 CFC2
Name of subchart 3 CFC3
Name of the block SAV1

This instance name controls whether output QS is initialized with its default value or outputs
the last saved value in the INIT mode. A check is made on the target device whether a retentive
value has been saved for this instance name of the block. If not, the memory space is recreated
by the system, the default value of the output variable QS transferred to the system for retentive
storage, and VLD = 0 set. If a retentive value has been saved for the instance name, this is
read, written to output QS, and the status VLD = 1 output.
If no retentive memory is available for the block, output QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
IS Input variable 16#00 BYTE
M Operating mode 0 0/1
QS Output variable 16#00 BYTE
VLD Output variable valid 0 0/1
QF No retentive memory 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 293
System
6.19 SAV_BY

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ No
line
Special characteris‐ A maximum of ten blocks can be used for the retentive storage (SAV, SAV_BY,
tics SAV_I, SAV_D) for each SINAMICS or SINAMICS INTEGRATED drive unit. Re‐
tentive memory is available for a maximum of 40 bytes of user data. As of
STARTER/SCOUT V4.2, the number of blocks is only checked in the consistency
check (menu "Project -> Check consistency" or "Check consistency" in the short‐
cut menu of the drive unit).

Description of the DCC standard blocks

294 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.20 SAV_D

6.20 SAV_D
Value buffering (DOUBLE INTEGER type)

Symbol

SAV_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
2SHUDWLQJPRGH %2 0 9/' %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOHYDOLG
4) %2 1RUHWHQWLYHPHPRU\

Brief description
SAV_D (Save) enables retentive storage of a DOUBLE INTEGER-type input variable.

Method of operation
The block is a retentive read/write memory for a DOUBLE INTEGER value.
The saved value of a SAV block is not retained when:
● The retentive memory on the target device has been cleared through a user action.
● The chart on which the block was configured, has been deleted and the change transferred
to the target device.
● The block has been deleted and the change transferred to the target system.
● The instance name of a block has been changed and transferred to the target system.
The value is retained when:
● The instance name does not change during a download.
● The target device ramps up without configuration data on the memory card. The memory
of the missing SAV blocks is only released after a download. In this way, the data is also
retained when the firmware is updated.
● Another SAV block has been added or removed.
● A download of the configuration is performed after an update of the DCBLIB.
● Another DO has been added or removed and downloaded to the target device.
● Another chart has been added or removed and downloaded to the target device.
● The target device ramps up with the same configuration as before the power failure.
The block is only active when a 0 on output QF indicates that retentive memory space is
available on the target device for storing the input values.
The block mode is set at input M:

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 295
System
6.20 SAV_D

Write mode (M =1)

● Input variable X is written cyclically to output Y.
● In addition, input variable X is transferred to the system for retentive storage. In so doing,
an already saved value is overwritten.

Read mode (M = 0)
● The current saved value is output at output Y. The values at input X are not saved.
● Output VLD = 1 indicates the validity of Y. If the retentive memory of the system was
recreated when the block is initialized, VLD = 0. In this case, Y is invalid and contains its
default value. The status of VLD changes to 1 the first time a value is written (M = 1).

Initialization
The assignment between the SAV block and the value in the retentive memory is performed
via the instance name of the block. The unique instance name is automatically generated by
the DCC editor when the block is inserted in a chart. The instance name is made up of the call
path of the block as follows:
(Chart name)/(Name of subchart 1)/(Name of subchart 2)/../(Name of the block)
The instance name could look like this:
DCC_1/CFC1/CFC2/CFC3/SAV1

Chart name DCC_1

Name of subchart 1 CFC1
Name of subchart 2 CFC2
Name of subchart 3 CFC3
Name of the block SAV1

This instance name controls whether output Y is initialized with its default value or outputs the
last saved value in the INIT mode. A check is made on the target device whether a retentive
value has been saved for this instance name of the block. If this is not the case, the system
recreates the memory space, the default value of output variable Y is transferred to the system
for retentive storage and VLD is set to 0. If a retentive value has been saved for the instance
name, it is read and written to output Y and status VLD = 1 is output.
If no retentive memory is available for the block, output QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 DINT
M Operating mode 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0 DINT
VLD Output variable valid 0 0/1
QF No retentive memory 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

296 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.20 SAV_D

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ No
line
Special characteris‐ A maximum of ten blocks can be used for the retentive storage (SAV, SAV_BY,
tics SAV_I, SAV_D) for each SINAMICS or SINAMICS INTEGRATED drive unit. Re‐
tentive memory is available for a maximum of 40 bytes of user data. As of
STARTER/SCOUT V4.2, the number of blocks is only checked in the consistency
check (menu "Project -> Check consistency" or "Check consistency" in the short‐
cut menu of the drive unit).

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 297
System
6.21 SAV_I

6.21 SAV_I
Value buffering (INTEGER type)

Symbol

SAV_I
,QSXWYDULDEOH , ; < , 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
2SHUDWLQJPRGH %2 0 9/' %2 2XWSXWYDULDEOHYDOLG
4) %2 1RUHWHQWLYHPHPRU\

Brief description
SAV_I (Save) enables retentive storage of an INTEGER-type input variable.

Method of operation
The block is a retentive read/write memory for an INTEGER value.
The saved value of a SAV block is not retained when:
● The retentive memory on the target device has been cleared through a user action.
● The chart on which the block was configured, has been deleted and the change transferred
to the target device.
● The block has been deleted and the change transferred to the target system.
● The instance name of a block has been changed and transferred to the target system.
The value is retained when:
● The instance name does not change during a download.
● The target device ramps up without configuration data on the memory card. The memory
of the missing SAV blocks is only released after a download. In this way, the data is also
retained when the firmware is updated.
● Another SAV block has been added or removed.
● A download of the configuration is performed after an update of the DCBLIB.
● Another DO has been added or removed and downloaded to the target device.
● Another chart has been added or removed and downloaded to the target device.
● The target device ramps up with the same configuration as before the power failure.
The block is only active when a 0 on output QF indicates that retentive memory space is
available on the target device for storing the input values.
The block mode is set at input M:

Description of the DCC standard blocks

298 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.21 SAV_I

Write mode (M =1)

● Input variable X is written cyclically to output Y.
● In addition, input variable X is transferred to the system for retentive storage. In so doing,
an already saved value is overwritten.

Read mode (M = 0)
● The current saved value is output at output Y. The values at input X are not saved.
● Output VLD = 1 indicates the validity of Y. If the retentive memory of the system was
recreated when the block is initialized, VLD = 0. In this case, Y is invalid and contains its
default value. The status of VLD changes to 1 the first time a value is written (M = 1).

Initialization
The assignment between the SAV block and the value in the retentive memory is performed
via the instance name of the block. The unique instance name is automatically generated by
the DCC editor when the block is inserted in a chart. The instance name is made up of the call
path of the block as follows:
(Chart name)/(Name of subchart 1)/(Name of subchart 2)/../(Name of the block)
The instance name could look like this:
DCC_1/CFC1/CFC2/CFC3/SAV1

Chart name DCC_1

Name of subchart 1 CFC1
Name of subchart 2 CFC2
Name of subchart 3 CFC3
Name of the block SAV1

This instance name controls whether output Y is initialized with its default value or outputs the
last saved value in the INIT mode. A check is made on the target device whether a retentive
value has been saved for this instance name of the block. If this is not the case, the system
recreates the memory space, the default value of output variable Y is transferred to the system
for retentive storage and VLD is set to 0. If a retentive value has been saved for the instance
name, it is read and written to output Y and status VLD = 1 is output.
If no retentive memory is available for the block, output QF = 1 is set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 INT
M Operating mode 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0 INT
VLD Output variable valid 0 0/1
QF No retentive memory 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 299
System
6.21 SAV_I

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ No
line
Special characteris‐ A maximum of ten blocks can be used for the retentive storage (SAV, SAV_BY,
tics SAV_I, SAV_D) for each SINAMICS or SINAMICS INTEGRATED drive unit. Re‐
tentive memory is available for a maximum of 40 bytes of user data. As of
STARTER/SCOUT V4.2, the number of blocks is only checked in the consistency
check (menu "Project -> Check consistency" or "Check consistency" in the short‐
cut menu of the drive unit).

Description of the DCC standard blocks

300 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.22 SRA

6.22 SRA
Triggers/resets a message

Symbol

SRA
7ULJJHUPHVVDJH %2 6 4 %2 6XFFHVVPHVVDJH
5HVHWPHVVDJH %2 5 (5& ': (UURU
$X[LOLDU\YDOXH ', 09
0HVVDJH,' $,' 0,'
$FNQRZOHGJHPHQW %2 $&1

Brief description
A message configured in SCOUT can be triggered or reset with the SRA (Set Alarm) block.
The message is sent to the HMI and entered in the message buffer in the SIMOTION target
device. The message buffer contains all active messages. The SRA block is configured for
multiple instantiation. There can be several block instances that trigger the same message
number.

Method of operation
● The message configured in SCOUT is entered at the MID message number.
● Input ACN =1 indicates that it is an acknowledgeable message. In this case, the message
also only disappears after a reset when it has been acknowledged by the user on the HMI.
ACN = 0 is configured for messages that cannot be acknowledged.
● A process value / auxiliary value must be entered at parameter MV if this has been specified
in the configuration in SCOUT. A numerical value of the DINT type can be configured.
The auxiliary value is inserted in the message text with a special syntax during the
configuration of the messages: The call of a process value starts with @ and ends with @.
The parameters in between indicate the output of the value and its format.
Only auxiliary values of the DINT type are possible for messages triggered with the SRA
block.
For detailed information on the syntax of auxiliary values in the message configuration,
refer to the SIMOTION SCOUT online help.
● The message is triggered with a rising edge at input S. If the block is called with a new
message number with 1 at input S, then the message is also triggered. Up to 40 messages
can be entered in the message buffer. If the block SRA is activated with rising edge at input
S at full message buffer, the block will be acknowledged with the error message. The
message is not entered.
● The message is reset with a rising edge at input R.
● If a rising edge is set at both inputs S and R during a call, R takes priority, i.e. the message
is reset.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 301
System
6.22 SRA

● Output Q = 1 indicates that the parameter has been successfully set or reset. The outputs
are set again with a rising edge at input S or R.
● With Q = 0, output ERC displays an error code that specifies the reason why the message
could not be issued:
The specified values can be displayed as OR logic operation between the constants.

Error Meaning
code
16#00 No error. For an incoming message, an entry is made in the message list. The entry is
00 deleted from the message list for an outgoing message.
16#80 Message name not permitted.
01
16#80 Message loss through overflow. All 40 entries of the message list are occupied. An entry
02 has not been made in the message list.
16#80 Message loss through overflow (signal not sent yet, signal overflow). Send buffer for noti‐
03 fication of the clients is still occupied by the last event. An entry has not been made in the
message list. An error might also occur if function calls with rising and falling edge follow
in quick succession.
16#80 Double message, message rejected (call with message came or went two times in suc‐
04 cession). An entry has not been made in the message list.
16#80 No display device reported. A message is still entered in the list.
05
16#80 No job has been started yet with this message name (first call with S = FALSE). Falling
07 edge (outgoing message) arrived without prior rising edge (incoming message) An entry
has not been made in the message list.
16#80 A message with this ID is already active in the message buffer. The message occurs when
08 a message with the ID is in the message buffer and the same ID is set again. A new
message buffer entry is not generated.
16#80 Internal error
09
16#80 Entry was rejected; message acknowledgment memory full.
10

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attributes

S Trigger message 0 0/1
R Reset message 0 0/1
MV Auxiliary value 0 DINT
MID Message ID STRUCTALAR- StructAlarmId
MID#NIL
IFP Acknowledgement 0 0/1
Q Success message 0 0/1
ERC Error 0 0- 0x80FF

Description of the DCC standard blocks

302 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.22 SRA

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓ (as of V4.3)

SINAMICS -
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 303
System
6.23 STM

6.23 STM
Fault/alarm trigger

Symbol

STM
)DXOWWULJJHU %2 6 4 %2 )DXOWDODUPDFWLYH
0HVVDJHYDOXH ', 09
$ODUPQXPEHU $,' 01

Brief description
A predefined message (fault or alarm) can be triggered on the DO with the STM (Set Message)
block. The fault is displayed (e.g. STARTER, AOP) and entered in the fault buffer or alarm
buffer of the DO. The following specifications apply to this block type:
● The message number (fault/alarm number) assigned to an instance must be in the range
51050 to 51069 (default value is 51050).
● A message number can be repeated at multiple instances in the DO (message can be
issued from different instances). However, for performance reasons, the STM block is not
designed for multiple instantiation. The figure below shows the resulting behavior when
there is multiple instantiation with the same message number for a fault on the same DO.
Without additional RC circuitry, the block instances with the same message number are
not coordinated (in any case, this would not be possible if the instances were running in
different scan times). For this reason, we recommend assigning a unique message number
in the DO for each instance.
● The message text is predefined and cannot be changed (see table below).
● The message type cannot be changed (a fault cannot be redefined to an alarm, or vice
versa).
● The default setting for the fault response is OFF2. This can be changed in the SINAMICS
basic system parameter:
– p2100[0..19] "Set fault number for fault response" and
– p2101[0..19] "Fault response setting"
● The default setting for the acknowledgement mode is IMMEDIATE. This can be changed
in the SINAMICS basic system parameter:
– p2126[0..19] "Setting fault number for acknowledge mode" and
– p2127[0..19] "Acknowledgement mode setting"

Description of the DCC standard blocks

304 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.23 STM

The table below specifies the default settings for the attributes. Possible options for the various
settings can be found in the user documentation:

Message type Alarm number Reaction Acknowledgment Message text

Fault (cannot be F51050 - OFF2 (can be changed IMMEDIATE (can be DCC: Fault F5105x Addition‐
changed) F51059 via p2100/p2101) changed via p2126/ al value: %d(x:= 0 to 9)
p2127)
Alarm (cannot be A51060 - DCC: Alarm A5106x Addi‐
changed) A51069 tional value: %d(x:= 0 to 9)

Method of operation
The number of the fault to be triggered (F51050 - F51059) must be specified at input MN. A
positive edge at input S triggers a fault at the DO. This is entered in the fault buffer of the DO
and the specified response at the DO is executed. By doing this, output Q is set by the block.
Output Q remains set as long as the fault is active. After a negative edge at input S, the fault
can be acknowledged according to the acknowledgement attribute of the message (analog
system faults: see first instance in figure below).
Input MV can be used to add additional information (fault value) for the fault. The value is
transferred to input S when the fault is triggered on a positive edge and is entered in the fault
buffer of the DO.

VWLQVWDQFH

)DXOWFDQEHDFNQRZOHGJHG
$FNQRZOHGJPHQW

,QSXW6 )DXOWLV
VHW

2XWSXW4
%DVLFV\VWHPPHVVDJH
,QWKHEORFN
WREORFN
LVVHWZLWK6

QGLQVWDQFH )DXOWLVLQDFWLYH
HYHQWKRXJKLQSXWLV
VWLOOVHW
,QSXW6
)DXOWLVDOUHDG\
VHW1RHIIHFW

,QWKHEORFN %DVLFV\VWHPPHVVDJH
2XWSXW4
LVVHWZLWK6 WREORFN

Example of two-fold instantiation with the same fault number on one DO (without additional
RC circuitry)

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 305
System
6.23 STM

Method of operation
The number of the alarm to be triggered (A51060 - A51069) must be specified at input MN. A
positive edge at input S triggers the alarm assigned to the block. This is entered in the alarm
buffer of the DO. In so doing, output Q is set. The output remains set as long as the alarm is
active. Alarms are self-acknowledging and are acknowledged when input S is reset (see figure
below). Input MV can be used to provide additional information (alarm value) for the alarm,
which is also entered in the alarm buffer.

VWLQVWDQFH
2XWJRLQJDODUP

,QSXW6 $ODUPLV
VHW

,QWKHEORFN
2XWSXW4 ,QWKHEORFN LVUHVHWZLWK6
LVVHWZLWK6
$ODUPLVLQDFWLYH
QGLQVWDQFH HYHQWKRXJKLQSXWLV
VWLOOVHW
,QSXW6 $ODUPKDVDOUHDG\EHHQ $ODUPLVLQDFWLYH
VHW1RHIIHFW 2XWSXWVWLOOVHW

2XWSXW4 ,QWKHEORFN
LVVHWZLWK6

Example of two-fold instantiation with the same alarm number at one DO (without additional
RC circuitry)

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
S Fault trigger 0 0/1
MV Message value 0 DINT
MN Alarm number F51050 F51050 -
F51059
A51060 -
A51069
Q Fault/alarm active 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

306 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.23 STM

Can be inserted on‐ No

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 307
System
6.24 WMDP

6.24 WMDP
Writes drive parameters from the controller

Symbol

WMDP
/RJLFDOVWDUWDGGUHVVDV , ,27< %6< %2 :ULWHMREDFWLYHPHVVDJH
LQSXWRXWSXW 4 %2 :ULWHMREH[HFXWHGVXFFHVVIXOO\
/RJLFDOVWDUWDGGUHVVRIWKH ', /$'5 PHVVDJH
GULYH 4) %2 (UURU
,'RIWKHGULYHREMHFWIRU 8' '2,' (5& ', 5HWXUQYDOXHRIWKHHQWLUHMRE
GLUHFWDGGUHVVLQJ GDWDW\SH
1XPEHURISDUDPHWHUV ; 35(6 3DUDPHWHUVSHFLILF
SDUDPHWHUQXPEHUVDQGLQGLFHV UHWXUQYDOXH
WREHUHDG
6WDUWZULWHMRE %2 :5
$ERUWRIWKHDFWLYHMRE %2 $%57

Brief description
The WMDP block enables up to 23 SINAMICS parameters to be written from the DCC
SIMOTION program. Only SINAMICS drives are supported. For error diagnostics, the error
code ERC can be evaluated. ERC corresponds to the error code for parameter access
according to PROVIdrive DPV1. The possible error codes can be found in Appendix A.2 of
this document or in the SIMOTION Communication System Manual in Section PROFIdrive
and there in the Subsection Acyclic communication (Base Mode Parameter Access) → Error
evaluation in table Error codes in Base Mode Parameter Access responses.
The WMDP block is available as of SIMOTION V4.2.

Method of operation
First the block inputs for addressing the drive as well as the selection of the parameters and
values to be written are entered. If a parameter is not indexed, IDX = 0 must be set. The
asynchronous write job is started with the positive edge at input WR. As long as the job is
active, the BSY flag is set. The number of cycles for a parameter access is dependent on the
system utilization and communication load and can vary from job to job. During an active write
job, any additional positive edges at input WR are ignored. The actual reading/writing of the
parameters is not performed in the DCC task. The block instance only controls the
communication command. The results of the read/write job must be polled at the block outputs
in the following task cycles. The evaluation is performed via global variables or user-defined
block types. Output Q = 1 indicates that the parameter has been successfully written. If an
error occurs during an access, this is signaled with QF = 1. For error diagnostics, the error
code ERC can be evaluated.
Despite the overall status Q =1, the writing of individual parameters may have been aborted
with error. Write jobs for which there is no error in PRES, have been executed.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

308 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.24 WMDP

The error status of the individual write jobs can be evaluated on the parameter-specific return
value PRES. An active job is aborted with the positive edge on the ABRT input. The ABRT
signal must have the value 1 for at least one cycle.

Brief description
The block enables up to 23 SINAMICS parameters to be written.

Time diagram

:5

%6<

4)

:ULWHMRE
LVQRWVWDUWHG
DJDLQ

Data set 47 is always read out for PROFIBUS (external or integrated) irrespective of whether
the function is called with a valid (0>=doid<=254) or invalid 'doid' (doid=255).
Two data sets are available for PROFINET:
● Base Mode Parameter Access - local (data set 0xB02E)
● Base Mode Parameter Access - global (data set 0xB02F)
Data set 0xB02E is used for SIMOTION if either no 'doid' or an invalid 'doid' (doid=255) is
specified in the function. Access to the appropriate DO is then performed via the Parameter
Access Point (PAP). Either the PAP address can be specified directly or the log. address of
the cyclic data (e.g. 256 for a DO axis) can be specified. SIMOTION then determines the
corresponding PAP from this address before accessing the correct address. PAP must always
be at subslot 1 (HW Config configuration).
Data set 0xB02F is used if a valid 'doid' (0>=doid<=254) is entered. Any valid PAP or address
can be specified because the assignment is only performed via the 'doid'.

Description of the block inputs

'IOTY' input/output assignment of the logical start address of the drive.
With 198: INPUT, the logical address of the drive is in the input range.
With 199: OUTPUT, the logical address of the drive is in the output range.
Diagnostics addresses are always of the INPUT type.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 309
System
6.24 WMDP

'LADR': Specification of the logical start address of the drive. If the optional parameter DOID
is also used, any arbitrary address of the station (preferably the diagnostics address of the
station) can be specified.
With PROFINET, parameter access is via the Parameter Access Point (PAP) of a drive object.
As an alternative to the logical start address of the drive, specification of the diagnostic address
of the associated PAP is recommended.
'DOID': For the direct addressing of a drive object. The DOID can be unspecified or specified
as invalid (>254) under the following conditions:
● Access via the DOID is not supported by the DP slave / IO device (P978 is not implemented).
● Data set 0xB02F is not supported (PROFINET only).
● Access is to be via the parameter access point of a DO (PROFINET only).
'X.NUMP': Number of parameters to be written.
'X.PAR.NUM': Specifies the parameter numbers from which the values are to be written.
'X.PAR.IDX': Parameter index; for indexed values, 0 means index 0. For non-indexed values,
parameter index 0 must be specified.
'X.PAR.DTYP' specifies the parameter data type (for the coding, see PROFIdrive profile). The
data type must match the type of the parameter in the drive. The block performs the data type-
specific transfer. If the specified data type does not match the actual data type of the parameter
in SINAMICS, an error status is returned.
'X.PAR.X': Data to be written to the drive, DWORD. Conversion blocks are required for different
data types. Conversion block R_DW should be used to write a REAL parameter. Conversion
block B_DW should be used to write a BYTE parameter.
'WR': Start write job
'ABRT': Abort active job

Description of the block outputs

'Q': Job completed without errors.
'QF': Job completed with errors.
'ERC': Corresponds to the values of the return value 'functionResult' of the
_writeDriveMultiParameter function.

Parameterization example
In order to be able to write certain parameters of a drive object (in the example: SERVO_03),
proceed as follows:
First set the correct telegram configuration.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

310 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.24 WMDP

Then set the desired DO address in the WMDP block. To do this, set the block input 'LADR'
to the address (260) set in the telegram and the block input 'DOID' to the number (3) set in the
telegram.

Select the parameters to be written at block input 'X', e.g. P1135(0) OFF3 ramp-down time.

To do this, double-click block input 'X', select the first structure element and enter the parameter
number (1135) at 'num' and the index (0) at 'idx'. Enter the data type at ’dtyp’. It must correspond
to the data type of the parameter, in our case 8 (floating-point). Enter the value 16#42377AE1
as DWORD at 'x'. The coding of the data types can be found in the SIMOTION List Manual
'System Functions/Variables Devices → System Functions - Devices 1 →
_readDriveMultiParameterDescription'.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 311
System
6.24 WMDP

Then set the block input 'WR' to 1 to start the writing. The result can be viewed in the expert
list.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

312 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.24 WMDP

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attributes

IOTY Logical start address as input/ 0 0: Invalid
output 198: Input ad‐
dress
199: Output ad‐
dress
LADR Logical start address of the drive -1 DINT
DOID ID of the drive object for direct 255 0 .. 254, 255: In‐
addressing valid
X Number of parameters, parameter 1
numbers and indices to be read
X.NUMP Number of parameters to be written 0 1..23
X.PAR Description of a parameter 0
X.PAR.NUM Number of the parameter 0 1..65535
X.PAR.IDX Index of the parameter 0 1..65535
X.PAR.DTYP Data type of the parameter to be written 0 USINT
X.PAR.X Value of the parameter 0 DWORD
WR Start write job 0 0/1
ABRT Abort of the active job 0 0/1
BSY Write job active message 0 0/1
Q Write job executed successfully message 0 0/1
QF Error 0 0/1
ERC Return value of the entire job, data type 16#0000 DWORD
PRES Parameter-specific return value 0 DWORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓ (as of V4.2)

SINAMICS -

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 313
System
6.24 WMDP

Can be loaded on‐ No

line
Process context Cyclic, equidistant
Special character‐ -
istics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

314 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.25 WRP

6.25 WRP
Writes drive parameters (REAL type)

Symbol

WRP
3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU ', 3$5 %6< %2 :ULWHMRELVDFWLYH
3DUDPHWHULQGH[ ', ,'; 4 %2 :ULWHMRELVVXFFHVVIXO
6WDUWZULWHMRE %2 :5 4) %2 (UURU
3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 5 ; (5& : (UURUFRGH

Brief description
The block enables the asynchronous writing of drive parameters of the REAL type on the local
drive object.

NOTICE
Do not use with Safety Integrated
The block for programming a drive parameter must not be used for safety reasons to change
parameters of the SINAMICS Safety Integrated Functions. DCC is not considered suitable
for safety applications in the context of functional safety (Safety Integrated).

Method of operation
The parameter number and the index of the parameter that is to be written are indicated at
inputs PAR and IDX, respectively. If a parameter is not indexed, IDX = 0 must be set. The
parameter is always written on the drive object on which the chart with the block is calculated.
It is not possible to access parameters on several drive objects.
The parameter value is specified via input X. The asynchronous write job can be started on a
positive edge at input WR. As long as the job is active, the BSY flag is set. The number of
cycles for a parameter access is dependent on the system utilization and can vary from job to
job. During an active write job, any additional positive edges at input WR are ignored.
Output Q = 1 indicates that the parameter has been successfully written. If an error occurs
during an access, this is signaled with QF = 1.
For error diagnostics, the error code ERC can be evaluated. ERC corresponds to the error
code for parameter accesses according to PROVIdrive DPV1. The possible error codes can
be found in Appendix A.2 of this document or in the SINAMICS Function Manual FH1 in Section
PROFIBUS DP / PROFINET IO Communication and there in the Subsection Communication
according to PROFIdrive → Acyclic communication → Configuration of the jobs and responses
in Table Error values in DPV1 parameter responses.
ERC is only valid as long as QF = 1.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 315
System
6.25 WRP

Time diagram

:5

%6<

4)

:ULWHMRE
LVQRWVWDUWHG
DJDLQ

Quantity framework
Any number of asynchronous jobs of different block instances can be issued in parallel. Each
block instance can only process one job.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
PAR Parameter number 0 0..216
IDX Parameter index 0 0..216
WR Start write job 0 0/1
X Parameter value 0.0 REAL
BSY Write job is active 0 0/1
Q Write job is successful 0 0/1
QF Error 0 0/1
ERC Error code 16#0000 WORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ No
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

316 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.26 WRP_D

6.26 WRP_D
Writes drive parameters (DOUBLE INTEGER type)

Symbol

WRP_D
3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU ', 3$5 %6< %2 :ULWHMRELVDFWLYH
3DUDPHWHULQGH[ ', ,'; 4 %2 :ULWHMRELVVXFFHVVIXO
6WDUWZULWHMRE %2 :5 4) %2 (UURU
3DUDPHWHUYDOXH ', ; (5& : (UURUFRGH

Brief description
The block enables the asynchronous writing of drive parameters of the DOUBLE INTEGER
type on the local drive object.

NOTICE
Do not use with Safety Integrated
The block for programming a drive parameter must not be used for safety reasons to change
parameters of the SINAMICS Safety Integrated Functions. DCC is not considered suitable
for safety applications in the context of functional safety (Safety Integrated).

Method of operation
The parameter number and the index of the parameter to be written must be specified at inputs
PAR and IDX, respectively. If a parameter is not indexed, IDX = 0 must be set. The parameter
is always written on the drive object on which the chart with the block is calculated. It is not
possible to access parameters on several drive objects.
The parameter value is specified via input X. The asynchronous write job can be started on a
positive edge at input WR. As long as the job is active, the BSY flag is set. The number of
cycles for a parameter access is dependent on the system utilization and can vary from job to
job. During an active write job, any additional positive edges at input WR are ignored.
Output Q = 1 indicates that the parameter has been successfully written. If an error occurs
during an access, this is signaled with QF = 1.
For error diagnostics, the error code ERC can be evaluated. ERC corresponds to the error
code for parameter accesses according to PROVIdrive DPV1. The possible error codes can
be found in Appendix A.2 of this document or in the SINAMICS Function Manual FH1 in Section
PROFIBUS DP / PROFINET IO Communication and there in the Subsection Communication
according to PROFIdrive → Acyclic communication → Configuration of the jobs and responses
in Table Error values in DPV1 parameter responses.
ERC is only valid as long as QF = 1.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 317
System
6.26 WRP_D

Time diagram

:5

%6<

4)

:ULWHMRE
LVQRWVWDUWHG
DJDLQ

Quantity framework
Any number of asynchronous jobs of different block instances can be issued in parallel. Each
block instance can only process one job.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
PAR Parameter number 0 0..216
IDX Parameter index 0 0..216
WR Start write job 0 0/1
X Parameter value 0 DINT
BSY Write job is active 0 0/1
Q Write job is successful 0 0/1
QF Error 0 0/1
ERC Error code 16#0000 WORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ No
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

318 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.27 WRP_I

6.27 WRP_I
Writes drive parameters (INTEGER type)

Symbol

WRP_I
3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU ', 3$5 %6< %2 :ULWHMRELVDFWLYH
3DUDPHWHULQGH[ ', ,'; 4 %2 :ULWHMRELVVXFFHVVIXO
6WDUWZULWHMRE %2 :5 4) %2 (UURU
3DUDPHWHUYDOXH , ; (5& : (UURUFRGH

Brief description
The block allows asynchronous writing of drive parameters of the INTEGER type on the local
drive object

NOTICE
Do not use with Safety Integrated
The block for programming a drive parameter must not be used for safety reasons to change
parameters of the SINAMICS Safety Integrated Functions. DCC is not considered suitable
for safety applications in the context of functional safety (Safety Integrated).

Method of operation
The parameter number and the index of the parameter to be written must be specified at inputs
PAR and IDX, respectively. If a parameter is not indexed, IDX = 0 must be set. The parameter
is always written on the drive object on which the chart with the block is calculated. It is not
possible to access parameters on several drive objects.
The parameter value is specified via input X. The asynchronous write job can be started on a
positive edge at input WR. As long as the job is active, the BSY flag is set. The number of
cycles for a parameter access is dependent on the system utilization and can vary from job to
job. During an active write job, any additional positive edges at input WR are ignored.
Output Q = 1 indicates that the parameter has been successfully written. If an error occurs
during an access, this is signaled with QF = 1.
For error diagnostics, the error code ERC can be evaluated. ERC corresponds to the error
code for parameter accesses according to PROVIdrive DPV1. The possible error codes can
be found in Appendix A.2 of this document or in the SINAMICS Function Manual FH1 in Section
PROFIBUS DP / PROFINET IO Communication and there in the Subsection Communication
according to PROFIdrive → Acyclic communication → Configuration of the jobs and responses
in Table Error values in DPV1 parameter responses.
ERC is only valid as long as QF = 1.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 319
System
6.27 WRP_I

Time diagram

:5

%6<

4)

:ULWHMRE
LVQRWVWDUWHG
DJDLQ

Quantity framework
Any number of asynchronous jobs of different block instances can be issued in parallel. Each
block instance can only process one job.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
PAR Parameter number 0 0..216
IDX Parameter index 0 0..216
WR Start write job 0 0/1
X Parameter value 0 INT
BSY Write job is active 0 0/1
Q Write job is successful 0 0/1
QF Error 0 0/1
ERC Error code 16#0000 WORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ No
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

320 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.28 WRP_UD

6.28 WRP_UD
Writes drive parameters (UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER type)

Symbol

WRP_UD
3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU ', 3$5 %6< %2 :ULWHMRELVDFWLYH
3DUDPHWHULQGH[ ', ,'; 4 %2 :ULWHMRELVVXFFHVVIXO
6WDUWZULWHMRE %2 :5 4) %2 (UURU
3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 8' ; (5& : (UURUFRGH

Brief description
WRP_UD (Write Parameter) enables the asynchronous writing of drive parameters of the
UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER type on the local drive object.

NOTICE
Do not use with Safety Integrated
The block for programming a drive parameter must not be used for safety reasons to change
parameters of the SINAMICS Safety Integrated Functions. DCC is not considered suitable
for safety applications in the context of functional safety (Safety Integrated).

Method of operation
The parameter number and the index of the parameter to be written must be specified at inputs
PAR and IDX, respectively. If a parameter is not indexed, IDX = 0 must be set. The parameter
is always written on the drive object on which the chart with the block is calculated. It is not
possible to access parameters on several drive objects.
The parameter value is specified via input X. The asynchronous write job can be started on a
positive edge at input WR. As long as the job is active, the BSY flag is set. The number of
cycles for a parameter access is dependent on the system utilization and can vary from job to
job. During an active write job, any additional positive edges at input WR are ignored.
Output Q = 1 indicates that the parameter has been successfully written. If an error occurs
during an access, this is signaled with QF = 1.
For error diagnostics, the error code ERC can be evaluated. ERC corresponds to the error
code for parameter accesses according to PROVIdrive DPV1. The possible error codes can
be found in Appendix A.2 of this document or in the SINAMICS Function Manual FH1 in Section
PROFIBUS DP / PROFINET IO Communication and there in the Subsection Communication
according to PROFIdrive → Acyclic communication → Configuration of the jobs and responses
in Table Error values in DPV1 parameter responses.
ERC is only valid as long as QF = 1.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 321
System
6.28 WRP_UD

Time diagram

:5

%6<

4)

:ULWHMRE
LVQRWVWDUWHG
DJDLQ

Quantity framework
Any number of asynchronous jobs of different block instances can be issued in parallel. Each
block instance can only process one job.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
PAR Parameter number 0 0..216
IDX Parameter index 0 0..216
WR Start write job 0 0/1
X Parameter value 0 UDINT
BSY Write job is active 0 0/1
Q Write job is successful 0 0/1
QF Error 0 0/1
ERC Error code 16#0000 WORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ No
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

322 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.29 WRP_UI

6.29 WRP_UI
Writes drive parameters (UNSIGNED INTEGER type)

Symbol

WRP_UI
3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU ', 3$5 %6< %2 :ULWHMRELVDFWLYH
3DUDPHWHULQGH[ ', ,'; 4 %2 :ULWHMRELVVXFFHVVIXO
6WDUWZULWHMRE %2 :5 4) %2 (UURU
3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 8, ; (5& : (UURUFRGH

Brief description
WRP_UI (Write Parameter) enables the asynchronous writing of drive parameters of the
UNSIGNED INTEGER type on the local drive object.

NOTICE
Do not use with Safety Integrated
The block for programming a drive parameter must not be used for safety reasons to change
parameters of the SINAMICS Safety Integrated Functions. DCC is not considered suitable
for safety applications in the context of functional safety (Safety Integrated).

Method of operation
The parameter number and the index of the parameter to be written must be specified at inputs
PAR and IDX, respectively. If a parameter is not indexed, IDX = 0 must be set. The parameter
is always written on the drive object on which the chart with the block is calculated. It is not
possible to access parameters on several drive objects.
The parameter value is specified via input X. The asynchronous write job can be started on a
positive edge at input WR. As long as the job is active, the BSY flag is set. The number of
cycles for a parameter access is dependent on the system utilization and can vary from job to
job. During an active write job, any additional positive edges at input WR are ignored.
Output Q = 1 indicates that the parameter has been successfully written. If an error occurs
during an access, this is signaled with QF = 1.
For error diagnostics, the error code ERC can be evaluated. ERC corresponds to the error
code for parameter accesses according to PROVIdrive DPV1. The possible error codes can
be found in Appendix A.2 of this document or in the SINAMICS Function Manual FH1 in Section
PROFIBUS DP / PROFINET IO Communication and there in the Subsection Communication
according to PROFIdrive → Acyclic communication → Configuration of the jobs and responses
in Table Error values in DPV1 parameter responses.
ERC is only valid as long as QF = 1.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 323
System
6.29 WRP_UI

Time diagram

:5

%6<

4)

:ULWHMRE
LVQRWVWDUWHG
DJDLQ

Quantity framework
Any number of asynchronous jobs of different block instances can be issued in parallel. Each
block instance can only process one job.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
PAR Parameter number 0 0..216
IDX Parameter index 0 0..216
WR Start write job 0 0/1
X Parameter value 0 UINT
BSY Write job is active 0 0/1
Q Write job is successful 0 0/1
QF Error 0 0/1
ERC Error code 16#0000 WORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ No
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

324 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 System
6.30 WRP_US

6.30 WRP_US
Writes drive parameters (UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER type)

Symbol

WRP_US
3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU ', 3$5 %6< %2 :ULWHMRELVDFWLYH
3DUDPHWHULQGH[ ', ,'; 4 %2 :ULWHMRELVVXFFHVVIXO
6WDUWZULWHMRE %2 :5 4) %2 (UURU
3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 86 ; (5& : (UURUFRGH

Brief description
WRP_US (Write Parameter) enables the asynchronous writing of drive parameters of the
UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER type on the local drive object.

NOTICE
Do not use with Safety Integrated
The block for programming a drive parameter must not be used for safety reasons to change
parameters of the SINAMICS Safety Integrated Functions. DCC is not considered suitable
for safety applications in the context of functional safety (Safety Integrated).

Method of operation
The parameter number and the index of the parameter to be written must be specified at inputs
PAR and IDX, respectively. If a parameter is not indexed, IDX = 0 must be set. The parameter
is always written on the drive object on which the chart with the block is calculated. It is not
possible to access parameters on several drive objects.
The parameter value is specified via input X. The asynchronous write job can be started on a
positive edge at input WR. As long as the job is active, the BSY flag is set. The number of
cycles for a parameter access is dependent on the system utilization and can vary from job to
job. During an active write job, any additional positive edges at input WR are ignored.
Output Q = 1 indicates that the parameter has been successfully written. If an error occurs
during an access, this is signaled with QF = 1.
For error diagnostics, the error code ERC can be evaluated. ERC corresponds to the error
code for parameter accesses according to PROVIdrive DPV1. The possible error codes can
be found in Appendix A.2 of this document or in the SINAMICS Function Manual FH1 in Section
PROFIBUS DP / PROFINET IO Communication and there in the Subsection Communication
according to PROFIdrive → Acyclic communication → Configuration of the jobs and responses
in Table Error values in DPV1 parameter responses.
ERC is only valid as long as QF = 1.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 325
System
6.30 WRP_US

Time diagram

:5

%6<

4)

:ULWHMRE
LVQRWVWDUWHG
DJDLQ

Quantity framework
Any number of asynchronous jobs of different block instances can be issued in parallel. Each
block instance can only process one job.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
PAR Parameter number 0 0..216
IDX Parameter index 0 0..216
WR Start write job 0 0/1
X Parameter value 0 USINT
BSY Write job is active 0 0/1
Q Write job is successful 0 0/1
QF Error 0 0/1
ERC Error code 16#0000 WORD

Configuration data

SIMOTION -
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ No
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

326 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
Technology 7
7.1 DCA
Diameter calculator

Symbol

DCA
/LQHVSHHG>PPLQ@ 5 /6 ' 5 &DOFXODWHGGLDPHWHU>P@
0RWRUVSHHG>USP@ 5 06 /6) 5 0XOWLSOLHUIRUVHWSRLQWFKDQQHO
*HDUUDWLR 5 *) >P@
+ROGGLDPHWHU %2 +/' 58 %2 'LDPHWHULQFUHDVHLV
6HWGLDPHWHU %2 6 OLPLWHG
6HWYDOXH>P@ 5 69 5' %2 'LDPHWHUGHFUHDVHLV
,QYHUWZLQGLQJGLUHFWLRQ %2 ,19 OLPLWHG
7LPHFRQVWDQWIRUV\PPHWU\RI 76 7 0$;' %2 'LVOLPLWHGWR'0$;
OLQHVSHHG>PV@ 0,1' %2 'LVOLPLWHGWR'0,1
7LPHFRQVWDQWIRUVPRRWKLQJ 76 7
RIGLDPHWHU>PV@
7ROHUDQFHIDFWRUIRU 5 72/
SODXVLELOLW\FKHFN
0DWHULDOWKLFNQHVV>PP@ 5 :7+
0LQLPXPVSHHG>USP@ 5 00,1
0LQLPXPOLQHVSHHG 5 /0,1
>PPLQ@
0D[LPXPGLDPHWHU>P@ 5 '0$;
0LQLPXPGLDPHWHU>P@ 5 '0,1

Brief description
Technological block for axial winder applications. It is used to determine the current diameter
of an axial winder based on the line speed and the motor speed. The calculated diameter is
checked for plausibility.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 327
Technology
7.1 DCA

Block diagram

,19
PV
7 PV

7



/6
5($/ 
0$; 
06 ; /6)
!  

*)
[ \ '

5($/ '0$;
0$; '0,1
:7+ 6HW'0$; 0$;'

72/ 6HW'0,1 0,1'
58
;
;; 5'
00,1 ;

; !
/0,1 ;; +ROG
;
+/'

6 6HW

69 6HW9DOXH
5($/
0$;
'0$;
5($/
'0,1 0$;

Description of the DCC standard blocks

328 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Technology
7.1 DCA

Method of operation

'0,1

'(10DWHULDOGHQVLW\ 6&/6FDOLQJ &RUHGLDPHWHU

'&XUUHQWGLDPHWHU /60DWHULDOVSHHG

2)6 :0DWHULDOZLGWK
)L[HGPRPHQWRILQHUWLD
UHFDOFXODWHGRQPRWRUVLGH

Q
'0$;0D[LPXPZLQGHUGLDPHWHU

*HDUEORFN Q0RWRUVSHHG

Q 060RWRUVSHHG
Q:LQGHUVSHHG

0E
Q 0$FFHOHUDWLRQWRUTXHPRWRUVLGH
E
*) *HDUUDWLR
Q

The block cyclically calculates the diameter of an axial winder on the basis of the current line
speed and the motor speed, which have to be supplied via the LS and MS inputs. The current
motor speed is indicated at input MS. With deceleration time T1, the path velocity can be
decelerated relative to the motor speed.
The current diameter is then calculated using the following formula:

/LQHVSHHG ⋅ *HDUUDWLR
'LDPHWHU =
0RWRUVSHHG ⋅ π
The result can then be smoothed again using a smoothing element with time constant T2. The
smoothing filters T1 and T2 have PT1 behavior. If time constant T1 or T2 = 0, the input value
of the smoothing is written directly to the output. The diameter is only calculated if the path
velocity LS or motor speed MS is greater than the threshold value LMIN or MMIN, respectively.
Otherwise, the last calculated diameter value is held. In this case, smoothing T2 switches over
to the fed-back diameter D. It is also possible to trigger holding of diameter D directly by setting
input HLD = 1. Input SV can be used to assign a preset value to the diameter; this diameter
is applied when S =1. Smoothing element T2 is also initialized with this value. When S = 0,
the diameter calculation and smoothing T2 is enabled again. Setting the diameter has
precedence over holding.
After smoothing element T2, the calculated diameter is checked for plausibility and corrected
if a violation is identified. This test function is equivalent to that of a single ramp-function
generator. The ramp-up time or ramp-down time is calculated dynamically from the material
thickness WTH, tolerance factor TOL, and the winding speed. When material thickness WTH
= 0, the plausibility check has no effect.
The maximum diameter change ΔDmax per scan interval is determined as follows:

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 329
Technology
7.1 DCA

06 :7+
∆'PD[=72/⋅⋅ ⋅ ⋅7$
⋅*) 
with:

ΔDmax Maximum diameter change [m] per scan interval

TOL Tolerance factor
MS Motor speed [rpm]
GF Gear ratio
WTH Material thickness [mm]
TA Block sampling time [s]

The resulting diameter D is limited as follows:

Dn≤Dn-1+ΔDmaxn; for Dn(unlimited)≥Dn-1 (ramp-up limiting)
Dn≥Dn-1-ΔDmaxn; for Dn(unlimited)≤Dn-1 (ramp-down limiting)
Output RU (ramp-up limiting) or RD (ramp-down limiting) is set in order to signal externally that
limiting is in effect. If limiting is no longer in effect, the corresponding output is reset to zero.
When Hold = 1 or Set = 1, both outputs are reset. When the diameter is set, the ramp-function
generator has no effect. The plausibility check is a downstream limiter. If the current diameter
is limited to DMAX, output MAXD = 1 is set. If the current diameter is limited to DMIN, this is
signaled at output MIND. If limiting is active, the ramp-function generator is corrected with the
active limit value in order to avoid anti-windup. In this case, the following applies to the next
ramp-function generator cycle:
Dn-1 = DMAXn-1 if diameter is limited to DMAX
Dn-1 = DMINn-1 if diameter is limited to DMIN
Output LSF cyclically supplies a multiplication factor for the setpoint channel in order to
calculate the speed setpoint of the motor from the current path velocity. If the INV input is set
to the value 1, the winding direction is inverted.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
LS Line speed [m/min] 0.0 0..REAL MAX
MS Motor speed [rpm] 1.0 0..REAL MAX
GF Gear ratio 1.0 0..REAL MAX
HLD Hold diameter 0 0/1
S Set diameter 0 0/1
SV Set value [m] 0.0 0..REAL MAX
INV Invert winding direction 0 0/1
T1 Time constant for symmetry of line 0.0 0..REAL MAX
speed [ms]
T2 Time constant for smoothing 0.0 0..REAL MAX
of diameter [ms]

Description of the DCC standard blocks

330 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Technology
7.1 DCA

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
TOL Tolerance factor for plausibility 1.5 0..REAL MAX
check
WTH Material thickness [mm] 0.0 0..REAL MAX
MMIN Minimum speed [rpm] 1.0 0..REAL MAX
LMIN Minimum line speed 0.1 0..REAL MAX
[m/min]
DMAX Maximum diameter [m] 0.1 0..REAL MAX
DMIN Minimum diameter [m] 0.01 0..REAL MAX
D Calculated diameter [m] 0.0 0..REAL MAX
LSF Multiplier for setpoint channel [1/m] 1.0 0..REAL MAX
RU Diameter increase is limited 0 0/1
RD Diameter decrease is limited 0 0/1
MAXD D is limited to DMAX 0 0/1
MIND D is limited to DMIN 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 331
Technology
7.2 INCO

7.2 INCO
Axial winder moment of inertia

Symbol

INCO
&XUUHQWGLDPHWHU>P@ 5 ' 02, 5 5HVXOWLQJ
0DWHULDOZLGWK>P@ 5 : PRPHQWRILQHUWLD>1PVA
0DWHULDOGHQVLW\>NJPA@ 5 '(1 NJPA@
6FDOLQJIDFWRUIRUGHQVLW\ 5 6&/ 502, 5 5HODWLYH
&RUHGLDPHWHU>P@ 5 '0,1 PRPHQWRILQHUWLD
0D[LPXPGLDPHWHU>P@ 5 '0$;
2IIVHWPRPHQWRILQHUWLD 5 2)6
>1PVANJPA@
*HDUUDWLR 5 *)

Brief description
Technological block for axial winder applications. It is used for determining the moment of
inertia of a winder, which is used to derive a torque feedforward control.

Block diagram

*) ;
77
:
5($/
0$;
'(1


6&/
5($/
0$;
 
'0$; ;
 
5($/ 
0$;
502,
'0,; ;


5($/
0$;
 
' ; 02,
 

'0,1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

332 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Technology
7.2 INCO

Method of operation

'0,1

'(10DWHULDOGHQVLW\ 6&/6FDOLQJ &RUHGLDPHWHU

'&XUUHQWGLDPHWHU /60DWHULDOVSHHG

2)6 :0DWHULDOZLGWK
)L[HGPRPHQWRILQHUWLD
UHFDOFXODWHGRQPRWRUVLGH

Q
'0$;0D[LPXPZLQGHUGLDPHWHU

*HDUEORFN Q0RWRUVSHHG

Q 060RWRUVSHHG
Q:LQGHUVSHHG

0E
Q 0$FFHOHUDWLRQWRUTXHPRWRUVLGH
E
*) *HDUUDWLR
Q

The block calculates the motor-side moment of inertia of an axial winder. Input variable D
specifies the current diameter [m] of the winding. The density [kg/m3] of the winder can be
specified via DEN, and a correction factor for the density can be specified via SCL. Input
variable DMIN [m] is used to specify the diameter of the winding core or the minimum diameter
of the wound material. In order to calculate the relative moment of inertia RMOI for an
adaptation Kp of the speed controller, the block requires the maximum moment of inertia of
the layout. To calculate this, the maximum winding diameter must be specified at input DMAX
[m]. The total static moment of inertia (motor, empty winder and, if required, gearbox) relative
to the motor side can be specified via input OFS [Nms2, kgm2]. The transmission ratio is
specified at input GF. The current moment of inertia of the entire winder layout relative to the
motor side is output at output MOI.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
D Current diameter [m] 0.0 0..REAL MAX
W Material width [m] 0.0 0..REAL MAX
DEN Material density [kg/m^3] 0.0 0..REAL MAX
SCL Scaling factor for density 1.0 0..REAL MAX
DMIN Core diameter [m] 0.01 0..REAL MAX
DMAX Maximum diameter [m] 0.1 0..REAL MAX
OFS Offset moment of inertia 0.0 0..REAL MAX
[Nms^2, kgm^2]
GF Gear ratio 1.0 0..REAL MAX

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 333
Technology
7.2 INCO

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
MOI Resulting moment of inertia 0.0 0..REAL MAX
[Nms^2, kgm^2]
RMOI Relative moment of inertia 0.0 0..REAL MAX

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

334 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Technology
7.3 OCA

7.3 OCA
Software cam controller

Symbol

OCA
&XUUHQWSRVLWLRQLQ/8 ', ; 4 %2 2XWSXWFDPVWDWH
6WDUWSRVLWLRQRIWKHRXWSXWFDP ', ;
(QGSRVLWLRQRIWKHRXWSXWFDP ', ;
6ZLWFKLQJK\VWHUHVLVRIWKHRXWSXWFDP ', +<
$[LVF\FOH ', $&/

Brief description
Software cam controller with the following features:
● Position-based cam.
● Switch-on/switch-off positions can be changed dynamically.
● Adjustable hysteresis for actual-value-related output cam.

Block diagram

;
;



[Q [Q
$&/

; [QFDPORJLF 4

+<

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 335
Technology
7.3 OCA

Method of operation
The switch-on position of the position-based cam in the positive direction and the switch-off
position in the negative direction is specified via input X1 [LU]. X2 [LU] specifies the switch-off
position in the positive direction or the switch-on position in the negative direction. In order to
be able to drive the cam controller with modulo axes, the axis cycle can be specified at input
ACL. If ACL = 0, there is no internal modulo correction. A hysteresis band for input X can be
set via HY. This means that switching operations do not occur when actual value-related output
cams are at a standstill.
The hysteresis is used to avoid unwanted switch-on and switch-off operations of the output
cam during actual value noise. After a switching operation, switching is only possible again for
a direction reversal when the hysteresis range is exited.

The cam logic makes the following evaluation:

Non-modulo axis (ACL = 0)

x1n < x2n Q = (x1n ≤ xn) AND (x2n > xn)

x1n ≥ x2n Q=0

Modulo axis (ACL <> 0):

x1n < x2n Q = (x1n ≤ xn) AND (x2n > xn)

x1n > x2n Q = (x1n ≤ xn) OR (x2n > xn)
x1n = x2n Q=0

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Current position in LU 0 DINT
X1 Start position of the output cam 0 DINT
X2 End position of the output cam 0 DINT
HY Switching hysteresis of the output 0 DINT
cam
ACL Axis cycle 0 0...231-1
Q Output cam state 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

336 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Technology
7.4 TTCU

7.4 TTCU
Winding harshness characteristic

Symbol

TTCU
0D[LPXPVHWSRLQW 5 <0$; < 5 $GDSWHGVHWSRLQW
6HWSRLQWUHGXFWLRQ 5 <5('
&XUUHQWGLDPHWHU 5 '
0LQLPXPZLQGLQJGLDPHWHU 5 '0,1
0D[LPXPZLQGLQJGLDPHWHU 5 '0$;
&KDUDFWHULVWLF %2 0

Brief description
Adaptation of a setpoint according to the specified characteristic. The block used for winder
applications to determine the tension setpoint depending on the current winder diameter.

Block diagram

5($/
0$;
'0$;
5($/
0$;
'0,1


<0$;
<0$; <5('

0
!
 <
<5('

5($/
0$;
'


! 0 

0 

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 337
Technology
7.4 TTCU

Method of operation
The reduction of the characteristic starts when D > DMIN is true. Input variable YRED specifies
the degree of reduction relative to input variable YMAX. Input M can be used to preselect a
characteristic that defines the reduction behavior of the output variable as the input variable
increases. If M = 0 has been preselected, the characteristic is reduced asymptotically by the
factor YMAX*YRED. In this case, input variable DMAX is not taken into account. If M =1 has
been preselected, input variable DMAX can be used to specify at which input variable D =
DMAX the characteristic runs through YMAX- YMAX*YRED.
The calculation of the characteristic is specified as follows:
D ≤ DMIN is true

<=<0$;
D > DMIN and M = 0 (reaching of the reduction factor for D→∞)

  '0,1  
<=<0$;<5(' 
  ' 

D > DMIN and M = 1 (attainment of reduction factor for D = DMAX)

 '0$;  '0,1  
'0$;>'0,1 <=<0$;<5('  
 '0$;'0,1  ' 

'0$;='0,1 <=<0$;(<5(' )

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
YMAX Maximum setpoint 0.0 0..REAL MAX
YRED Setpoint reduction 0.0 0..1
D Current diameter 0.0 0..REAL MAX
DMIN Minimum winding diameter 1.0e-2 0..REAL MAX
DMAX Maximum winding diameter 0.1 0..REAL MAX
M Characteristic 1 0/1
Y Adapted setpoint 0.0 0..REAL MAX

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

338 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Technology
7.4 TTCU

Can be loaded on‐ Yes

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 339
Technology
7.5 WBG

7.5 WBG
Wobble generator

Symbol

WBG
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
6\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDO %2 6,1 :6 5 :REEOHVLJQDO
0DVWHU 6287 %2 6\QFKURQL]DWLRQVLJQDO VODYH
(QDEOH %2 (1
$PSOLWXGH 5 $03
:REEOHIUHTXHQF\ 5 ):
3KDVHRIIVHW , 3+,
3VWHSFKDQJHQHJDWLYH 5 167
3VWHSFKDQJHSRVLWLYH 5 367
0DUNVSDFHUDWLR , 5$7

Brief description
Triangular generator with adjustable frequency and amplitude for imprinting of "faults" on
traversing drives for winding up textile threads. This generator has the following features:
● Positive and negative P step change, can be adjusted separately.
● Synchronization to a master drive with an adjustable phase shift.
● Enable input.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

340 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Technology
7.5 WBG

Block diagram

:REEOHV\QFKURQL]DWLRQLQSXW6,1
6,1

(1

 3+, 3+,

$03
 :REEOH
V\QFKURQL]DWLRQ
 RXWSXW6287
):
 6287
W>V@  5$7   ):

):
3+,


:REEOHWULDQJXODUJHQHUDWRU 5$7
:6

$03
167 167
 :6



367 <
 


5$7 $03 367


Method of operation
The wobble generator is enabled with EN = 1. This triggers the output of wobble signal WS
and synchronization signal SOUT. The signal generation always starts with a positive zero
crossover or with a positive edge of synchronization output SOUT. If EN is reset, wobble
generation continues up to the next zero crossover of WS. The generator is then disabled and
SOUT = 0 is set. Input PHI (0-360°) enables a phase shift between the positive edge of the
synchronization input SIN to be set along with the start of the wobble signal. The signal is then
generated for a signal period. For continuous signal generation, SIN must be used periodically
as a trigger. If the generation of the preceding signal period is still running at a new start time,
this generation is canceled. Special case PHI = 360 enables free-running wobble generation
to be activated. The signal generation runs periodically and is decoupled from synchronization
input SIN. The wobble signal is injected into input x and output at output Y.

Attributes of the wobble signal

Input Value range Description

AMP 0..0.2 Relative amplitude of the wobble signal
FW 0.1..120 rpm Frequency of the wobble signal

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 341
Technology
7.5 WBG

Input Value range Description

PHI 0..360° Phase shift of wobble signal relative to a positive edge at
synchronization input SIN
NST 0.0..1.0 Relative, negative step change of wobble signal at the end
of the positive signal edge
PST 0.0..1.0 Relative, positive step change of wobble signal at the end of
the negative signal edge
RAT 0..100% Ratio of rising signal edge / signal period

Effective amplitude(WS) = ABS(X) * AMP

Effective negative step change = -ABS(X) * AMP * NST
Effective positive step change = ABS(X) * AMP * PST
Ratio of rising edge / falling edge = RAT/(100-RAT)
If the attributes of the wobble signal are changed dynamically, the changed attributes take
effect at the start of a new signal period (positive zero crossover).

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
SIN Synchronization signal (master) 0 0/1
EN Enable 0 0/1
AMP Amplitude 0.0 0..0.2
FW Wobble frequency 60 0.1..120
PHI Phase offset 360 0..360
NST P step change, negative 0.0 0.0..1.0
PST P step change, positive 0.0 0.0..1.0
RAT Mark-space ratio 50 0..100
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL
WS Wobble signal 0.0 REAL
SOUT Synchronization signal (slave) 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

342 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
Closed-loop control 8
8.1 DEL
Dead zone element

Symbol

DEL
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
5HVSRQVHWKUHVKROG 5 %

Brief description
● Adjustable dead band
● Set zero-point symmetric value range to zero

Method of operation
● If the absolute value of X is less than B, then Y = 0
● If X is greater than or equal to B, then Y = X - B
● If X is less than or equal to B, then Y = X + B
The zero-point symmetric dead band can be set with operating value B.

Algorithm:
with boundary condition B >=0
For B < 0, the following applies for all X: Y = X.

;+%IRU;<= %

<=IRU %<;<%
;%IRU;>=%


Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 343
Closed-loop control
8.1 DEL

Block diagram

; <

Description of the DCC standard blocks

344 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.1 DEL

XY diagram

<

%

%
;

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
B Response threshold 0.0 REAL
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 345
Closed-loop control
8.1 DEL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

346 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.2 DEZ

8.2 DEZ
Dead zone element

Symbol

DEZ
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
7ULSSLQJYDOXH 5 7+

Brief description
● Adjustable dead zone
● Set zero-point symmetric value range to zero

Method of operation
If the absolute value of X is less than TH, then Y = 0.
If the absolute value of X is greater than or equal to TH, then Y = X.
The zero-point symmetric dead zone can be set with operating value TH.

Algorithm:

;IRU;<= 7+

<=IRU 7+<;<7+
;IRU;>=7+

with boundary condition TH >=0
For TH< 0, the following applies for all X: Y = X.

Block diagram

7+

; <

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 347
Closed-loop control
8.2 DEZ

XY diagram

<

7+

7+ ;

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
TH Tripping value 0.0 REAL
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Description of the DCC standard blocks

348 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.2 DEZ

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 349
Closed-loop control
8.3 DIF

8.3 DIF
Derivative action element

Symbol

DIF
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
'HULYDWLYHDFWLRQWLPHFRQVWDQW PV 76 7'

Brief description
Block with derivative-action response

Method of operation
● Output variable Y is proportional to the change velocity of input variable X, multiplied by
the derivative-action time constant TD.
● Discrete values are calculated according to the algorithm:

Algorithm:

7'
<Q=(;Q;Q  )⋅
7$

Yn Value of Y in scan interval n

Xn Value of X in scan interval n
Xn-1 Value of X in scan interval n-1

Block diagram

7'

; <

Description of the DCC standard blocks

350 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.3 DIF

XY diagram

; <

7$ 7$ W

<

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
TD Derivative-action time constant 0 SDTIME
( ms )
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 351
Closed-loop control
8.4 DT1

8.4 DT1
Smoothing element

Symbol

DT1
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH'7
6PRRWKLQJWLPHFRQVWDQW PV 76 7 <37 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOHRIVPRRWKLQJHOHPHQW
'HULYDWLYHDFWLRQWLPHFRQVWDQW PV 76 7'
6HWWLQJYDOXH 5 69
6HW %2 6

Brief description
Block with derivative-action response and smoothing. The DT1 output can be set.

Method of operation

Setting function not active (S = 0)

Input variable X (dynamically delayed by smoothing time constant T1), is given to a derivative-
action element and block output YPT.
Output variable Y of the entire DT1 element is proportional to the change velocity of YPT
(differential quotient), multiplied by the derivative-action time constant TD.
T1 determines the steepness of the decline of the output variable. It specifies the time at which
the transfer function fell to 37% of X-TD/T1 after smoothing and differentiation. If T1/TA is
sufficiently large (T1/TA>10), the transfer function corresponds to the characteristic curve of
Y(t) = X·(TD/T1)·e-t/T1
with t = n·TA

Algorithm:

7'
<Q= ⋅(;Q<37Q  )
7

7$
<37Q=<37Q  + ⋅(;Q<37Q  )
7

YPTn Value of YPT in scan interval n

Yn Value of Y in scan interval n
Xn Value of X in scan interval n
YPTn-1 Value of YPT in scan interval n-1

The larger T1/TA is, the smaller is the amplitude change on Y and YPT from one sampling
time to the next. TA is the sampling time in which the block is configured. The larger that TD/

Description of the DCC standard blocks

352 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.4 DT1

TA is, the larger the amplitude change on Y from one sampling time to the next. TD and T1
are limited internally: TD >= 0, T1 >= TA.

Setting function active (S = 1)

With active setting function, the setting value SV is applied at the dt1 output Y (Y=SV), the
following results for the output of the smoothing element:

7
<37Q=; Q ⋅69Q
7'
for TD ≠ 0
The internal limitations for T1 and TD apply in this case. When TD=0, the output variables
remain unchanged, as long as S=1.

Block diagram

7 7' 69

37 '
; <

<37
6

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 353
Closed-loop control
8.4 DT1

XY diagram

<

< I ;W

; 7'
7
< W 7 [7'7

W
7

Initialization
If input S is logic 1 at the initialization, the setting value SV is applied at output Y and YPT =
T1/TD*(X-SV) set.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
T1 Smoothing time constant (ms) 0.0 SDTIME
TD Derivative-action time constant 0.0 SDTIME
( ms )
SV Setting value 0.0 REAL
S Set 0 BOOL
Y Output variable DT1 0.0 REAL
YPT Output variable of smoothing ele‐ 0.0 REAL
ment

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

354 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.4 DT1

Can be loaded on‐ Yes

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 355
Closed-loop control
8.5 INT

8.5 INT
Integrator

Symbol

INT
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
8SSHUOLPLW 5 /8 48 %2 ,QWHJUDWRUDWXSSHUOLPLW
/RZHUOLPLW 5 // 4/ %2 ,QWHJUDWRUDWORZHUOLPLW
6HWWLQJYDOXH 5 69
,QWHJUDODFWLRQWLPHFRQVWDQW PV 76 7,
6HW %2 6

Brief description
● Block with integral behavior
● Set initial value
● Adjustable integral-action time constant
● Adjustable limits
● For normal integrator mode, a positive limit value must be specified for LU and a negative
limit value for LL

Method of operation
The change in output variable Y is proportional to input variable X and inversely proportional
to the integral-action time constant TI.
The output Y of the integrator can be limited via the inputs LU and LL. If the output reaches
one of the two limits, a message is sent via the outputs QU or QL. If LL >= LU, then output Y
= LU.
The calculation of the discrete values (TA is the sampling time in which the block is configured)
is performed according to the following algorithm:

Algorithm:

7$
<Q=<Q  + ⋅;Q
7,

Yn Value of Y in scan interval n

Yn-1 Value of Y in scan interval n-1
Xn Value of X in scan interval n

When S = 1, the output variable Y is set to the setting value SV. Two functions can be realized
via S:
Track integrator (Y = SV)

Description of the DCC standard blocks

356 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.5 INT

The binary input is S = 1 and the setting value SV is changed. If applicable, the output makes
a jump to the setting value immediately after the setting operation.
Set integrator to initial value SV
S is switched to 1. S is then set to 0, and the integrator starts from SV in the direction specified
by the polarity of input variable X.

Block diagram

69 7, // /8

48
; <
4/
6

Truth table(s)

S Condition Y QU QL Operating mode

0 LL<Yn-1+X×TA/TI<LU Yn 0 0 Integration
0 Yn-1+X×TA/TI >= LU LU 1 0 INT at upper limit
0 Yn-1+X×TA/TI <= LL LL 0 1 INT at lower limit
1 LL<SV<LU SVn 0 0 Set
1 SV >= LU LU 1 0 INT at upper limit
1 SV <= LL LL 0 1 INT at lower limit

Truth table for LL>= LU

S Condition Y QU QL Operating mode

(any) LL >= LU LU 1 1 INT at upper limit

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
LU Upper limit 0.0 REAL
LL Lower limit 0.0 REAL
SV Setting value 0.0 REAL
TI Integral-action time constant (ms) 0.0 SDTIME
S Set 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 357
Closed-loop control
8.5 INT

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL
QU Integrator at upper limit 0 0/1
QL Integrator at lower limit 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

358 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.6 LIM

8.6 LIM
Limiter (REAL type)

Symbol

LIM
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
8SSHUOLPLW 5 /8 48 %2 ,QSXWYDULDEOHDWXSSHUOLPLW
/RZHUOLPLW 5 // 4/ %2 ,QSXWYDULDEOHDWORZHU
OLPLW

Brief description
● Block for the limitation
● Adjustable upper and lower limit
● Indication when set limits are reached

Method of operation
This block transfers the input variable X to its output Y, during which the input variable is limited
depending on LU and LL.
If the input variable reaches the upper limit LU, then output QU = 1 is set.
If the input variable reaches the lower limit LL, then output QL = 1 is set.
If the lower limit is greater than or equal to the upper limit, then output Y is set to the upper
limit LU.

Algorithm:

/8IRU;≥/8

<=;IRU//<;</8
//IRU;≤//

With the boundary condition: LL<LU

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 359
Closed-loop control
8.6 LIM

Block diagram

// /8

48
; <
4/

Truth table(s)

Condition Y QU QL Operating mode

LL < X < LU X 0 0
X >= LU LU 1 0 Input variable at upper limit
X <= LL LL 0 1 Input variable at lower limit

Truth table for LL>= LU

Condition Y QU QL Operating mode

LL >= LU LU 1 1 Input variable at upper limit

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
LU Upper limit 0.0 REAL
LL Lower limit 0.0 REAL
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL
QU Input variable at upper limit 1 0/1
QL Input variable at lower limit 1 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

360 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.6 LIM

Can be loaded on‐ Yes

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 361
Closed-loop control
8.7 LIM_D

8.7 LIM_D
Limiter (DOUBLE INTEGER type)

Symbol

LIM_D
,QSXWYDULDEOH ', ; < ', 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
8SSHUOLPLW ', /8 48 %2 ,QSXWYDULDEOHDWXSSHUOLPLW
/RZHUOLPLW ', // 4/ %2 ,QSXWYDULDEOHDWORZHU
OLPLW

Brief description
● Block for the limitation of the DOUBLE INTEGER type
● Adjustable upper and lower limit
● Indication when set limits are reached

Method of operation
This block transfers the input variable X to its output Y, during which the input variable is limited
depending on LU and LL.
If the input variable reaches the upper limit LU, then output QU = 1 is set.
If the input variable reaches the lower limit LL, then output QL = 1 is set.
If the lower limit is greater than or equal to the upper limit, then output Y is set to the upper
limit LU.

Algorithm:

/8IRU;≥/8

<=;IRU//<;</8
//IRU;≤//

With the boundary condition: LL<LU

Description of the DCC standard blocks

362 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.7 LIM_D

Block diagram

// /8

48
; <
4/

Truth table(s)

Condition Y QU QL Operating mode

LL < X < LU X 0 0
X >= LU LU 1 0 Input variable at upper limit
X <= LL LL 0 1 Input variable at lower limit

Truth table for LL >= LU

Condition Y QU QL Operating mode

LL >= LU LU 1 1 Input variable at upper limit

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0 DINT
LU Upper limit 0 DINT
LL Lower limit 0 DINT
Y Output variable 0 DINT
QU Input variable at upper limit 1 0/1
QL Input variable at lower limit 1 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 363
Closed-loop control
8.7 LIM_D

Can be loaded on‐ Yes

line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

364 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.8 MVS

8.8 MVS
Sliding-type mean value generator

Symbol

MVS
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
1XPEHURIF\FOHVRYHUZKLFK , 1 4) %2 (UURU
WKHPHDQYDOXHLVJHQHUDWHG
0D[LPXPQXPEHURIF\FOHV , 10;
6HWWLQJYDOXH 5 69
6HW %2 6

Brief description
The block calculates a sliding-type mean value via the input variable X.

Method of operation
The mean value is generated over the last N cycles.

 N
<N= ⋅ ∑ ;L
1 L= N 1

Xk = X in cycle k
k = 0 is the current cycle
The number of cycles can be changed in the range 1 ≤ N ≤ NMX. The maximum number of
cycles is specified through NMX and cannot be changed during operation. The block limits
input N to the range of 1 ≤ N ≤ NMX. The buffer for the input values is always filled up to NMAX,
irrespective of N. In this way, the block can re-determine the current mean value via all variables
when there is a change in the window length.
The mean value is set to set value SV as long as S = 1.

Initialization
At the initialization, NMX is used to specify the maximum size of the mean value buffer for the
X values. For this reason, NMX should be set to the maximum value of N required under
operating conditions. The value of NMX is limited to the range of values between 1 and 1,000.
If there is not enough memory for NMX on the target device, or if NMX is limited, output QF is
set to 1 and output Y retains its default value during cyclic operation. As NMX cannot be
changed dynamically during operation, NMX should be specified as a constant.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 365
Closed-loop control
8.8 MVS

Application areas
The block can be used as ramp-function generator or filter block for the mean value generation.
It acts as a low pass and band-stop filter for frequencies fk.

N
IN=
1⋅7$
k = 1, 2, ...

;W

 7$ ,QSXWYDULDEOH

<W

VFDQF\FOH7$

2XWSXWYDULDEOH
1 
 7$
W

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
N Number of cycles over which the 10 1...1000
mean value is generated
NMX Maximum number of cycles 100 1...1000
SV Setting value 0.0 REAL
S Set 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL
QF Error 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

366 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.8 MVS

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be inserted on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 367
Closed-loop control
8.9 PC

8.9 PC
P controller

Symbol

PC
6HWSRLQW 5 : < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
6HWSRLQW 5 : <( 5 6\VWHPGHYLDWLRQ
6HWSRLQW 5 : 48 %2 &RQWUROOHUDWXSSHUOLPLW
$FWXDOYDOXH 5 ; 4/ %2 &RQWUROOHUDWORZHUOLPLW
8SSHUOLPLW 5 /8
/RZHUOLPLW 5 //
3DFWLRQFRHIILFLHQW 5 .3
&RQWUROOHUHQDEOH %2 (1

Brief description
● P controller with 3 setpoint inputs and 1 actual value input
● Sign reversal of actual value in block
● Indication when set limits are reached
● For normal controller operation, a positive limit value must be specified for LU and a
negative limit value for LL.

Method of operation
The three setpoints W1, W2, and W3 are added and the actual value X is subtracted from the
setpoint total. The result YE is multiplied by the proportional coefficient KP and given to output
Y.

Algorithm:
Y = KP · YE = KP · (W1 + W2 + W3 - X)
YE = W1 + W2 + W3 - X
The system deviation YE is always calculated, irrespective of the operating mode, and is lead
out separately.
The output Y of the controller can be limited via the inputs LU and LL. If the output Y reaches
one of the two limits, a message is sent via the outputs QU and QL. If LL >= LU, then output
Y = LU.
The controller is enabled with EN = 1. If EN = 0, the output variable Y is set to zero. The
controller is disabled. The binary outputs QU and QL are treated in this case as if KP*YE
equaled zero.
The controller operates inverted when a negative KP value is selected (inversion amplifier).

Description of the DCC standard blocks

368 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.9 PC

Block diagram

:
.3 // /8
:
48
: <( <
4/
;
(1 <(

Truth table(s)

EN Condition Y QU QL Operating mode

0 LL< 0 <LU 0 0 0 Controller disable
0 LU <= 0 0 1 0 Controller disable
0 LL >= 0 0 0 1 Controller disable
1 LL<YE * KP<LU KP × YE 0 0 Controller enable
1 YE * KP >= LU LU 1 0 Controller at upper limit
1 YE * KP <= LL LL 0 1 Controller at upper limit

Truth table for LL >= LU

EN Condition Y QU QL Operating mode

0 None 0 1 1 Controller disable
0 LL >= LU LU 1 1 Controller at upper limit

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
W1 Setpoint 1 0.0 REAL
W2 Setpoint 2 0.0 REAL
W3 Setpoint 3 0.0 REAL
X Actual value 0.0 REAL
LU Upper limit 0.0 REAL
LL Lower limit 0.0 REAL
KP P-action coefficient 0.0 REAL
EN Controller enable 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL
YE System deviation 0.0 REAL

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 369
Closed-loop control
8.9 PC

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
QU Controller at upper limit 1 0/1
QL Controller at lower limit 1 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

370 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.10 PIC

8.10 PIC
PI controller

Symbol

PIC
6HWSRLQW 5 : < 5 2XWSXWYDOXH
6HWSRLQW 5 : <( 5 6\VWHPGHYLDWLRQ
$FWXDOYDOXH 5 ; <, 5 ,QWHJUDWRUYDOXH
$FWXDOYDOXH 5 ; 48 %2 &RQWUROOHUDWXSSHUOLPLW
3UHFRQWUROOHUYDOXH 5 :3 4/ %2 &RQWUROOHUDWORZHUOLPLW
8SSHUOLPLW 5 /8
/RZHUOLPLW 5 //
6HWWLQJYDOXHLQWHJUDWRU 5 69
3DFWLRQFRHIILFLHQW 5 .3
,QWHJUDOWLPH PV 76 71
,FRQWUROOHU %2 ,&
&RQWUROOHUHQDEOH %2 (1
6HWLQWHJUDWRU %2 6
5HWDLQLQWHJUDWRUYDOXH %2 +,

Brief description
● Universal PI controller, can be switched to P controller or I controller modes. Can be used
as a speed controller or a primary controller. Suitable for dynamic override control
Flexible integrator functions:
● Set initial value ⇒ Load SV to integrator
● Retain current value of integrator ⇒ P controller
● Integrator control by SV
● Integrator control by controller limiting
● Gain shutdown ⇒ I controller
Overall controller functions:
● Independent setting and modification of the following variables during operation:
– Proportional coefficient KP
– Integral action time TN
– Controller limits LU and LL
– Precontroller value WP, e.g. for acceleration injection
– Second actual value input X2, e.g. for droop injection
● Indication when set limits are reached

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 371
Closed-loop control
8.10 PIC

Method of operation
The actual value total (X1+X2) is subtracted from the setpoint total (W1+W2) according to the
equation:
YE = (W1 + W2) - (X1 + X2)
The result, system deviation YE, is then multiplied by the adjustable proportional coefficient
KP. The product is carried to the output summation device and the integrator. The adjustable
integral time TN determines the integration behavior of the controller. The change in output
variable YI is proportional to input variable KP*YE and inversely proportional to the integral-
action time TN. The integrator value YI is also given to the output summation device. Another
value with the correct sign can be added to output value Y via input WP.
Discrete values are calculated according to the algorithm:

Algorithm:

 7$  
<Q=<Q  +.3⋅+ ⋅<(Q<(Q  
 71  
With the boundary conditions: LL<Y<LU and LL<LU

Yn Value of Y in scan interval n

Yn-1 Value of Y in scan interval n-1

TA is the sampling time in which the block is configured.

Block diagram

: .3 ,& 71 69 :3 // /8
:
<( 3 .3 <( :3Q 48
<3Q
<
;
 4/
; <K

! 
<,!/8
+, <,//

(1 , <,
6 6LJQ

<(

Description of the DCC standard blocks

372 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.10 PIC

XY diagram

.3 <(

/8

<,

//

/8

<
.3 <(
71

//  

.3 <(DEVROXWHYDOXHIRU
&XUYH FRQWLQXHG &XUYH
LQWHJUDWLRQRI<,

Curves 1 and 2 show the characteristic of Y and YI during YE jumps:

● Curve 1, normal operation, no limiting
● Curve 2, with use of limiting (e.g. LL)
For 2) a decay of YE*KP is expected, but this is canceled by the continued integration in 1).
Operating modes and control of the controller
Output value Y and integrator value YI of the controller can be limited via the inputs LU and
LL. When the set limits are reached by output variable Y, a message is issued with QU = 1 of
QL = 1.
The following priority sequence applies for the control inputs:
EN before IC before S before HI.
Command input at the control inputs:

Control input Value Functions

EN 1 Controller enable
IC 1 Change-over from PI controller to I controller
S 1 Accept integrator setting value, do not integrate
HI 1 Retain integrator output YI, do not integrate

The combination of commands at the control inputs and the possible operating modes can be
found in the truth tables.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 373
Closed-loop control
8.10 PIC

In normal controller operation, LL <= 0 <= LU and LL < Yn < LU. However, other settings,
explained below, are possible. To this end, the algorithm is converted appropriately:
Yn = KP·YEn + YIn + WPn
There are 5 different operating conditions in conjunction with LU and LL:

No. Condition Yn
LL < LU
1 LL < KP*YEn + YIn + WPn < LU KP*YEn+YIn+WPn
2 KP*YEn + YIn + WPn >= LU LU
3 KP*YEn + Yn + WPn <= LL LL
LL=LU
4 None LU
LL > LU
5 None LU

Integrator control by own limiting

If output Y comes up against one of the set limitations LL or LU during the control process,
integrator YI will continue to run if applicable, until it comes up against the limitation itself and
is retained there.
If the controller is at the limit and the limit value is changed, output Y momentarily assumes
the new value as long as an override is defined. However, the integrator is updated to the new
limiting value at change velocity YIn.

Truth table(s)
Operating condition 1

EN IC S HI ΔYIn YIn Yn Operating mode Remark

0 * * * * 0 0 Controller disa‐ KP, RN, WP, LU, LL,
ble YE any value

EN IC S HI ΔYIn YIn Yn Operating mode Remark

1 0 0 0 KP*YEn×TA/TN YIn-1+ΔYIn KP*YEn+YIn PI controller Controller enable, nor‐
+WPn mal operation
1 1 0 0 KP*YEn*TA/TN YIn-1+ΔYIn YIn+WPn I controller P component = 0
1 0 1 * * SVn KP*YEn+YIn P controller, inte‐ YIn = SVn
+WPn grator guidance
1 1 1 * * SVn YIn+WPn I controller, inte‐ YIn = SVn
grator guidance
1 0 0 0 0 YIn-1 KP*YEn+YIn+WP P controller, inte‐ YIn = YIn-1
grator = constant
1 1 0 0 0 YIn-1 YIn+WPn I controller, inte‐ YIn = YIn-1
grator = constant

*= any value

Description of the DCC standard blocks

374 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.10 PIC

Operating condition 2

EN IC S HI ΔYIn YIn Yn Operating mode Remark

1 0 0 0 KP*YEn×TA/TN YIn-1+ΔYIn for LU PI controller at YIn integrated -> LU,
YIn-1 upper limit possibly with (-)
< LUYIn-1- ΔYIn
for
YIn-1> LULU for
YIn-1 = LU
1 1 0 0 KP*YEn*TA/TN YIn-1+ΔYIn for LU I controller at up‐ YIn integrated -> LU,
YIn-1 per limit possibly with (-)
< LUYIn-1- ΔYIn
for
YIn-1> LULU for
YIn-1 = LU
1 0 1 * * SVn for SVn < LU‐ LU P controller at YIn = SVn or YIn = LU
LU upper limit
for SVn >= LU
1 1 1 * * SVn for SVn < LU‐ LU I controller at up‐ YIn = SVn or YIn = LU,
LU per limit P component = 0
for SVn >= LU
1 0 0 1 0 YIn-1 LU P controller, inte‐ YIn = YIn-1 or YIn-1 = LU
grator = constant
1 1 0 1 0 YIn-1 LU I controller, inte‐ YIn = YIn-1 or YIn-1 = LU,
grator = constant P component = 0

*= any value
Operating condition 3

EN IC S HI ΔYIn YIn Yn Operating mode Remark

1 0 0 0 KP*YEn×TA/TN YIn-1+ΔYIn for LL PI controller at YIn integrated -> LL,
YIn-1 lower limit possibly with (-)
< LLYIn-1- ΔYIn for
YIn-1 > LLLL for
YIn-1 = LL
1 1 0 0 KP*YEn*TA/TN YIn-1+ΔYIn for LL I controller at YIn integrated -> LL,
YIn-1 lower limit possibly with (-)
< LLYIn-1- ΔYIn for
YIn-1 > LLLL for
YIn-1 = LL
1 0 1 * * SVn for SVn < LL P controller at YIn = SVn or YIn = LL
LLLL lower limit
for SVn >= LL
1 1 1 * * SVn for SVn < LL I controller at YIn = SVn or YIn = LL,
LLLL lower limit P component = 0
for SVn >= LL

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 375
Closed-loop control
8.10 PIC

EN IC S HI ΔYIn YIn Yn Operating mode Remark

1 0 0 1 0 YIn-1 LL P controller, inte‐ YIn = YIn-1 or YIn-1 = LL
grator = constant
1 1 0 1 0 YIn-1 LL I controller, inte‐ YIn = YIn-1 or YIn-1 = LL,
grator = constant P component = 0

*= any value
Operating condition 4

EN IC S HI ΔYIn YIn Yn Operating mode Remark

1 * * * * * LL=LU See operating -
condition 2 or 3

*= any value
Operating condition 5

EN IC S HI ΔYIn YIn Yn Operating mode Remark

1 * * * KP*YEnTA/TN YIn-1+ΔYIn for LU PI controller at -
YIn-1 < LU-YIn-1- upper limit
ΔYIn for YIn-1 >
LULU for YIn-1 =
LU

Depending on the direction of the limit value change, the sign of the integration is inverted if
necessary.

Transfer functions
Transfer function during controller override for operating conditions 2, 3 and 5:

Description of the DCC standard blocks

376 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.10 PIC

.3 <(

/8

/8

<,
//
/8

//
// '<,Q
/8

/8


< //

/8


//
//

6HFWLRQ 6HFWLRQ 6HFWLRQ 6HFWLRQ

Section 1: Characteristic with LUn > LUn-1 according to operating condition 2

Section 2: Characteristic with LLn < LLn-1 according to operating condition 3
Section 3: Characteristic with LLn > LLn-1 according to operating condition 3, for
limit shift relative to the control direction with
sign inversion at the integrator input
Section 4: Characteristic with LLn > LUn according to operating condition 5
1) Jump by KP*YE, because the integrator was run up to the limit.

Change-over from PI mode to I mode

When EN = 1 and IC = 1, the P component is retained at 0, and the controller is switched from
PI mode to I mode. Output Y assumes integrator value YI. If this occurs during the control
process, then a jump by -KP*YE will occur at output Y During a reset to IC = 0, the P component
is reset to the current value of KP*YE. The controller again exhibits PI behavior. If this occurs
during the control process, then a jump by KP * YE will occur at output Y.

Change-over from PI mode to P mode

If block inputs EN = 1 and HI = 1, the integrator YI is retained, and a bumpless controller change-
over takes place from PI mode to P mode. YI continues to act as an addend on output Y.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 377
Closed-loop control
8.10 PIC

During a reset to HI = 0, the integrator is enabled again. The controller again exhibits PI
behavior.

Transfer functions
Transfer functions during changeover without controller override: Examples for EN=1∧S=0

3,,DFWLRQ ,3,DFWLRQ

 
,&  

.3 <( .3 <(

<
< <,

.3 <( .3 <(

<,

3,3DFWLRQ 33,DFWLRQ
 
+,  

.3 <( .3 <(

<
<

<, <,

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
W1 Setpoint 1 0.0 REAL
W2 Setpoint 2 0.0 REAL
X1 Actual value 1 0.0 REAL
X2 Actual value 2 0.0 REAL
WP Precontroller value 0.0 REAL
LU Upper limit 0.0 REAL
LL Lower limit 0.0 REAL
SV Setting value, integrator 0.0 REAL
KP P-action coefficient 0.0 REAL
TN Integral time (ms) 0.0 SDTIME
IC I controller 0 0/1
EN Controller enable 0 0/1
S Set integrator 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

378 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.10 PIC

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
HI Retain integrator value 0 0/1
Y Output value 0.0 REAL
YE System deviation 0.0 REAL
YI Integrator value 0.0 REAL
QU Controller at upper limit 1 0/1
QL Controller at lower limit 1 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 379
Closed-loop control
8.11 PT1

8.11 PT1
Delay element

Symbol

PT1
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
6PRRWKLQJWLPHFRQVWDQW PV 76 7
6HWWLQJYDOXH 5 69
6HW %2 6

Brief description
● First-order delay element with setting function
● Use as smoothing element

Method of operation

Setting function not active (S = 0)

Input variable X, dynamically delayed by smoothing time constant T, is given to output Y.
T determines the steepness of the rise of the output variable. It indicates the time at which the
transfer function has risen to 63% of its end value.
After t = 3T, the transfer function reaches approximately 95% of its end value.
The internally fixed proportional gain is 1 and does not vary.
If T/TA (T/TA > 10) is sufficiently large, the transfer function corresponds to the characteristic
of
Y(t) = X·(1-e-t/T)
with t = n * TA.
Discrete values are calculated according to the algorithm:

Algorithm:

7$
<Q=<Q  + ⋅(;Q<Q  )
7

Yn Value of Y in scan interval n

Yn-1 Value of Y in scan interval n-1
Xn Value of X in scan interval n

Setting function active (S = 1)

When the setting function is active, the actual setting value SVn is accepted at the output
variable: Yn = SVn

Description of the DCC standard blocks

380 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.11 PT1

Block diagram

7 69

; <

Time diagram

<

< I
[W
< W 7 ;
;

; 7 W
<

Initialization
If input S is logic 1 at the initialization, the setting value SV is applied at output Y.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
T Smoothing time constant (ms) 0.0 SDTIME
SV Setting value 0.0 REAL
S Set 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 381
Closed-loop control
8.11 PT1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

382 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.12 RGE

8.12 RGE
Ramp-function generator

Symbol

RGE
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
1RUPDOL]DWLRQ 5 150 <$ 5 $FFHOHUDWLRQYDOXH
8SSHUOLPLW 5 /8 4( %2 2XWSXW< OLPLWHGLQSXW
/RZHUOLPLW 5 // ;
6HWWLQJYDOXHRXWSXW 5 69 48 %2 8SSHUOLPLWUHDFKHG
5DPSXSWLPH PV 76 78 4/ %2 /RZHUOLPLWUHDFKHG
5DPSGRZQWLPH PV 76 7'
+LJKHU %2 &8
/RZHU %2 &'
2XWSXW LQSXW %2 &)
6HW %2 6

Brief description
● Ramp-function generator for limiting the change velocity of input variable X
● Output variable can be limited
Independent setting and modification of the following variables during operation:
● Ramp-up and ramp-down time
● Output limits LU and LL
● Setting value
Flexible ramp-function generator functions:
● Integrating correction to setpoint X
● Setting of initial value for ramp-function generator output (-> load SV to integrator)
● Integrating increase and decrease of ramp-function generator output

Method of operation
The block contains an integrator with two integration time constants that can be set separately.
Output Y changes according to the algorithm:
Yn = Yn-1+YAn
The acceleration value YA is calculated separately for the ramp up and ramp down and is
output on an output.
The process in which output value Y moves away from zero is called ramp up.
The process in which output value Y moves toward zero is called ramp down.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 383
Closed-loop control
8.12 RGE

Block diagram

&8 78 7' 69 // /8
&'
FRQWURO
&)
ORJLF
;
<

<$

4(
6
48
4,

The following applies for the ramp up acceleration value:

7$
<$= ⋅150IRU<>
78

7$
<$= ⋅150IRU<<
78
The following applies for the ramp down acceleration value:

7$
<$= ⋅150IRU<>
7'

7$
<$= ⋅150IRU<<
7'
The change-over between ramp up time and ramp down time takes place during a direction
change or at the zero crossover of the transfer function.
The operating mode is predefined by means of control logic, depending on the logic states of
the control inputs S, CF, CU, and CD.
The output variable can be limited by means of the inputs LU and LL. When the set limits are
reached by Y, the binary outputs QU or QL are set to 1. The binary output QE becomes 1 when
Y = X.

Ramp-up time and ramp-down time

The ramp-up time TU is the time in which the absolute value of the output variable increases
by NRM.
The ramp-down time TD is the time in which the absolute value of the output variable decreases
by NRM. Ramp up time and ramp down time can be selected differently.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

384 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.12 RGE

The smaller TA/TU or TA/TD is, the smaller is the amplitude change on Y from one scan time
to the next. TA is the scan time in which the block is processed.
The following priority sequence applies for the control inputs:
S before CF before CU and CD.

Function of control inputs:

S=1 Load setting value SV in integrator; do not integrate.

CF=1 Correct output Y to setpoint X with integration.
CU=1 Correct output Y in the direction LU with integration
CD=1 Correct output Y in the direction LL with integration

Operating modes and control of the ramp-function generator

The combination of commands at the control inputs and the possible operating modes can be
found in the truth tables.
In normal ramp-up mode, LL <= 0 <= LU and LL< Yn < LU. However, other settings, explained
below, are possible.
The following applies to the setting LL >= LU: The LU limit is dominant over the LL limit.
Behavior of the integrator at the limitation
If output Y comes up against one of the set limits LL or LU during the control process, the
integrator value is retained. The output value Y is then kept constant until the integrator value
leaves the limit due to changes in the input variables.
If the integrator is at the limit and the limit value is changed, the integrator behaves differently
depending on the direction of the limit value change.
If the absolute value of a limit value is increased and it has been defined in the control logic
that the ramp-function generator should run in the same direction, the integrator continues to
integrate from the previously held value according to the set ramp up time, until the output
once again comes up against the limit value.
If the absolute value of the limit value is reduced, the integrator integrates from the previously
held value according to the set ramp down time, until the output again reaches the limit value.
TU and TD are limited internally: TU >= TA, TD >= TA

Truth table(s)

S CF CU CD YAn Yn Operating mode Remark

0 0 0 0 0 Yn-1 Stop Y is constant

LL < LU and LL < actual value Yn-1 < LU

S CF CU CD YAn Yn Operating mode Remark

1 * * * Jump SVn Set output to SV Any SV, fixed or variable
0 1 * * TA/TU;TA/ Yn-1+YAn Normal mode Y -> X TU for [X > Y ∧ Y >= 0] ∨ [X <Y ∧ Y <=
TD 0]
TD for [X > Y ∧ Y <0] ∨ [X < Y ∧ Y > 0]

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 385
Closed-loop control
8.12 RGE

S CF CU CD YAn Yn Operating mode Remark

0 0 1 0 TA/TU(TA/ Yn-1+YAn Touch upper limit value Y -> TU, TD as before, depending on start
TD) LU position
0 0 0 1 TA/TD(TA/ Yn-1+YAn Touch lower limit value Y -> LL TU, TD as before, depending on start
TU) position

* Arbitrary

Transfer function

; <
/8

;

150 150

78 7'
; ;

78 7' W

150

; 150
< ;

//

Example 1: CF = 1 with LL < LU and LL < X < LU, and X1=1.5, X2=X4 =0.0, X3=–1.5, LU=2.0,
LL=–2.0, TU > TD

Description of the DCC standard blocks

386 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.12 RGE


&8 

&' 

<
/8

W

//

Example 2: Motor potentiometer function with CU and CD and with LL < LU


6 

&)


&'


<
/8
;

69

W

//

Example 3: Set integrator with LL < LU

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 387
Closed-loop control
8.12 RGE


&8 
&' 

< ///8 //!/8 ///8

/8

/LPLW
SXOOHGLQ W

/LPLW /LPLW
SXOOHGLQ OHWRXW

//

Example 4: Change and swap limits

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
NRM Normalization 1.0 REAL
LU Upper limit 0.0 REAL
LL Lower limit 0.0 REAL
SV Setting value, output 0.0 REAL
TU Ramp-up time (ms) 0.0 SDTIME
TD Ramp-down time (ms) 0.0 SDTIME
CU Higher 0 0/1
CD Lower 0 0/1
CF Output = input 0 0/1
S Set 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL
YA Acceleration value 0.0 REAL
QE Output Y = limited input X 0 0/1
QU Upper limit reached 0 0/1
QL Lower limit reached 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

388 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.12 RGE

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 389
Closed-loop control
8.13 RGJ

8.13 RGJ
Ramp-function generator with jerk limiting

Symbol

RGJ
,QSXWYDULDEOH 5 ; < 5 2XWSXWYDULDEOH
1RUPDOL]DWLRQ7'78 5 150 </ 5 /LPLWHGRXWSXWYDULDEOH
&RQWUROHUURU 5 (9 <$ 5 $FFHOHUDWLRQYDOXH
8SSHUOLPLW 5 /8 <% 5 -HUNYDOXH
/RZHUOLPLW 5 // 4( %2 2XWSXW< OLPLWHGLQSXW
6HWWLQJYDOXHRXWSXW 5 69 ;
$FFHOHUDWLRQVHWWLQJYDOXH 5 $69 48 %2 8SSHUOLPLWUHDFKHG
:HLJKWLQJRIWKHVWDQGDUGGHYLDWLRQ 5 :' 4/ %2 /RZHUOLPLWUHDFKHG
5DPSXSWLPH PV 76 78
5DPSGRZQWLPH PV 76 7'
6PRRWKLQJWLPHGXULQJUDPSXS 76 758
PV
6PRRWKLQJWLPHGXULQJUDPSXS 76 75
PV
6PRRWKLQJWLPHGXULQJUDPSXS 76 75
PV
6PRRWKLQJWLPHGXULQJUDPSGRZQ 76 75'
PV
6PRRWKLQJWLPHGXULQJUDPSGRZQ 76 75
PV
6PRRWKLQJWLPHGXULQJUDPSGRZQ 76 75
PV
+LJKHU %2 &8
/RZHU %2 &'
2XWSXW LQSXW %2 &)
8SSHUOLPLWUHDFKHG %2 8/5
/RZHUOLPLWUHDFKHG %2 //5
6PRRWKLQJRQ %2 541
6HWDFFHOHUDWLRQ %2 6$
6HW %2 6
(QDEOH %2 (1

Brief description
● Ramp-function generator with jerk limiting and correction
● Ramp-function generator functions
● Set output Y or acceleration YA
● Correct ramp-function generator output to setpoint X with integration and jerk limiting
● Integrating increase and decrease of ramp-function generator output
● Correction of the ramp-function generator according to the system deviation of a lower-level
controller during limiting

Description of the DCC standard blocks

390 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.13 RGJ

Method of operation
The block limits the acceleration (change in velocity) and the jerk (change in acceleration) of
setpoints.
The following algorithms apply:

<Q=<Q  +<$Q

<$Q=<$Q  +<%Q
Acceleration value YA and jerk YB are calculated separately for ramp up and ramp down. This
requires configuration of the time values ramp up time TU and smoothing time during ramp up
TRU as well as ramp down TD and smoothing time during ramp down TRD.

The following applies for the acceleration value YA outside of the smoothing time during ramp
up:

7$
<$=<$PD[= ⋅150IRU<>
78

7$
<$=<$PD[= ⋅150IRU<<
78

The following applies for the acceleration value YA outside the smoothing time during ramp-
down:

7$
<$=<$PD[= ⋅150IRU<>
7'

7$
<$=<$PD[= ⋅150IRU<<
7'

The following applies for the jerk value YB during the smoothing time during ramp up:

7$⋅<$PD[
<%=
758
or

7$⋅<$PD[ 7$⋅<$PD[
<%= <%=
75 75
The following applies for the jerk value YB during the smoothing time during ramp down:

7$⋅<$PD[
<%=
75'

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 391
Closed-loop control
8.13 RGJ

or

7$⋅<$PD[ 7$⋅<$PD[
<%= <%=
75 75
The operating mode is predefined by means of control logic, depending on the logic states of
the binary variables EN, S, SA, CF, CU, and CD.
Input variable X and thus indirectly output variable Y are limited by means of the block inputs
LU and LL. When the set limits are reached by Y, a message is issued to the binary outputs
with QU = 1 or QL = 1.
Binary output QE becomes 1 when output variable Y equals the limited value of input variable
X.
A ramp up process is subdivided into three phases:
Phase 1
When setpoint X increases, the maximum jerk YB (depending on TRU or TR1) is defined in
the first part. Thus, the acceleration increases proportionally over time; in this smoothing
phase, output Y rises quadratically over time.
Phase 2
Once the maximum acceleration YA has been reached according to the defined ramp-up time
TU, the acceleration is constant. Output variable Y rises proportionally over time.
Phase 3
In the third part, the acceleration is decreased proportionally over time. In this smoothing
phase, output variable Y approaches input variable X on YB quadratically over time (depending
on TRU or TR2).
A ramp-down process proceeds analogously.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

392 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.13 RGJ

Transfer function

;< 78 ;

150 <


W
758

75'

<$


W

<%

W

5DPSXSDQGUDPSGRZQ QRWWUXHWRVFDOH
Rounding times if TRU = 00.0 ms and TRD = 0.0 ms:

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 393
Closed-loop control
8.13 RGJ

;<
75 75 75 75

<

W
78 75

5DPSXSDQGUDPSGRZQ QRWWUXHWRVFDOH

Ramp-up time and ramp-down time

The ramp-up time TU is defined as the time in which the value of the output variable increases
proportionally over time by the value NRM.
The ramp-down time TD is defined as the time in which the value of the output variable
decreases proportionally over time by the value NRM.
Ramp up time and ramp down time can be selected differently.

Smoothing time during ramp up and ramp down

The smoothing time is defined as the time in which the output variable reaches the maximum
acceleration value starting from a constant initial value. During this time, the jerk value is
constant and not equal to zero (compare with phase 1).
The smoothing time is also defined as the time in which the output variable reaches a constant
final value starting from its maximum acceleration value (compare with phase 3). The
smoothing time is defined with TRU or TR1 and TR2 during a ramp-up process and with TRD
or TR3 and TR4 during a ramp-down process.
Each time the setpoint changes direction, the system switches from ramp-up to ramp-down or
from ramp-down to ramp-up with the associated smoothing processes, depending on the initial
position. The same applies accordingly when the ramp-up or ramp-down time is changes
during operation.
If a ramp-up follows a ramp-down whereby TRD and TD are small and TRU and TU are large,
YA is reduced during the ramp-down to the extent that no overshooting occurs in the following
ramp-up as long as the target value (X, LL, or LU) and the ramp-function generator times (TU,
TD, TRU, TRD) do not change.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

394 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.13 RGJ

If the smoothing (RQN=0) and the correction (ULR=LLR=0) are switched off, then the RGJ
block behaves the same as the RGE block.

Enabling smoothing (jerk limitation)

Smoothing is active during ramp up and ramp down when RQN=1.
Transfer function: Switching off smoothing during ramp up

541


;
;<

< 


78 W

<$

W

<%

W

Smoothing is off when RQN = 0. Ramp up/down takes place according to the ramp-up/ramp-
down time specified in TU or TD.
When the jerk limiting is switched off during the smoothing time, the remaining ramp up/down
also occurs with the ramp-up/ramp-down time specified in TU or TD.

"Smoothing off" mode

If you want to operate the block in this mode, proceed as follows:
● Set the connections TRU, TR1, TR2, TRD, TR3, and TR4 to "0" (all smoothing times are
"0").
● Set the RQN connection to "1" ("Smoothing on" mode).
With these settings, the RGJ block behaves as described in the "Smoothing off" mode (RQN
= 0).

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 395
Closed-loop control
8.13 RGJ

Operating modes and control of the ramp-function generator

The control inputs are defined as follows:

EN=1 Enable ramp-function generator

S=1 Set output Y to setting value SV; do not integrate
SA=1 Set acceleration YA to setting value ASV; do not integrate
CF=1 Correct output Y to setpoint X with integration.
CU=1 Correct output Y in the direction LU with integration
CD=1 Correct output Y in the direction LL with integration

Truth table(s)

EN S SA CF CU CD YAn Yn Operating Remark

mode
0 * * * * * 0 0 Inhibit Y=0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Yn-1 Inhibit Y = constant

*= any value

LL < LU and LL < actual value Yn-1 < LU

EN S SA CF CU CD YAn Yn Operating Remark

mode
1 1 * * * * Jump SVn Set output to Any SV, fixed or variable
SV
1 0 1 * * * ASVn Yn-1+YAn Set output to Any ASV, fixed or variable
integrator 1
on ASV
1 0 0 1 * * TA/TU(TA/ Yn-1+YAn Normal TU for [X>Y ∧ Y ≥ 0] ∨ [X<Y ∧ Y<=0]
TD) mode Y -> X TD for [X>Y ∧ Y<0] ∨ [X<Y ∧ Y>0]
QE=1 is set when Y=X is reached.
1 0 0 0 1 0 TA/TU(TA/ Yn-1+YAn Touch upper TU, TD as above, depending on the start po‐
TD) limit value Y - sition
> LU QU=1 and QE=1 are set when Y=LU is
reached.
1 0 0 0 0 1 TA/TD(TA/ Yn-1+YAn Touch lower TU, TD as above, depending on the start po‐
TU) limit value Y - sition
> LL QL=1 and QE=1 are set when Y=LL is
reached.

Correction of the ramp-function generator

In general, output Y of the ramp-function generator is carried as a setpoint to a lower-level
control loop (e.g. speed controller).
If this controller reaches the limit because of a change (e.g. during a ramp-up), the ramp-
function generator may not increase the output in accordance to the ramp-up times. In this
case, output Y is corrected using the system deviation EV and the weighting factor WD:
Yn = Yn-1-EVn+WD·EVk

Description of the DCC standard blocks

396 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.13 RGJ

n = scan interval n

k= the time at which the controller first reaches the limit (0 -> 1 edge on ULR or LLR)

8/5 7UDFNLQJ


W
;<
;
<


W

;


W

(9


([DPSOHRIWUDFNLQJPRGH W

In general, this correction can only be used for "classic control loops" (e.g. PI speed
controllers). The controller limits must be set correctly (e.g. equal to the current limits).
Generally, WD is 1.01 to 1.1 (> 1.0!). Jerk limiting is not active during the correction.
The binary outputs of the controller ("Upper/lower limit reached") are returned to the binary
inputs ULR or LLR. When the limit is reached, one of the two binary inputs ULR = 1 or LLR =
1 is set via the feedback on the RGJ block, and therefore the correction activated.
If the correction is not to be used, ULR and LLR must be set to 0.

8/5 //5 (9 ] 4/ 48

; < [ H [

5DPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU 3OFRQWUROOHU $FWXDWRUDQGFRQWUROOHG

([DPSOHFRQILJXUDWLRQRI V\VWHP
7UDFNLQJ

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 397
Closed-loop control
8.13 RGJ

Block diagram

&8 // /8 758 75 75' $69 7' 7' 69 // /8

&'
&RQWURO
&) ORJLF </
75
;  
<

$GMXVWPHQWIRU <$
VPRRWKLQJ <%
4(
6
48
6$
4/

The input value NRM is set internally to 1.0 when NRM < 1.0e-18.

Block connections

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
X Input variable 0.0 REAL
NRM Normalization, TD/TU 1.0 REAL
EV Control error 0.0 REAL
LU Upper limit 0.0 REAL
LL Lower limit 0.0 REAL
SV Setting value, output 0.0 REAL
ASV Acceleration setting value 0.0 REAL
WD Weighting of the standard deviation 0.0 REAL
TU Ramp-up time (ms) 0.0 SDTIME
TD Ramp-down time (ms) 0.0 SDTIME
TRU Smoothing time during ramp up 0.0 SDTIME
(ms)
TR1 Smoothing time during ramp up 0.0 SDTIME
(ms)
TR2 Smoothing time during ramp up 0.0 SDTIME
(ms)
TRD Smoothing time during ramp down 0.0 SDTIME
(ms)
TR3 Smoothing time during ramp down 0.0 SDTIME
(ms)
TR4 Smoothing time during ramp down 0.0 SDTIME
(ms)
CU Higher 0 0/1
CD Lower 0 0/1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

398 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Closed-loop control
8.13 RGJ

Block connection Description Default Value range Attrib‐

utes
CF Output = input 0 0/1
ULR Upper limit reached 0 0/1
LLR Lower limit reached 0 0/1
RQN Smoothing on 0 0/1
SA Set acceleration 0 0/1
S Set 0 0/1
EN Enable 0 0/1
Y Output variable 0.0 REAL
YL Limited output variable 0.0 REAL
YA Acceleration value 0.0 REAL
YB Jerk value 0.0 REAL
QE Output Y = limited input X 0 0/1
QU Upper limit reached 0 0/1
QL Lower limit reached 0 0/1

Configuration data

SIMOTION ✓
SINAMICS ✓
Can be loaded on‐ Yes
line
Special characteris‐ -
tics

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 399
Closed-loop control
8.13 RGJ

Description of the DCC standard blocks

400 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
Messages and parameters A
A.1 Messages
All objects: DCC, DCC_DC

F51000 DCC: Logon of the run-time group with sampling time management rejected
Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The OA application "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) attempted to log on a sampling time that cannot be implemented with the
sampling time management of the basic SINAMICS system. The logon was rejected.
Remedy: Try to assign this run-time group another fixed or free run-time group.
The assignment is set in STARTER in the context menu of the DCC chart via sampling times.
Then compile the chart and download it again into the drive unit.

F51001 DCC: No further hardware sampling times available

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The drive unit can no longer provide any additional hardware sampling times, whose sampling time deviates from the
sampling times.already logged on.
Remedy: The fault can be immediately acknowledged, as the system run-time group 0 (corresponds to "Do not calculate") was
assigned in p21000[x].
Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
yyyyxxxx hex
yyyy: The upper 16 bits of the fault value specify the number of the drive object.
xxxx: The lower 16 bits specify the index of the run-time group in p21000.
Note:
In window "Set run-time groups" in the context menu of the chart, p21000[0] is the topmost entry and p21000[9] the lowest
entry.
The current assignment of hardware sampling times can be read-out in r21008.

F51004 DCC: Sampling time of the free run-time group differs at download
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 401
Messages and parameters
A.1 Messages

Cause: In the STARTER/SCOUT project that was downloaded, the hardware sampling time of a free run-time group (1 <= p21000[i]
<= 256) was set to a value that was either too low or too high. The sampling time must be between 1 ms and the value
(r21003 - r21002).
If the sampling time of the selected free run-time group is < 1 ms, the equivalent value of 1 ms is used.
If the value >= r21003, then the sampling time is set to the next higher or the same software sampling time >= r21003.
The free run-time group involved is assigned as a minimum to one block.
If this fault still occurs during download after the selection in p21000[i] in the project has been corrected, please check
which run-time group is involved on the basis of the fault value (r0949). Only one F51004 fault is signaled at a time, even
if several run-time groups have been incorrectly parameterized in p21000[].
Fault value (r0949, decimal interpretation):
Number of the p21000 index of the run-time group where the sampling time was incorrectly set.
Number of the run-time group = fault value + 1
Note:
With SIMOTION D410, r21003 (unlike all the other Control Units) is automatically set the same as the PROFIBUS sampling
time.
Remedy: Correctly set the sampling time of the run-time group or remove all of the blocks from the run-time group.

F51005 DCC: Sampling time of the fixed run-time group differs online
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Generally, the sampling times of the fixed run-time groups correspond to the sampling times of the associated system
function (e.g. the sampling time of the fixed run-time group "BEFORE speed controller" generally corresponds to the
sampling of the speed controller p0115[1]).
The sampling time of a system function online was set to a lower value (e.g. with p0112, p0115, p0799, p4099) than the
smallest permissible sampling time that is allowed for the fixed run-time group belonging to this system function (1 ms).
The sampling time is set to 1 ms. The fixed run-time group involved is assigned as a minimum to one block.
Fault value (r0949, decimal interpretation):
Number of the p21000 index of the run-time group where the sampling time was incorrectly set.
Number of the run-time group = fault value + 1
Remedy: Using parameter p0112 or p0115, increase the sampling time of the system function to the minimum permissible sampling
time for the run-time groups of 1 ms or remove all of the blocks from the run-time group.

F51006 DCC: Sampling time of the fixed run-time group differs at download
Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: Generally, the sampling times of the fixed run-time groups correspond to the sampling times of the associated system
function (e.g. the sampling time of the fixed run-time group "BEFORE speed controller" generally corresponds to the
sampling of the speed controller p0115[1]).
During a download, the sampling time of a system function was set to a lower value (p0112, p0115) than the smallest
permissible sampling time that is allowed for the fixed run-time group belonging to this system function (1 ms). The sampling
time is set to the smallest possible value (r21002 on the drive object).
Fault value (r0949, decimal interpretation):
Number of the p21000 index of the run-time group where the sampling time was incorrectly set.
Number of the run-time group = fault value + 1
Remedy: Using parameter p0112 or p0115, increase the sampling time of the system function to the minimum permissible sampling
time for the run-time groups of 1 ms or remove all of the blocks from the run-time group.

F51008 DCC: No NVRAM available

Message value: %1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

402 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.1 Messages

Drive object: All objects

Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The DCC project contains at least one block that requires remanent memory from the basic SINAMICS system (e.g. SAV,
SAV_BY, SAV_D, SAV_I). The request for remanent memory was rejected by the basic SINAMICS system.
Fault value (r0949, decimal interpretation):
0: There is no more free remanent memory available on the drive unit.
1: The EPROM data of the drive unit indicates that there is no remanent memory on the module.
Remedy: For fault value = 0:
- Deactivate other applications on the drive unit that use remanent memory.
- Do not use blocks that require remanent memory in your DCC charts.
For fault value = 1:
- For modules D425 or D435, use hardware version D or higher.
Note:
You can read out the hardware version using SCOUT in online mode under Target system --> Device diagnostics --> tab
"General" in the lower window, 3rd column in the line of the CPU.

F51009 DCC: Project data and block library are incompatible

Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: The block library and the saved or downloaded project data are incompatible.
Remedy: Make sure that the block library and project data match.
- Update the block library in SINAMICS by downloading the technology package.
or
- Update the project data in the DCC Editor by importing the correct block library.

A51032 DCC: Internal measurement active

Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: A Siemens internal measurement has been activated.
Remedy: Carry out a POWER ON (switch off/on) for the Control Unit involved.

F51033 Licensing DCC application not sufficient

Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: There is a license error in a DCB block.
Remedy: -Obtain the necessary license.
-Later licensing is not possible online via p9920, 9921.

F51034 DCC: block runtimes are not measured

Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 403
Messages and parameters
A.1 Messages

Cause: A block library created with DCB Studio contains blocks for which the runtime has not been measured. Contact the person
that created the library.
Remedy:

F51035 DCC: DCC configuration error

Message value: -
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY
Cause: An error has occurred when powering up from a DCC configuration.
Remedy: - evaluate fault buffer (r0945).
- carry out a POWER ON for all components
(switch-off/switch-on)
- if required, check the data on the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card).
- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.

F51050 DCC: Fault initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Servo: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Vector: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Chopper: OFF2 (NONE)
Hla: OFF2 (ENCODER, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Fault value (r0949, decimal interpretation):
The configured message value is displayed in r0949.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

F51051 DCC: Fault initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Servo: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Vector: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Chopper: OFF2 (NONE)
Hla: OFF2 (ENCODER, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Fault value (r0949, decimal interpretation):
The configured message value is displayed in r0949.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

404 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.1 Messages

F51052 DCC: Fault initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Servo: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Vector: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Chopper: OFF2 (NONE)
Hla: OFF2 (ENCODER, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Fault value (r0949, decimal interpretation):
The configured message value is displayed in r0949.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

F51053 DCC: Fault initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Servo: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Vector: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Chopper: OFF2 (NONE)
Hla: OFF2 (ENCODER, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Fault value (r0949, decimal interpretation):
The configured message value is displayed in r0949.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

F51054 DCC: Fault initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Servo: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Vector: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Chopper: OFF2 (NONE)
Hla: OFF2 (ENCODER, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Fault value (r0949, decimal interpretation):
The configured message value is displayed in r0949.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

F51055 DCC: Fault initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 405
Messages and parameters
A.1 Messages

Drive object: All objects

Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Servo: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Vector: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Chopper: OFF2 (NONE)
Hla: OFF2 (ENCODER, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Fault value (r0949, decimal interpretation):
The configured message value is displayed in r0949.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

F51056 DCC: Fault initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Servo: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Vector: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Chopper: OFF2 (NONE)
Hla: OFF2 (ENCODER, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Fault value (r0949, decimal interpretation):
The configured message value is displayed in r0949.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

F51057 DCC: Fault initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Servo: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Vector: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Chopper: OFF2 (NONE)
Hla: OFF2 (ENCODER, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Fault value (r0949, decimal interpretation):
The configured message value is displayed in r0949.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

F51058 DCC: Fault initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects

Description of the DCC standard blocks

406 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.1 Messages

Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)

Servo: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Vector: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Chopper: OFF2 (NONE)
Hla: OFF2 (ENCODER, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Fault value (r0949, decimal interpretation):
The configured message value is displayed in r0949.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

F51059 DCC: Fault initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: Infeed: OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Servo: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Vector: OFF2 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRK, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Chopper: OFF2 (NONE)
Hla: OFF2 (ENCODER, NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowledge: IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Fault value (r0949, decimal interpretation):
The configured message value is displayed in r0949.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

A51060 DCC: Alarm initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
The configured message value is displayed in r2124.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

A51061 DCC: alarm initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
The configured message value is displayed in r2124.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 407
Messages and parameters
A.1 Messages

Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

A51062 DCC: alarm initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
The configured message value is displayed in r2124.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

A51063 DCC: alarm initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
The configured message value is displayed in r2124.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

A51064 DCC: alarm initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
The configured message value is displayed in r2124.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

A51065 DCC: alarm initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
The configured message value is displayed in r2124.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

408 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.1 Messages

A51066 DCC: alarm initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
The configured message value is displayed in r2124.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

A51067 DCC: alarm initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
The configured message value is displayed in r2124.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

A51068 DCC: alarm initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
The configured message value is displayed in r2124.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

A51069 DCC: alarm initiated by "Drive Control Chart"

Message value: %1
Drive object: All objects
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledge: NONE
Cause: "Drive Control Chart" (DCC) has initiated this message via the block "Set Message" (STM) or via a block (SINAMICS DCB
Extension) generated using SINAMICS DCB Studio.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
The configured message value is displayed in r2124.
Remedy: This message was configured with "Drive Control Chart" (DCC).
The cause and remedy depend on the project and should be described in the corresponding project documentation.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 409
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

A.2 Parameters
All objects: DCC, DCC_DC

p21000[0...9] Run-time group properties / RTG property

DCC Changeable: T Calculation: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
0 4005 0
Description: Allocates properties to run-time groups 1 to 10.
This property comprises the sampling time and, for p21000[x] >= 2000, the instant of the call within the sampling time.
The index x + 1 of p21000 corresponds to the number of the run-time group:
- p21000[0] is used to set the property of the run-time group 1
...
- p21000[9] is used to set the property of the run-time group 10
Value: 0: Do not calculate run-time group
1: T = 1 * r21002
2: T = 2 * r21002
3: T = 3 * r21002
4: T = 4 * r21002
5: T = 5 * r21002
6: T = 6 * r21002
7: T = 7 * r21002
8: T = 8 * r21002
9: T = 9 * r21002
10: T = 10 * r21002
11: T = 11 * r21002
12: T = 12 * r21002
13: T = 13 * r21002
14: T = 14 * r21002
15: T = 15 * r21002
16: T = 16 * r21002
17: T = 17 * r21002
18: T = 18 * r21002
19: T = 19 * r21002
20: T = 20 * r21002
21: T = 21 * r21002
22: T = 22 * r21002
23: T = 23 * r21002
24: T = 24 * r21002
25: T = 25 * r21002
26: T = 26 * r21002
27: T = 27 * r21002
28: T = 28 * r21002
29: T = 29 * r21002
30: T = 30 * r21002
31: T = 31 * r21002
32: T = 32 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

410 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

33: T = 33 * r21002
34: T = 34 * r21002
35: T = 35 * r21002
36: T = 36 * r21002
37: T = 37 * r21002
38: T = 38 * r21002
39: T = 39 * r21002
40: T = 40 * r21002
41: T = 41 * r21002
42: T = 42 * r21002
43: T = 43 * r21002
44: T = 44 * r21002
45: T = 45 * r21002
46: T = 46 * r21002
47: T = 47 * r21002
48: T = 48 * r21002
49: T = 49 * r21002
50: T = 50 * r21002
51: T = 51 * r21002
52: T = 52 * r21002
53: T = 53 * r21002
54: T = 54 * r21002
55: T = 55 * r21002
56: T = 56 * r21002
57: T = 57 * r21002
58: T = 58 * r21002
59: T = 59 * r21002
60: T = 60 * r21002
61: T = 61 * r21002
62: T = 62 * r21002
63: T = 63 * r21002
64: T = 64 * r21002
65: T = 65 * r21002
66: T = 66 * r21002
67: T = 67 * r21002
68: T = 68 * r21002
69: T = 69 * r21002
70: T = 70 * r21002
71: T = 71 * r21002
72: T = 72 * r21002
73: T = 73 * r21002
74: T = 74 * r21002
75: T = 75 * r21002
76: T = 76 * r21002
77: T = 77 * r21002
78: T = 78 * r21002
79: T = 79 * r21002
80: T = 80 * r21002
81: T = 81 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 411
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

82: T = 82 * r21002
83: T = 83 * r21002
84: T = 84 * r21002
85: T = 85 * r21002
86: T = 86 * r21002
87: T = 87 * r21002
88: T = 88 * r21002
89: T = 89 * r21002
90: T = 90 * r21002
91: T = 91 * r21002
92: T = 92 * r21002
93: T = 93 * r21002
94: T = 94 * r21002
95: T = 95 * r21002
96: T = 96 * r21002
97: T = 97 * r21002
98: T = 98 * r21002
99: T = 99 * r21002
100: T = 100 * r21002
101: T = 101 * r21002
102: T = 102 * r21002
103: T = 103 * r21002
104: T = 104 * r21002
105: T = 105 * r21002
106: T = 106 * r21002
107: T = 107 * r21002
108: T = 108 * r21002
109: T = 109 * r21002
110: T = 110 * r21002
111: T = 111 * r21002
112: T = 112 * r21002
113: T = 113 * r21002
114: T = 114 * r21002
115: T = 115 * r21002
116: T = 116 * r21002
117: T = 117 * r21002
118: T = 118 * r21002
119: T = 119 * r21002
120: T = 120 * r21002
121: T = 121 * r21002
122: T = 122 * r21002
123: T = 123 * r21002
124: T = 124 * r21002
125: T = 125 * r21002
126: T = 126 * r21002
127: T = 127 * r21002
128: T = 128 * r21002
129: T = 129 * r21002
130: T = 130 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

412 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

131: T = 131 * r21002

132: T = 132 * r21002
133: T = 133 * r21002
134: T = 134 * r21002
135: T = 135 * r21002
136: T = 136 * r21002
137: T = 137 * r21002
138: T = 138 * r21002
139: T = 139 * r21002
140: T = 140 * r21002
141: T = 141 * r21002
142: T = 142 * r21002
143: T = 143 * r21002
144: T = 144 * r21002
145: T = 145 * r21002
146: T = 146 * r21002
147: T = 147 * r21002
148: T = 148 * r21002
149: T = 149 * r21002
150: T = 150 * r21002
151: T = 151 * r21002
152: T = 152 * r21002
153: T = 153 * r21002
154: T = 154 * r21002
155: T = 155 * r21002
156: T = 156 * r21002
157: T = 157 * r21002
158: T = 158 * r21002
159: T = 159 * r21002
160: T = 160 * r21002
161: T = 161 * r21002
162: T = 162 * r21002
163: T = 163 * r21002
164: T = 164 * r21002
165: T = 165 * r21002
166: T = 166 * r21002
167: T = 167 * r21002
168: T = 168 * r21002
169: T = 169 * r21002
170: T = 170 * r21002
171: T = 171 * r21002
172: T = 172 * r21002
173: T = 173 * r21002
174: T = 174 * r21002
175: T = 175 * r21002
176: T = 176 * r21002
177: T = 177 * r21002
178: T = 178 * r21002
179: T = 179 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 413
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

180: T = 180 * r21002

181: T = 181 * r21002
182: T = 182 * r21002
183: T = 183 * r21002
184: T = 184 * r21002
185: T = 185 * r21002
186: T = 186 * r21002
187: T = 187 * r21002
188: T = 188 * r21002
189: T = 189 * r21002
190: T = 190 * r21002
191: T = 191 * r21002
192: T = 192 * r21002
193: T = 193 * r21002
194: T = 194 * r21002
195: T = 195 * r21002
196: T = 196 * r21002
197: T = 197 * r21002
198: T = 198 * r21002
199: T = 199 * r21002
200: T = 200 * r21002
201: T = 201 * r21002
202: T = 202 * r21002
203: T = 203 * r21002
204: T = 204 * r21002
205: T = 205 * r21002
206: T = 206 * r21002
207: T = 207 * r21002
208: T = 208 * r21002
209: T = 209 * r21002
210: T = 210 * r21002
211: T = 211 * r21002
212: T = 212 * r21002
213: T = 213 * r21002
214: T = 214 * r21002
215: T = 215 * r21002
216: T = 216 * r21002
217: T = 217 * r21002
218: T = 218 * r21002
219: T = 219 * r21002
220: T = 220 * r21002
221: T = 221 * r21002
222: T = 222 * r21002
223: T = 223 * r21002
224: T = 224 * r21002
225: T = 225 * r21002
226: T = 226 * r21002
227: T = 227 * r21002
228: T = 228 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

414 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

229: T = 229 * r21002

230: T = 230 * r21002
231: T = 231 * r21002
232: T = 232 * r21002
233: T = 233 * r21002
234: T = 234 * r21002
235: T = 235 * r21002
236: T = 236 * r21002
237: T = 237 * r21002
238: T = 238 * r21002
239: T = 239 * r21002
240: T = 240 * r21002
241: T = 241 * r21002
242: T = 242 * r21002
243: T = 243 * r21002
244: T = 244 * r21002
245: T = 245 * r21002
246: T = 246 * r21002
247: T = 247 * r21002
248: T = 248 * r21002
249: T = 249 * r21002
250: T = 250 * r21002
251: T = 251 * r21002
252: T = 252 * r21002
253: T = 253 * r21002
254: T = 254 * r21002
255: T = 255 * r21002
256: T = 256 * r21002
1001: T = 1 * r21003
1002: T = 2 * r21003
1003: T = 3 * r21003
1004: T = 4 * r21003
1005: T = 5 * r21003
1006: T = 6 * r21003
1008: T = 8 * r21003
1010: T = 10 * r21003
1012: T = 12 * r21003
1016: T = 16 * r21003
1020: T = 20 * r21003
1024: T = 24 * r21003
1032: T = 32 * r21003
1040: T = 40 * r21003
1048: T = 48 * r21003
1064: T = 64 * r21003
1080: T = 80 * r21003
1096: T = 96 * r21003
2000: Read-in AFTER digital inputs
2001: Output BEFORE digital outputs
4000: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 415
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

4001: Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD

4002: Receive AFTER IF2 PZD
4003: Send BEFORE IF2 PZD
4004: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive flexible PZD
4005: Receive AFTER IF2 flexible PZD
Recommendation: On the drive objects of CU, TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31, TM41, TM120, the sampling time for supplementary functions
is preset to p0115[0] = 4 ms. If you wish to configure a DCC run-time group with a shorter sampling time on these
drive objects, then you should first set the sampling time for supplementary functions p0115[0] on this drive object to
the value of the shortest sampling time required.
Index: [0] = Run-time group 1
[1] = Run-time group 2
[2] = Run-time group 3
[3] = Run-time group 4
[4] = Run-time group 5
[5] = Run-time group 6
[6] = Run-time group 7
[7] = Run-time group 8
[8] = Run-time group 9
[9] = Run-time group 10
Dependency: See also: r7903, r21008

CAUTION
The properties of the run-time groups must not be changed during operation as this could result in discontinuous
signal transitions.

Note
For value = 1 ... 256 (free run-time group):
This selection value can only be selected online if the following applies for sampling time T_sample of this run-time
group:
1 ms <= T_sample < r21003.
At download, a value that violates this condition is not rejected, but a permissible equivalent value is set automatically
and fault F51004 is output.
For value > 2000 (fixed run-time group):
The fixed run-time groups p21000[x] >= 2000 log on with the sampling time of the associated basic system function,
subject to a minimum sampling time of 1 ms. If, as a result of this limit, the actual sampling time deviates from the
sampling time of the basic system function, then fault F51005 (during F51006 download) is output. In this case, another
run-time group with a sampling time >= 1 ms should be selected. When selecting the fixed run-time groups, a check
is not made as to whether the associated system block exists.
Example:
"BEFORE speed setpoint channel" means before function charts 3010, 3020, 3030, 3040, etc. are calculated, if the
setpoint channel is activated. If, e.g. for SERVO, a setpoint channel has not been configured (p0108.8 = 0), the
calculation is made before function chart 3095.

For value = 4002, 4003, 4005 (IF2 run-time group):

On devices where IF2 does not exist (D4xx, CU310), when selecting the run-time groups that involve IF2, the
corresponding run-time group for IF1 is automatically logged on.

p21000[0...9] Run-time group properties / RTG property

DCC Changeable: T Calculation: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
0 4004 0

Description of the DCC standard blocks

416 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Description: Allocates properties to run-time groups 1 to 10.

This property comprises the sampling time and, for p21000[x] >= 2000, the instant of the call within the sampling time.
The index x + 1 of p21000 corresponds to the number of the run-time group:
- p21000[0] is used to set the property of the run-time group 1
...
- p21000[9] is used to set the property of the run-time group 10
Value: 0: Do not calculate run-time group
1: T = 1 * r21002
2: T = 2 * r21002
3: T = 3 * r21002
4: T = 4 * r21002
5: T = 5 * r21002
6: T = 6 * r21002
7: T = 7 * r21002
8: T = 8 * r21002
9: T = 9 * r21002
10: T = 10 * r21002
11: T = 11 * r21002
12: T = 12 * r21002
13: T = 13 * r21002
14: T = 14 * r21002
15: T = 15 * r21002
16: T = 16 * r21002
17: T = 17 * r21002
18: T = 18 * r21002
19: T = 19 * r21002
20: T = 20 * r21002
21: T = 21 * r21002
22: T = 22 * r21002
23: T = 23 * r21002
24: T = 24 * r21002
25: T = 25 * r21002
26: T = 26 * r21002
27: T = 27 * r21002
28: T = 28 * r21002
29: T = 29 * r21002
30: T = 30 * r21002
31: T = 31 * r21002
32: T = 32 * r21002
33: T = 33 * r21002
34: T = 34 * r21002
35: T = 35 * r21002
36: T = 36 * r21002
37: T = 37 * r21002
38: T = 38 * r21002
39: T = 39 * r21002
40: T = 40 * r21002
41: T = 41 * r21002
42: T = 42 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 417
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

43: T = 43 * r21002
44: T = 44 * r21002
45: T = 45 * r21002
46: T = 46 * r21002
47: T = 47 * r21002
48: T = 48 * r21002
49: T = 49 * r21002
50: T = 50 * r21002
51: T = 51 * r21002
52: T = 52 * r21002
53: T = 53 * r21002
54: T = 54 * r21002
55: T = 55 * r21002
56: T = 56 * r21002
57: T = 57 * r21002
58: T = 58 * r21002
59: T = 59 * r21002
60: T = 60 * r21002
61: T = 61 * r21002
62: T = 62 * r21002
63: T = 63 * r21002
64: T = 64 * r21002
65: T = 65 * r21002
66: T = 66 * r21002
67: T = 67 * r21002
68: T = 68 * r21002
69: T = 69 * r21002
70: T = 70 * r21002
71: T = 71 * r21002
72: T = 72 * r21002
73: T = 73 * r21002
74: T = 74 * r21002
75: T = 75 * r21002
76: T = 76 * r21002
77: T = 77 * r21002
78: T = 78 * r21002
79: T = 79 * r21002
80: T = 80 * r21002
81: T = 81 * r21002
82: T = 82 * r21002
83: T = 83 * r21002
84: T = 84 * r21002
85: T = 85 * r21002
86: T = 86 * r21002
87: T = 87 * r21002
88: T = 88 * r21002
89: T = 89 * r21002
90: T = 90 * r21002
91: T = 91 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

418 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

92: T = 92 * r21002
93: T = 93 * r21002
94: T = 94 * r21002
95: T = 95 * r21002
96: T = 96 * r21002
97: T = 97 * r21002
98: T = 98 * r21002
99: T = 99 * r21002
100: T = 100 * r21002
101: T = 101 * r21002
102: T = 102 * r21002
103: T = 103 * r21002
104: T = 104 * r21002
105: T = 105 * r21002
106: T = 106 * r21002
107: T = 107 * r21002
108: T = 108 * r21002
109: T = 109 * r21002
110: T = 110 * r21002
111: T = 111 * r21002
112: T = 112 * r21002
113: T = 113 * r21002
114: T = 114 * r21002
115: T = 115 * r21002
116: T = 116 * r21002
117: T = 117 * r21002
118: T = 118 * r21002
119: T = 119 * r21002
120: T = 120 * r21002
121: T = 121 * r21002
122: T = 122 * r21002
123: T = 123 * r21002
124: T = 124 * r21002
125: T = 125 * r21002
126: T = 126 * r21002
127: T = 127 * r21002
128: T = 128 * r21002
129: T = 129 * r21002
130: T = 130 * r21002
131: T = 131 * r21002
132: T = 132 * r21002
133: T = 133 * r21002
134: T = 134 * r21002
135: T = 135 * r21002
136: T = 136 * r21002
137: T = 137 * r21002
138: T = 138 * r21002
139: T = 139 * r21002
140: T = 140 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 419
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

141: T = 141 * r21002

142: T = 142 * r21002
143: T = 143 * r21002
144: T = 144 * r21002
145: T = 145 * r21002
146: T = 146 * r21002
147: T = 147 * r21002
148: T = 148 * r21002
149: T = 149 * r21002
150: T = 150 * r21002
151: T = 151 * r21002
152: T = 152 * r21002
153: T = 153 * r21002
154: T = 154 * r21002
155: T = 155 * r21002
156: T = 156 * r21002
157: T = 157 * r21002
158: T = 158 * r21002
159: T = 159 * r21002
160: T = 160 * r21002
161: T = 161 * r21002
162: T = 162 * r21002
163: T = 163 * r21002
164: T = 164 * r21002
165: T = 165 * r21002
166: T = 166 * r21002
167: T = 167 * r21002
168: T = 168 * r21002
169: T = 169 * r21002
170: T = 170 * r21002
171: T = 171 * r21002
172: T = 172 * r21002
173: T = 173 * r21002
174: T = 174 * r21002
175: T = 175 * r21002
176: T = 176 * r21002
177: T = 177 * r21002
178: T = 178 * r21002
179: T = 179 * r21002
180: T = 180 * r21002
181: T = 181 * r21002
182: T = 182 * r21002
183: T = 183 * r21002
184: T = 184 * r21002
185: T = 185 * r21002
186: T = 186 * r21002
187: T = 187 * r21002
188: T = 188 * r21002
189: T = 189 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

420 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

190: T = 190 * r21002

191: T = 191 * r21002
192: T = 192 * r21002
193: T = 193 * r21002
194: T = 194 * r21002
195: T = 195 * r21002
196: T = 196 * r21002
197: T = 197 * r21002
198: T = 198 * r21002
199: T = 199 * r21002
200: T = 200 * r21002
201: T = 201 * r21002
202: T = 202 * r21002
203: T = 203 * r21002
204: T = 204 * r21002
205: T = 205 * r21002
206: T = 206 * r21002
207: T = 207 * r21002
208: T = 208 * r21002
209: T = 209 * r21002
210: T = 210 * r21002
211: T = 211 * r21002
212: T = 212 * r21002
213: T = 213 * r21002
214: T = 214 * r21002
215: T = 215 * r21002
216: T = 216 * r21002
217: T = 217 * r21002
218: T = 218 * r21002
219: T = 219 * r21002
220: T = 220 * r21002
221: T = 221 * r21002
222: T = 222 * r21002
223: T = 223 * r21002
224: T = 224 * r21002
225: T = 225 * r21002
226: T = 226 * r21002
227: T = 227 * r21002
228: T = 228 * r21002
229: T = 229 * r21002
230: T = 230 * r21002
231: T = 231 * r21002
232: T = 232 * r21002
233: T = 233 * r21002
234: T = 234 * r21002
235: T = 235 * r21002
236: T = 236 * r21002
237: T = 237 * r21002
238: T = 238 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 421
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

239: T = 239 * r21002

240: T = 240 * r21002
241: T = 241 * r21002
242: T = 242 * r21002
243: T = 243 * r21002
244: T = 244 * r21002
245: T = 245 * r21002
246: T = 246 * r21002
247: T = 247 * r21002
248: T = 248 * r21002
249: T = 249 * r21002
250: T = 250 * r21002
251: T = 251 * r21002
252: T = 252 * r21002
253: T = 253 * r21002
254: T = 254 * r21002
255: T = 255 * r21002
256: T = 256 * r21002
1001: T = 1 * r21003
1002: T = 2 * r21003
1003: T = 3 * r21003
1004: T = 4 * r21003
1005: T = 5 * r21003
1006: T = 6 * r21003
1008: T = 8 * r21003
1010: T = 10 * r21003
1012: T = 12 * r21003
1016: T = 16 * r21003
1020: T = 20 * r21003
1024: T = 24 * r21003
1032: T = 32 * r21003
1040: T = 40 * r21003
1048: T = 48 * r21003
1064: T = 64 * r21003
1080: T = 80 * r21003
1096: T = 96 * r21003
2000: Read-in AFTER digital inputs
2001: Output BEFORE digital outputs
4000: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4001: Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4004: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive flexible PZD
Recommendation: On the drive objects of CU, TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31, TM41, TM120, the sampling time for supplementary functions
is preset to p0115[0] = 4 ms. If you wish to configure a DCC run-time group with a shorter sampling time on these
drive objects, then you should first set the sampling time for supplementary functions p0115[0] on this drive object to
the value of the shortest sampling time required.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

422 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Index: [0] = Run-time group 1

[1] = Run-time group 2
[2] = Run-time group 3
[3] = Run-time group 4
[4] = Run-time group 5
[5] = Run-time group 6
[6] = Run-time group 7
[7] = Run-time group 8
[8] = Run-time group 9
[9] = Run-time group 10
Dependency: See also: r7903, r21008

CAUTION
The properties of the run-time groups must not be changed during operation as this could result in discontinuous
signal transitions.

Note
For value = 1 ... 256 (free run-time group):
This selection value can only be selected online if the following applies for sampling time T_sample of this run-time
group:
1 ms <= T_sample < r21003.
At download, a value that violates this condition is not rejected, but a permissible equivalent value is set automatically
and fault F51004 is output.
For value > 2000 (fixed run-time group):
The fixed run-time groups p21000[x] >= 2000 log on with the sampling time of the associated basic system function,
subject to a minimum sampling time of 1 ms. If, as a result of this limit, the actual sampling time deviates from the
sampling time of the basic system function, then fault F51005 (during F51006 download) is output. In this case, another
run-time group with a sampling time >= 1 ms should be selected. When selecting the fixed run-time groups, a check
is not made as to whether the associated system block exists.
Example:
"BEFORE speed setpoint channel" means before function charts 3010, 3020, 3030, 3040, etc. are calculated, if the
setpoint channel is activated. If, e.g. for SERVO, a setpoint channel has not been configured (p0108.8 = 0), the
calculation is made before function chart 3095.

p21000[0...9] Run-time group properties / RTG property

All objects Changeable: T Calculation: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
0 4005 0
Description: Allocates properties to run-time groups 1 to 10.
This property comprises the sampling time and, for p21000[x] >= 2000, the instant of the call within the sampling time.
The index x + 1 of p21000 corresponds to the number of the run-time group:
- p21000[0] is used to set the property of the run-time group 1
...
- p21000[9] is used to set the property of the run-time group 10
Value: 0: Do not calculate run-time group
1: T = 1 * r21002
2: T = 2 * r21002
3: T = 3 * r21002
4: T = 4 * r21002
5: T = 5 * r21002
6: T = 6 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 423
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

7: T = 7 * r21002
8: T = 8 * r21002
9: T = 9 * r21002
10: T = 10 * r21002
11: T = 11 * r21002
12: T = 12 * r21002
13: T = 13 * r21002
14: T = 14 * r21002
15: T = 15 * r21002
16: T = 16 * r21002
17: T = 17 * r21002
18: T = 18 * r21002
19: T = 19 * r21002
20: T = 20 * r21002
21: T = 21 * r21002
22: T = 22 * r21002
23: T = 23 * r21002
24: T = 24 * r21002
25: T = 25 * r21002
26: T = 26 * r21002
27: T = 27 * r21002
28: T = 28 * r21002
29: T = 29 * r21002
30: T = 30 * r21002
31: T = 31 * r21002
32: T = 32 * r21002
33: T = 33 * r21002
34: T = 34 * r21002
35: T = 35 * r21002
36: T = 36 * r21002
37: T = 37 * r21002
38: T = 38 * r21002
39: T = 39 * r21002
40: T = 40 * r21002
41: T = 41 * r21002
42: T = 42 * r21002
43: T = 43 * r21002
44: T = 44 * r21002
45: T = 45 * r21002
46: T = 46 * r21002
47: T = 47 * r21002
48: T = 48 * r21002
49: T = 49 * r21002
50: T = 50 * r21002
51: T = 51 * r21002
52: T = 52 * r21002
53: T = 53 * r21002
54: T = 54 * r21002
55: T = 55 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

424 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

56: T = 56 * r21002
57: T = 57 * r21002
58: T = 58 * r21002
59: T = 59 * r21002
60: T = 60 * r21002
61: T = 61 * r21002
62: T = 62 * r21002
63: T = 63 * r21002
64: T = 64 * r21002
65: T = 65 * r21002
66: T = 66 * r21002
67: T = 67 * r21002
68: T = 68 * r21002
69: T = 69 * r21002
70: T = 70 * r21002
71: T = 71 * r21002
72: T = 72 * r21002
73: T = 73 * r21002
74: T = 74 * r21002
75: T = 75 * r21002
76: T = 76 * r21002
77: T = 77 * r21002
78: T = 78 * r21002
79: T = 79 * r21002
80: T = 80 * r21002
81: T = 81 * r21002
82: T = 82 * r21002
83: T = 83 * r21002
84: T = 84 * r21002
85: T = 85 * r21002
86: T = 86 * r21002
87: T = 87 * r21002
88: T = 88 * r21002
89: T = 89 * r21002
90: T = 90 * r21002
91: T = 91 * r21002
92: T = 92 * r21002
93: T = 93 * r21002
94: T = 94 * r21002
95: T = 95 * r21002
96: T = 96 * r21002
97: T = 97 * r21002
98: T = 98 * r21002
99: T = 99 * r21002
100: T = 100 * r21002
101: T = 101 * r21002
102: T = 102 * r21002
103: T = 103 * r21002
104: T = 104 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 425
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

105: T = 105 * r21002

106: T = 106 * r21002
107: T = 107 * r21002
108: T = 108 * r21002
109: T = 109 * r21002
110: T = 110 * r21002
111: T = 111 * r21002
112: T = 112 * r21002
113: T = 113 * r21002
114: T = 114 * r21002
115: T = 115 * r21002
116: T = 116 * r21002
117: T = 117 * r21002
118: T = 118 * r21002
119: T = 119 * r21002
120: T = 120 * r21002
121: T = 121 * r21002
122: T = 122 * r21002
123: T = 123 * r21002
124: T = 124 * r21002
125: T = 125 * r21002
126: T = 126 * r21002
127: T = 127 * r21002
128: T = 128 * r21002
129: T = 129 * r21002
130: T = 130 * r21002
131: T = 131 * r21002
132: T = 132 * r21002
133: T = 133 * r21002
134: T = 134 * r21002
135: T = 135 * r21002
136: T = 136 * r21002
137: T = 137 * r21002
138: T = 138 * r21002
139: T = 139 * r21002
140: T = 140 * r21002
141: T = 141 * r21002
142: T = 142 * r21002
143: T = 143 * r21002
144: T = 144 * r21002
145: T = 145 * r21002
146: T = 146 * r21002
147: T = 147 * r21002
148: T = 148 * r21002
149: T = 149 * r21002
150: T = 150 * r21002
151: T = 151 * r21002
152: T = 152 * r21002
153: T = 153 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

426 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

154: T = 154 * r21002

155: T = 155 * r21002
156: T = 156 * r21002
157: T = 157 * r21002
158: T = 158 * r21002
159: T = 159 * r21002
160: T = 160 * r21002
161: T = 161 * r21002
162: T = 162 * r21002
163: T = 163 * r21002
164: T = 164 * r21002
165: T = 165 * r21002
166: T = 166 * r21002
167: T = 167 * r21002
168: T = 168 * r21002
169: T = 169 * r21002
170: T = 170 * r21002
171: T = 171 * r21002
172: T = 172 * r21002
173: T = 173 * r21002
174: T = 174 * r21002
175: T = 175 * r21002
176: T = 176 * r21002
177: T = 177 * r21002
178: T = 178 * r21002
179: T = 179 * r21002
180: T = 180 * r21002
181: T = 181 * r21002
182: T = 182 * r21002
183: T = 183 * r21002
184: T = 184 * r21002
185: T = 185 * r21002
186: T = 186 * r21002
187: T = 187 * r21002
188: T = 188 * r21002
189: T = 189 * r21002
190: T = 190 * r21002
191: T = 191 * r21002
192: T = 192 * r21002
193: T = 193 * r21002
194: T = 194 * r21002
195: T = 195 * r21002
196: T = 196 * r21002
197: T = 197 * r21002
198: T = 198 * r21002
199: T = 199 * r21002
200: T = 200 * r21002
201: T = 201 * r21002
202: T = 202 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 427
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

203: T = 203 * r21002

204: T = 204 * r21002
205: T = 205 * r21002
206: T = 206 * r21002
207: T = 207 * r21002
208: T = 208 * r21002
209: T = 209 * r21002
210: T = 210 * r21002
211: T = 211 * r21002
212: T = 212 * r21002
213: T = 213 * r21002
214: T = 214 * r21002
215: T = 215 * r21002
216: T = 216 * r21002
217: T = 217 * r21002
218: T = 218 * r21002
219: T = 219 * r21002
220: T = 220 * r21002
221: T = 221 * r21002
222: T = 222 * r21002
223: T = 223 * r21002
224: T = 224 * r21002
225: T = 225 * r21002
226: T = 226 * r21002
227: T = 227 * r21002
228: T = 228 * r21002
229: T = 229 * r21002
230: T = 230 * r21002
231: T = 231 * r21002
232: T = 232 * r21002
233: T = 233 * r21002
234: T = 234 * r21002
235: T = 235 * r21002
236: T = 236 * r21002
237: T = 237 * r21002
238: T = 238 * r21002
239: T = 239 * r21002
240: T = 240 * r21002
241: T = 241 * r21002
242: T = 242 * r21002
243: T = 243 * r21002
244: T = 244 * r21002
245: T = 245 * r21002
246: T = 246 * r21002
247: T = 247 * r21002
248: T = 248 * r21002
249: T = 249 * r21002
250: T = 250 * r21002
251: T = 251 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

428 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

252: T = 252 * r21002

253: T = 253 * r21002
254: T = 254 * r21002
255: T = 255 * r21002
256: T = 256 * r21002
1001: T = 1 * r21003
1002: T = 2 * r21003
1003: T = 3 * r21003
1004: T = 4 * r21003
1005: T = 5 * r21003
1006: T = 6 * r21003
1008: T = 8 * r21003
1010: T = 10 * r21003
1012: T = 12 * r21003
1016: T = 16 * r21003
1020: T = 20 * r21003
1024: T = 24 * r21003
1032: T = 32 * r21003
1040: T = 40 * r21003
1048: T = 48 * r21003
1064: T = 64 * r21003
1080: T = 80 * r21003
1096: T = 96 * r21003
4000: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4001: Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4002: Receive AFTER IF2 PZD
4003: Send BEFORE IF2 PZD
4004: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive flexible PZD
4005: Receive AFTER IF2 flexible PZD
Recommendation: On the drive objects of CU, TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31, TM41, TM120, the sampling time for supplementary functions
is preset to p0115[0] = 4 ms. If you wish to configure a DCC run-time group with a shorter sampling time on these
drive objects, then you should first set the sampling time for supplementary functions p0115[0] on this drive object to
the value of the shortest sampling time required.
Index: [0] = Run-time group 1
[1] = Run-time group 2
[2] = Run-time group 3
[3] = Run-time group 4
[4] = Run-time group 5
[5] = Run-time group 6
[6] = Run-time group 7
[7] = Run-time group 8
[8] = Run-time group 9
[9] = Run-time group 10
Dependency: See also: r7903, r21008

CAUTION
The properties of the run-time groups must not be changed during operation as this could result in discontinuous
signal transitions.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 429
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Note
For value = 1 ... 256 (free run-time group):
This selection value can only be selected online if the following applies for sampling time T_sample of this run-time
group:
1 ms <= T_sample < r21003.
At download, a value that violates this condition is not rejected, but a permissible equivalent value is set automatically
and fault F51004 is output.
For value > 2000 (fixed run-time group):
The fixed run-time groups p21000[x] >= 2000 log on with the sampling time of the associated basic system function,
subject to a minimum sampling time of 1 ms. If, as a result of this limit, the actual sampling time deviates from the
sampling time of the basic system function, then fault F51005 (during F51006 download) is output. In this case, another
run-time group with a sampling time >= 1 ms should be selected. When selecting the fixed run-time groups, a check
is not made as to whether the associated system block exists.
Example:
"BEFORE speed setpoint channel" means before function charts 3010, 3020, 3030, 3040, etc. are calculated, if the
setpoint channel is activated. If, e.g. for SERVO, a setpoint channel has not been configured (p0108.8 = 0), the
calculation is made before function chart 3095.

For value = 4002, 4003, 4005 (IF2 run-time group):

On devices where IF2 does not exist (D4xx, CU310), when selecting the run-time groups that involve IF2, the
corresponding run-time group for IF1 is automatically logged on.

p21000[0...9] Run-time group properties / RTG property

DCC Changeable: T Calculation: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
0 4005 0
Description: Allocates properties to run-time groups 1 to 10.
This property comprises the sampling time and, for p21000[x] >= 2000, the instant of the call within the sampling time.
The index x + 1 of p21000 corresponds to the number of the run-time group:
- p21000[0] is used to set the property of the run-time group 1
...
- p21000[9] is used to set the property of the run-time group 10
Value: 0: Do not calculate run-time group
1: T = 1 * r21002
2: T = 2 * r21002
3: T = 3 * r21002
4: T = 4 * r21002
5: T = 5 * r21002
6: T = 6 * r21002
7: T = 7 * r21002
8: T = 8 * r21002
9: T = 9 * r21002
10: T = 10 * r21002
11: T = 11 * r21002
12: T = 12 * r21002
13: T = 13 * r21002
14: T = 14 * r21002
15: T = 15 * r21002
16: T = 16 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

430 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

17: T = 17 * r21002
18: T = 18 * r21002
19: T = 19 * r21002
20: T = 20 * r21002
21: T = 21 * r21002
22: T = 22 * r21002
23: T = 23 * r21002
24: T = 24 * r21002
25: T = 25 * r21002
26: T = 26 * r21002
27: T = 27 * r21002
28: T = 28 * r21002
29: T = 29 * r21002
30: T = 30 * r21002
31: T = 31 * r21002
32: T = 32 * r21002
33: T = 33 * r21002
34: T = 34 * r21002
35: T = 35 * r21002
36: T = 36 * r21002
37: T = 37 * r21002
38: T = 38 * r21002
39: T = 39 * r21002
40: T = 40 * r21002
41: T = 41 * r21002
42: T = 42 * r21002
43: T = 43 * r21002
44: T = 44 * r21002
45: T = 45 * r21002
46: T = 46 * r21002
47: T = 47 * r21002
48: T = 48 * r21002
49: T = 49 * r21002
50: T = 50 * r21002
51: T = 51 * r21002
52: T = 52 * r21002
53: T = 53 * r21002
54: T = 54 * r21002
55: T = 55 * r21002
56: T = 56 * r21002
57: T = 57 * r21002
58: T = 58 * r21002
59: T = 59 * r21002
60: T = 60 * r21002
61: T = 61 * r21002
62: T = 62 * r21002
63: T = 63 * r21002
64: T = 64 * r21002
65: T = 65 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 431
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

66: T = 66 * r21002
67: T = 67 * r21002
68: T = 68 * r21002
69: T = 69 * r21002
70: T = 70 * r21002
71: T = 71 * r21002
72: T = 72 * r21002
73: T = 73 * r21002
74: T = 74 * r21002
75: T = 75 * r21002
76: T = 76 * r21002
77: T = 77 * r21002
78: T = 78 * r21002
79: T = 79 * r21002
80: T = 80 * r21002
81: T = 81 * r21002
82: T = 82 * r21002
83: T = 83 * r21002
84: T = 84 * r21002
85: T = 85 * r21002
86: T = 86 * r21002
87: T = 87 * r21002
88: T = 88 * r21002
89: T = 89 * r21002
90: T = 90 * r21002
91: T = 91 * r21002
92: T = 92 * r21002
93: T = 93 * r21002
94: T = 94 * r21002
95: T = 95 * r21002
96: T = 96 * r21002
97: T = 97 * r21002
98: T = 98 * r21002
99: T = 99 * r21002
100: T = 100 * r21002
101: T = 101 * r21002
102: T = 102 * r21002
103: T = 103 * r21002
104: T = 104 * r21002
105: T = 105 * r21002
106: T = 106 * r21002
107: T = 107 * r21002
108: T = 108 * r21002
109: T = 109 * r21002
110: T = 110 * r21002
111: T = 111 * r21002
112: T = 112 * r21002
113: T = 113 * r21002
114: T = 114 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

432 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

115: T = 115 * r21002

116: T = 116 * r21002
117: T = 117 * r21002
118: T = 118 * r21002
119: T = 119 * r21002
120: T = 120 * r21002
121: T = 121 * r21002
122: T = 122 * r21002
123: T = 123 * r21002
124: T = 124 * r21002
125: T = 125 * r21002
126: T = 126 * r21002
127: T = 127 * r21002
128: T = 128 * r21002
129: T = 129 * r21002
130: T = 130 * r21002
131: T = 131 * r21002
132: T = 132 * r21002
133: T = 133 * r21002
134: T = 134 * r21002
135: T = 135 * r21002
136: T = 136 * r21002
137: T = 137 * r21002
138: T = 138 * r21002
139: T = 139 * r21002
140: T = 140 * r21002
141: T = 141 * r21002
142: T = 142 * r21002
143: T = 143 * r21002
144: T = 144 * r21002
145: T = 145 * r21002
146: T = 146 * r21002
147: T = 147 * r21002
148: T = 148 * r21002
149: T = 149 * r21002
150: T = 150 * r21002
151: T = 151 * r21002
152: T = 152 * r21002
153: T = 153 * r21002
154: T = 154 * r21002
155: T = 155 * r21002
156: T = 156 * r21002
157: T = 157 * r21002
158: T = 158 * r21002
159: T = 159 * r21002
160: T = 160 * r21002
161: T = 161 * r21002
162: T = 162 * r21002
163: T = 163 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 433
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

164: T = 164 * r21002

165: T = 165 * r21002
166: T = 166 * r21002
167: T = 167 * r21002
168: T = 168 * r21002
169: T = 169 * r21002
170: T = 170 * r21002
171: T = 171 * r21002
172: T = 172 * r21002
173: T = 173 * r21002
174: T = 174 * r21002
175: T = 175 * r21002
176: T = 176 * r21002
177: T = 177 * r21002
178: T = 178 * r21002
179: T = 179 * r21002
180: T = 180 * r21002
181: T = 181 * r21002
182: T = 182 * r21002
183: T = 183 * r21002
184: T = 184 * r21002
185: T = 185 * r21002
186: T = 186 * r21002
187: T = 187 * r21002
188: T = 188 * r21002
189: T = 189 * r21002
190: T = 190 * r21002
191: T = 191 * r21002
192: T = 192 * r21002
193: T = 193 * r21002
194: T = 194 * r21002
195: T = 195 * r21002
196: T = 196 * r21002
197: T = 197 * r21002
198: T = 198 * r21002
199: T = 199 * r21002
200: T = 200 * r21002
201: T = 201 * r21002
202: T = 202 * r21002
203: T = 203 * r21002
204: T = 204 * r21002
205: T = 205 * r21002
206: T = 206 * r21002
207: T = 207 * r21002
208: T = 208 * r21002
209: T = 209 * r21002
210: T = 210 * r21002
211: T = 211 * r21002
212: T = 212 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

434 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

213: T = 213 * r21002

214: T = 214 * r21002
215: T = 215 * r21002
216: T = 216 * r21002
217: T = 217 * r21002
218: T = 218 * r21002
219: T = 219 * r21002
220: T = 220 * r21002
221: T = 221 * r21002
222: T = 222 * r21002
223: T = 223 * r21002
224: T = 224 * r21002
225: T = 225 * r21002
226: T = 226 * r21002
227: T = 227 * r21002
228: T = 228 * r21002
229: T = 229 * r21002
230: T = 230 * r21002
231: T = 231 * r21002
232: T = 232 * r21002
233: T = 233 * r21002
234: T = 234 * r21002
235: T = 235 * r21002
236: T = 236 * r21002
237: T = 237 * r21002
238: T = 238 * r21002
239: T = 239 * r21002
240: T = 240 * r21002
241: T = 241 * r21002
242: T = 242 * r21002
243: T = 243 * r21002
244: T = 244 * r21002
245: T = 245 * r21002
246: T = 246 * r21002
247: T = 247 * r21002
248: T = 248 * r21002
249: T = 249 * r21002
250: T = 250 * r21002
251: T = 251 * r21002
252: T = 252 * r21002
253: T = 253 * r21002
254: T = 254 * r21002
255: T = 255 * r21002
256: T = 256 * r21002
1001: T = 1 * r21003
1002: T = 2 * r21003
1003: T = 3 * r21003
1004: T = 4 * r21003
1005: T = 5 * r21003

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 435
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

1006: T = 6 * r21003
1008: T = 8 * r21003
1010: T = 10 * r21003
1012: T = 12 * r21003
1016: T = 16 * r21003
1020: T = 20 * r21003
1024: T = 24 * r21003
1032: T = 32 * r21003
1040: T = 40 * r21003
1048: T = 48 * r21003
1064: T = 64 * r21003
1080: T = 80 * r21003
1096: T = 96 * r21003
3001: BEFORE speed ctrl
3003: BEFORE speed setpoint channel
3004: BEFORE pos ctrl
3005: BEFORE basic positioner
3006: BEFORE standard technology controller
3007: BEFORE act p v
4000: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4001: Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4002: Receive AFTER IF2 PZD
4003: Send BEFORE IF2 PZD
4004: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive flexible PZD
4005: Receive AFTER IF2 flexible PZD
Recommendation: On the drive objects of CU, TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31, TM41, TM120, the sampling time for supplementary functions
is preset to p0115[0] = 4 ms. If you wish to configure a DCC run-time group with a shorter sampling time on these
drive objects, then you should first set the sampling time for supplementary functions p0115[0] on this drive object to
the value of the shortest sampling time required.
Index: [0] = Run-time group 1
[1] = Run-time group 2
[2] = Run-time group 3
[3] = Run-time group 4
[4] = Run-time group 5
[5] = Run-time group 6
[6] = Run-time group 7
[7] = Run-time group 8
[8] = Run-time group 9
[9] = Run-time group 10
Dependency: See also: r7903, r21008

CAUTION
The properties of the run-time groups must not be changed during operation as this could result in discontinuous
signal transitions.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

436 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Note
For value = 1 ... 256 (free run-time group):
This selection value can only be selected online if the following applies for sampling time T_sample of this run-time
group:
1 ms <= T_sample < r21003.
At download, a value that violates this condition is not rejected, but a permissible equivalent value is set automatically
and fault F51004 is output.
For value > 2000 (fixed run-time group):
The fixed run-time groups p21000[x] >= 2000 log on with the sampling time of the associated basic system function,
subject to a minimum sampling time of 1 ms. If, as a result of this limit, the actual sampling time deviates from the
sampling time of the basic system function, then fault F51005 (during F51006 download) is output. In this case, another
run-time group with a sampling time >= 1 ms should be selected. When selecting the fixed run-time groups, a check
is not made as to whether the associated system block exists.
Example:
"BEFORE speed setpoint channel" means before function charts 3010, 3020, 3030, 3040, etc. are calculated, if the
setpoint channel is activated. If, e.g. for SERVO, a setpoint channel has not been configured (p0108.8 = 0), the
calculation is made before function chart 3095.

For value = 4002, 4003, 4005 (IF2 run-time group):

On devices where IF2 does not exist (D4xx, CU310), when selecting the run-time groups that involve IF2, the
corresponding run-time group for IF1 is automatically logged on.

p21000[0...9] Run-time group properties / RTG property

DCC Changeable: T Calculation: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
0 4005 0
Description: Allocates properties to run-time groups 1 to 10.
This property comprises the sampling time and, for p21000[x] >= 2000, the instant of the call within the sampling time.
The index x + 1 of p21000 corresponds to the number of the run-time group:
- p21000[0] is used to set the property of the run-time group 1
...
- p21000[9] is used to set the property of the run-time group 10
Value: 0: Do not calculate run-time group
1: T = 1 * r21002
2: T = 2 * r21002
3: T = 3 * r21002
4: T = 4 * r21002
5: T = 5 * r21002
6: T = 6 * r21002
7: T = 7 * r21002
8: T = 8 * r21002
9: T = 9 * r21002
10: T = 10 * r21002
11: T = 11 * r21002
12: T = 12 * r21002
13: T = 13 * r21002
14: T = 14 * r21002
15: T = 15 * r21002
16: T = 16 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 437
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

17: T = 17 * r21002
18: T = 18 * r21002
19: T = 19 * r21002
20: T = 20 * r21002
21: T = 21 * r21002
22: T = 22 * r21002
23: T = 23 * r21002
24: T = 24 * r21002
25: T = 25 * r21002
26: T = 26 * r21002
27: T = 27 * r21002
28: T = 28 * r21002
29: T = 29 * r21002
30: T = 30 * r21002
31: T = 31 * r21002
32: T = 32 * r21002
33: T = 33 * r21002
34: T = 34 * r21002
35: T = 35 * r21002
36: T = 36 * r21002
37: T = 37 * r21002
38: T = 38 * r21002
39: T = 39 * r21002
40: T = 40 * r21002
41: T = 41 * r21002
42: T = 42 * r21002
43: T = 43 * r21002
44: T = 44 * r21002
45: T = 45 * r21002
46: T = 46 * r21002
47: T = 47 * r21002
48: T = 48 * r21002
49: T = 49 * r21002
50: T = 50 * r21002
51: T = 51 * r21002
52: T = 52 * r21002
53: T = 53 * r21002
54: T = 54 * r21002
55: T = 55 * r21002
56: T = 56 * r21002
57: T = 57 * r21002
58: T = 58 * r21002
59: T = 59 * r21002
60: T = 60 * r21002
61: T = 61 * r21002
62: T = 62 * r21002
63: T = 63 * r21002
64: T = 64 * r21002
65: T = 65 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

438 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

66: T = 66 * r21002
67: T = 67 * r21002
68: T = 68 * r21002
69: T = 69 * r21002
70: T = 70 * r21002
71: T = 71 * r21002
72: T = 72 * r21002
73: T = 73 * r21002
74: T = 74 * r21002
75: T = 75 * r21002
76: T = 76 * r21002
77: T = 77 * r21002
78: T = 78 * r21002
79: T = 79 * r21002
80: T = 80 * r21002
81: T = 81 * r21002
82: T = 82 * r21002
83: T = 83 * r21002
84: T = 84 * r21002
85: T = 85 * r21002
86: T = 86 * r21002
87: T = 87 * r21002
88: T = 88 * r21002
89: T = 89 * r21002
90: T = 90 * r21002
91: T = 91 * r21002
92: T = 92 * r21002
93: T = 93 * r21002
94: T = 94 * r21002
95: T = 95 * r21002
96: T = 96 * r21002
97: T = 97 * r21002
98: T = 98 * r21002
99: T = 99 * r21002
100: T = 100 * r21002
101: T = 101 * r21002
102: T = 102 * r21002
103: T = 103 * r21002
104: T = 104 * r21002
105: T = 105 * r21002
106: T = 106 * r21002
107: T = 107 * r21002
108: T = 108 * r21002
109: T = 109 * r21002
110: T = 110 * r21002
111: T = 111 * r21002
112: T = 112 * r21002
113: T = 113 * r21002
114: T = 114 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 439
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

115: T = 115 * r21002

116: T = 116 * r21002
117: T = 117 * r21002
118: T = 118 * r21002
119: T = 119 * r21002
120: T = 120 * r21002
121: T = 121 * r21002
122: T = 122 * r21002
123: T = 123 * r21002
124: T = 124 * r21002
125: T = 125 * r21002
126: T = 126 * r21002
127: T = 127 * r21002
128: T = 128 * r21002
129: T = 129 * r21002
130: T = 130 * r21002
131: T = 131 * r21002
132: T = 132 * r21002
133: T = 133 * r21002
134: T = 134 * r21002
135: T = 135 * r21002
136: T = 136 * r21002
137: T = 137 * r21002
138: T = 138 * r21002
139: T = 139 * r21002
140: T = 140 * r21002
141: T = 141 * r21002
142: T = 142 * r21002
143: T = 143 * r21002
144: T = 144 * r21002
145: T = 145 * r21002
146: T = 146 * r21002
147: T = 147 * r21002
148: T = 148 * r21002
149: T = 149 * r21002
150: T = 150 * r21002
151: T = 151 * r21002
152: T = 152 * r21002
153: T = 153 * r21002
154: T = 154 * r21002
155: T = 155 * r21002
156: T = 156 * r21002
157: T = 157 * r21002
158: T = 158 * r21002
159: T = 159 * r21002
160: T = 160 * r21002
161: T = 161 * r21002
162: T = 162 * r21002
163: T = 163 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

440 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

164: T = 164 * r21002

165: T = 165 * r21002
166: T = 166 * r21002
167: T = 167 * r21002
168: T = 168 * r21002
169: T = 169 * r21002
170: T = 170 * r21002
171: T = 171 * r21002
172: T = 172 * r21002
173: T = 173 * r21002
174: T = 174 * r21002
175: T = 175 * r21002
176: T = 176 * r21002
177: T = 177 * r21002
178: T = 178 * r21002
179: T = 179 * r21002
180: T = 180 * r21002
181: T = 181 * r21002
182: T = 182 * r21002
183: T = 183 * r21002
184: T = 184 * r21002
185: T = 185 * r21002
186: T = 186 * r21002
187: T = 187 * r21002
188: T = 188 * r21002
189: T = 189 * r21002
190: T = 190 * r21002
191: T = 191 * r21002
192: T = 192 * r21002
193: T = 193 * r21002
194: T = 194 * r21002
195: T = 195 * r21002
196: T = 196 * r21002
197: T = 197 * r21002
198: T = 198 * r21002
199: T = 199 * r21002
200: T = 200 * r21002
201: T = 201 * r21002
202: T = 202 * r21002
203: T = 203 * r21002
204: T = 204 * r21002
205: T = 205 * r21002
206: T = 206 * r21002
207: T = 207 * r21002
208: T = 208 * r21002
209: T = 209 * r21002
210: T = 210 * r21002
211: T = 211 * r21002
212: T = 212 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 441
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

213: T = 213 * r21002

214: T = 214 * r21002
215: T = 215 * r21002
216: T = 216 * r21002
217: T = 217 * r21002
218: T = 218 * r21002
219: T = 219 * r21002
220: T = 220 * r21002
221: T = 221 * r21002
222: T = 222 * r21002
223: T = 223 * r21002
224: T = 224 * r21002
225: T = 225 * r21002
226: T = 226 * r21002
227: T = 227 * r21002
228: T = 228 * r21002
229: T = 229 * r21002
230: T = 230 * r21002
231: T = 231 * r21002
232: T = 232 * r21002
233: T = 233 * r21002
234: T = 234 * r21002
235: T = 235 * r21002
236: T = 236 * r21002
237: T = 237 * r21002
238: T = 238 * r21002
239: T = 239 * r21002
240: T = 240 * r21002
241: T = 241 * r21002
242: T = 242 * r21002
243: T = 243 * r21002
244: T = 244 * r21002
245: T = 245 * r21002
246: T = 246 * r21002
247: T = 247 * r21002
248: T = 248 * r21002
249: T = 249 * r21002
250: T = 250 * r21002
251: T = 251 * r21002
252: T = 252 * r21002
253: T = 253 * r21002
254: T = 254 * r21002
255: T = 255 * r21002
256: T = 256 * r21002
1001: T = 1 * r21003
1002: T = 2 * r21003
1003: T = 3 * r21003
1004: T = 4 * r21003
1005: T = 5 * r21003

Description of the DCC standard blocks

442 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

1006: T = 6 * r21003
1008: T = 8 * r21003
1010: T = 10 * r21003
1012: T = 12 * r21003
1016: T = 16 * r21003
1020: T = 20 * r21003
1024: T = 24 * r21003
1032: T = 32 * r21003
1040: T = 40 * r21003
1048: T = 48 * r21003
1064: T = 64 * r21003
1080: T = 80 * r21003
1096: T = 96 * r21003
3001: BEFORE speed ctrl
3003: BEFORE speed setpoint channel
3006: BEFORE standard technology controller
4000: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4001: Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4002: Receive AFTER IF2 PZD
4003: Send BEFORE IF2 PZD
4004: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive flexible PZD
4005: Receive AFTER IF2 flexible PZD
Recommendation: On the drive objects of CU, TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31, TM41, TM120, the sampling time for supplementary functions
is preset to p0115[0] = 4 ms. If you wish to configure a DCC run-time group with a shorter sampling time on these
drive objects, then you should first set the sampling time for supplementary functions p0115[0] on this drive object to
the value of the shortest sampling time required.
Index: [0] = Run-time group 1
[1] = Run-time group 2
[2] = Run-time group 3
[3] = Run-time group 4
[4] = Run-time group 5
[5] = Run-time group 6
[6] = Run-time group 7
[7] = Run-time group 8
[8] = Run-time group 9
[9] = Run-time group 10
Dependency: See also: r7903, r21008

CAUTION
The properties of the run-time groups must not be changed during operation as this could result in discontinuous
signal transitions.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 443
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Note
For value = 1 ... 256 (free run-time group):
This selection value can only be selected online if the following applies for sampling time T_sample of this run-time
group:
1 ms <= T_sample < r21003.
At download, a value that violates this condition is not rejected, but a permissible equivalent value is set automatically
and fault F51004 is output.
For value > 2000 (fixed run-time group):
The fixed run-time groups p21000[x] >= 2000 log on with the sampling time of the associated basic system function,
subject to a minimum sampling time of 1 ms. If, as a result of this limit, the actual sampling time deviates from the
sampling time of the basic system function, then fault F51005 (during F51006 download) is output. In this case, another
run-time group with a sampling time >= 1 ms should be selected. When selecting the fixed run-time groups, a check
is not made as to whether the associated system block exists.
Example:
"BEFORE speed setpoint channel" means before function charts 3010, 3020, 3030, 3040, etc. are calculated, if the
setpoint channel is activated. If, e.g. for SERVO, a setpoint channel has not been configured (p0108.8 = 0), the
calculation is made before function chart 3095.

For value = 4002, 4003, 4005 (IF2 run-time group):

On devices where IF2 does not exist (D4xx, CU310), when selecting the run-time groups that involve IF2, the
corresponding run-time group for IF1 is automatically logged on.

p21000[0...9] Run-time group properties / RTG property

DCC Changeable: T Calculation: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
0 4005 0
Description: Allocates properties to run-time groups 1 to 10.
This property comprises the sampling time and, for p21000[x] >= 2000, the instant of the call within the sampling time.
The index x + 1 of p21000 corresponds to the number of the run-time group:
- p21000[0] is used to set the property of the run-time group 1
...
- p21000[9] is used to set the property of the run-time group 10
Value: 0: Do not calculate run-time group
1: T = 1 * r21002
2: T = 2 * r21002
3: T = 3 * r21002
4: T = 4 * r21002
5: T = 5 * r21002
6: T = 6 * r21002
7: T = 7 * r21002
8: T = 8 * r21002
9: T = 9 * r21002
10: T = 10 * r21002
11: T = 11 * r21002
12: T = 12 * r21002
13: T = 13 * r21002
14: T = 14 * r21002
15: T = 15 * r21002
16: T = 16 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

444 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

17: T = 17 * r21002
18: T = 18 * r21002
19: T = 19 * r21002
20: T = 20 * r21002
21: T = 21 * r21002
22: T = 22 * r21002
23: T = 23 * r21002
24: T = 24 * r21002
25: T = 25 * r21002
26: T = 26 * r21002
27: T = 27 * r21002
28: T = 28 * r21002
29: T = 29 * r21002
30: T = 30 * r21002
31: T = 31 * r21002
32: T = 32 * r21002
33: T = 33 * r21002
34: T = 34 * r21002
35: T = 35 * r21002
36: T = 36 * r21002
37: T = 37 * r21002
38: T = 38 * r21002
39: T = 39 * r21002
40: T = 40 * r21002
41: T = 41 * r21002
42: T = 42 * r21002
43: T = 43 * r21002
44: T = 44 * r21002
45: T = 45 * r21002
46: T = 46 * r21002
47: T = 47 * r21002
48: T = 48 * r21002
49: T = 49 * r21002
50: T = 50 * r21002
51: T = 51 * r21002
52: T = 52 * r21002
53: T = 53 * r21002
54: T = 54 * r21002
55: T = 55 * r21002
56: T = 56 * r21002
57: T = 57 * r21002
58: T = 58 * r21002
59: T = 59 * r21002
60: T = 60 * r21002
61: T = 61 * r21002
62: T = 62 * r21002
63: T = 63 * r21002
64: T = 64 * r21002
65: T = 65 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 445
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

66: T = 66 * r21002
67: T = 67 * r21002
68: T = 68 * r21002
69: T = 69 * r21002
70: T = 70 * r21002
71: T = 71 * r21002
72: T = 72 * r21002
73: T = 73 * r21002
74: T = 74 * r21002
75: T = 75 * r21002
76: T = 76 * r21002
77: T = 77 * r21002
78: T = 78 * r21002
79: T = 79 * r21002
80: T = 80 * r21002
81: T = 81 * r21002
82: T = 82 * r21002
83: T = 83 * r21002
84: T = 84 * r21002
85: T = 85 * r21002
86: T = 86 * r21002
87: T = 87 * r21002
88: T = 88 * r21002
89: T = 89 * r21002
90: T = 90 * r21002
91: T = 91 * r21002
92: T = 92 * r21002
93: T = 93 * r21002
94: T = 94 * r21002
95: T = 95 * r21002
96: T = 96 * r21002
97: T = 97 * r21002
98: T = 98 * r21002
99: T = 99 * r21002
100: T = 100 * r21002
101: T = 101 * r21002
102: T = 102 * r21002
103: T = 103 * r21002
104: T = 104 * r21002
105: T = 105 * r21002
106: T = 106 * r21002
107: T = 107 * r21002
108: T = 108 * r21002
109: T = 109 * r21002
110: T = 110 * r21002
111: T = 111 * r21002
112: T = 112 * r21002
113: T = 113 * r21002
114: T = 114 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

446 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

115: T = 115 * r21002

116: T = 116 * r21002
117: T = 117 * r21002
118: T = 118 * r21002
119: T = 119 * r21002
120: T = 120 * r21002
121: T = 121 * r21002
122: T = 122 * r21002
123: T = 123 * r21002
124: T = 124 * r21002
125: T = 125 * r21002
126: T = 126 * r21002
127: T = 127 * r21002
128: T = 128 * r21002
129: T = 129 * r21002
130: T = 130 * r21002
131: T = 131 * r21002
132: T = 132 * r21002
133: T = 133 * r21002
134: T = 134 * r21002
135: T = 135 * r21002
136: T = 136 * r21002
137: T = 137 * r21002
138: T = 138 * r21002
139: T = 139 * r21002
140: T = 140 * r21002
141: T = 141 * r21002
142: T = 142 * r21002
143: T = 143 * r21002
144: T = 144 * r21002
145: T = 145 * r21002
146: T = 146 * r21002
147: T = 147 * r21002
148: T = 148 * r21002
149: T = 149 * r21002
150: T = 150 * r21002
151: T = 151 * r21002
152: T = 152 * r21002
153: T = 153 * r21002
154: T = 154 * r21002
155: T = 155 * r21002
156: T = 156 * r21002
157: T = 157 * r21002
158: T = 158 * r21002
159: T = 159 * r21002
160: T = 160 * r21002
161: T = 161 * r21002
162: T = 162 * r21002
163: T = 163 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 447
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

164: T = 164 * r21002

165: T = 165 * r21002
166: T = 166 * r21002
167: T = 167 * r21002
168: T = 168 * r21002
169: T = 169 * r21002
170: T = 170 * r21002
171: T = 171 * r21002
172: T = 172 * r21002
173: T = 173 * r21002
174: T = 174 * r21002
175: T = 175 * r21002
176: T = 176 * r21002
177: T = 177 * r21002
178: T = 178 * r21002
179: T = 179 * r21002
180: T = 180 * r21002
181: T = 181 * r21002
182: T = 182 * r21002
183: T = 183 * r21002
184: T = 184 * r21002
185: T = 185 * r21002
186: T = 186 * r21002
187: T = 187 * r21002
188: T = 188 * r21002
189: T = 189 * r21002
190: T = 190 * r21002
191: T = 191 * r21002
192: T = 192 * r21002
193: T = 193 * r21002
194: T = 194 * r21002
195: T = 195 * r21002
196: T = 196 * r21002
197: T = 197 * r21002
198: T = 198 * r21002
199: T = 199 * r21002
200: T = 200 * r21002
201: T = 201 * r21002
202: T = 202 * r21002
203: T = 203 * r21002
204: T = 204 * r21002
205: T = 205 * r21002
206: T = 206 * r21002
207: T = 207 * r21002
208: T = 208 * r21002
209: T = 209 * r21002
210: T = 210 * r21002
211: T = 211 * r21002
212: T = 212 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

448 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

213: T = 213 * r21002

214: T = 214 * r21002
215: T = 215 * r21002
216: T = 216 * r21002
217: T = 217 * r21002
218: T = 218 * r21002
219: T = 219 * r21002
220: T = 220 * r21002
221: T = 221 * r21002
222: T = 222 * r21002
223: T = 223 * r21002
224: T = 224 * r21002
225: T = 225 * r21002
226: T = 226 * r21002
227: T = 227 * r21002
228: T = 228 * r21002
229: T = 229 * r21002
230: T = 230 * r21002
231: T = 231 * r21002
232: T = 232 * r21002
233: T = 233 * r21002
234: T = 234 * r21002
235: T = 235 * r21002
236: T = 236 * r21002
237: T = 237 * r21002
238: T = 238 * r21002
239: T = 239 * r21002
240: T = 240 * r21002
241: T = 241 * r21002
242: T = 242 * r21002
243: T = 243 * r21002
244: T = 244 * r21002
245: T = 245 * r21002
246: T = 246 * r21002
247: T = 247 * r21002
248: T = 248 * r21002
249: T = 249 * r21002
250: T = 250 * r21002
251: T = 251 * r21002
252: T = 252 * r21002
253: T = 253 * r21002
254: T = 254 * r21002
255: T = 255 * r21002
256: T = 256 * r21002
1001: T = 1 * r21003
1002: T = 2 * r21003
1003: T = 3 * r21003
1004: T = 4 * r21003
1005: T = 5 * r21003

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 449
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

1006: T = 6 * r21003
1008: T = 8 * r21003
1010: T = 10 * r21003
1012: T = 12 * r21003
1016: T = 16 * r21003
1020: T = 20 * r21003
1024: T = 24 * r21003
1032: T = 32 * r21003
1040: T = 40 * r21003
1048: T = 48 * r21003
1064: T = 64 * r21003
1080: T = 80 * r21003
1096: T = 96 * r21003
3001: BEFORE speed ctrl
3003: BEFORE speed setpoint channel
4000: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4001: Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4002: Receive AFTER IF2 PZD
4003: Send BEFORE IF2 PZD
4004: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive flexible PZD
4005: Receive AFTER IF2 flexible PZD
Recommendation: On the drive objects of CU, TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31, TM41, TM120, the sampling time for supplementary functions
is preset to p0115[0] = 4 ms. If you wish to configure a DCC run-time group with a shorter sampling time on these
drive objects, then you should first set the sampling time for supplementary functions p0115[0] on this drive object to
the value of the shortest sampling time required.
Index: [0] = Run-time group 1
[1] = Run-time group 2
[2] = Run-time group 3
[3] = Run-time group 4
[4] = Run-time group 5
[5] = Run-time group 6
[6] = Run-time group 7
[7] = Run-time group 8
[8] = Run-time group 9
[9] = Run-time group 10
Dependency: See also: r7903, r21008

CAUTION
The properties of the run-time groups must not be changed during operation as this could result in discontinuous
signal transitions.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

450 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Note
For value = 1 ... 256 (free run-time group):
This selection value can only be selected online if the following applies for sampling time T_sample of this run-time
group:
1 ms <= T_sample < r21003.
At download, a value that violates this condition is not rejected, but a permissible equivalent value is set automatically
and fault F51004 is output.
For value > 2000 (fixed run-time group):
The fixed run-time groups p21000[x] >= 2000 log on with the sampling time of the associated basic system function,
subject to a minimum sampling time of 1 ms. If, as a result of this limit, the actual sampling time deviates from the
sampling time of the basic system function, then fault F51005 (during F51006 download) is output. In this case, another
run-time group with a sampling time >= 1 ms should be selected. When selecting the fixed run-time groups, a check
is not made as to whether the associated system block exists.
Example:
"BEFORE speed setpoint channel" means before function charts 3010, 3020, 3030, 3040, etc. are calculated, if the
setpoint channel is activated. If, e.g. for SERVO, a setpoint channel has not been configured (p0108.8 = 0), the
calculation is made before function chart 3095.

For value = 4002, 4003, 4005 (IF2 run-time group):

On devices where IF2 does not exist (D4xx, CU310), when selecting the run-time groups that involve IF2, the
corresponding run-time group for IF1 is automatically logged on.

p21000[0...9] Run-time group properties / RTG property

DCC Changeable: T Calculation: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
0 4004 0
Description: Allocates properties to run-time groups 1 to 10.
This property comprises the sampling time and, for p21000[x] >= 2000, the instant of the call within the sampling time.
The index x + 1 of p21000 corresponds to the number of the run-time group:
- p21000[0] is used to set the property of the run-time group 1
...
- p21000[9] is used to set the property of the run-time group 10
Value: 0: Do not calculate run-time group
1: T = 1 * r21002
2: T = 2 * r21002
3: T = 3 * r21002
4: T = 4 * r21002
5: T = 5 * r21002
6: T = 6 * r21002
7: T = 7 * r21002
8: T = 8 * r21002
9: T = 9 * r21002
10: T = 10 * r21002
11: T = 11 * r21002
12: T = 12 * r21002
13: T = 13 * r21002
14: T = 14 * r21002
15: T = 15 * r21002
16: T = 16 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 451
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

17: T = 17 * r21002
18: T = 18 * r21002
19: T = 19 * r21002
20: T = 20 * r21002
21: T = 21 * r21002
22: T = 22 * r21002
23: T = 23 * r21002
24: T = 24 * r21002
25: T = 25 * r21002
26: T = 26 * r21002
27: T = 27 * r21002
28: T = 28 * r21002
29: T = 29 * r21002
30: T = 30 * r21002
31: T = 31 * r21002
32: T = 32 * r21002
33: T = 33 * r21002
34: T = 34 * r21002
35: T = 35 * r21002
36: T = 36 * r21002
37: T = 37 * r21002
38: T = 38 * r21002
39: T = 39 * r21002
40: T = 40 * r21002
41: T = 41 * r21002
42: T = 42 * r21002
43: T = 43 * r21002
44: T = 44 * r21002
45: T = 45 * r21002
46: T = 46 * r21002
47: T = 47 * r21002
48: T = 48 * r21002
49: T = 49 * r21002
50: T = 50 * r21002
51: T = 51 * r21002
52: T = 52 * r21002
53: T = 53 * r21002
54: T = 54 * r21002
55: T = 55 * r21002
56: T = 56 * r21002
57: T = 57 * r21002
58: T = 58 * r21002
59: T = 59 * r21002
60: T = 60 * r21002
61: T = 61 * r21002
62: T = 62 * r21002
63: T = 63 * r21002
64: T = 64 * r21002
65: T = 65 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

452 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

66: T = 66 * r21002
67: T = 67 * r21002
68: T = 68 * r21002
69: T = 69 * r21002
70: T = 70 * r21002
71: T = 71 * r21002
72: T = 72 * r21002
73: T = 73 * r21002
74: T = 74 * r21002
75: T = 75 * r21002
76: T = 76 * r21002
77: T = 77 * r21002
78: T = 78 * r21002
79: T = 79 * r21002
80: T = 80 * r21002
81: T = 81 * r21002
82: T = 82 * r21002
83: T = 83 * r21002
84: T = 84 * r21002
85: T = 85 * r21002
86: T = 86 * r21002
87: T = 87 * r21002
88: T = 88 * r21002
89: T = 89 * r21002
90: T = 90 * r21002
91: T = 91 * r21002
92: T = 92 * r21002
93: T = 93 * r21002
94: T = 94 * r21002
95: T = 95 * r21002
96: T = 96 * r21002
97: T = 97 * r21002
98: T = 98 * r21002
99: T = 99 * r21002
100: T = 100 * r21002
101: T = 101 * r21002
102: T = 102 * r21002
103: T = 103 * r21002
104: T = 104 * r21002
105: T = 105 * r21002
106: T = 106 * r21002
107: T = 107 * r21002
108: T = 108 * r21002
109: T = 109 * r21002
110: T = 110 * r21002
111: T = 111 * r21002
112: T = 112 * r21002
113: T = 113 * r21002
114: T = 114 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 453
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

115: T = 115 * r21002

116: T = 116 * r21002
117: T = 117 * r21002
118: T = 118 * r21002
119: T = 119 * r21002
120: T = 120 * r21002
121: T = 121 * r21002
122: T = 122 * r21002
123: T = 123 * r21002
124: T = 124 * r21002
125: T = 125 * r21002
126: T = 126 * r21002
127: T = 127 * r21002
128: T = 128 * r21002
129: T = 129 * r21002
130: T = 130 * r21002
131: T = 131 * r21002
132: T = 132 * r21002
133: T = 133 * r21002
134: T = 134 * r21002
135: T = 135 * r21002
136: T = 136 * r21002
137: T = 137 * r21002
138: T = 138 * r21002
139: T = 139 * r21002
140: T = 140 * r21002
141: T = 141 * r21002
142: T = 142 * r21002
143: T = 143 * r21002
144: T = 144 * r21002
145: T = 145 * r21002
146: T = 146 * r21002
147: T = 147 * r21002
148: T = 148 * r21002
149: T = 149 * r21002
150: T = 150 * r21002
151: T = 151 * r21002
152: T = 152 * r21002
153: T = 153 * r21002
154: T = 154 * r21002
155: T = 155 * r21002
156: T = 156 * r21002
157: T = 157 * r21002
158: T = 158 * r21002
159: T = 159 * r21002
160: T = 160 * r21002
161: T = 161 * r21002
162: T = 162 * r21002
163: T = 163 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

454 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

164: T = 164 * r21002

165: T = 165 * r21002
166: T = 166 * r21002
167: T = 167 * r21002
168: T = 168 * r21002
169: T = 169 * r21002
170: T = 170 * r21002
171: T = 171 * r21002
172: T = 172 * r21002
173: T = 173 * r21002
174: T = 174 * r21002
175: T = 175 * r21002
176: T = 176 * r21002
177: T = 177 * r21002
178: T = 178 * r21002
179: T = 179 * r21002
180: T = 180 * r21002
181: T = 181 * r21002
182: T = 182 * r21002
183: T = 183 * r21002
184: T = 184 * r21002
185: T = 185 * r21002
186: T = 186 * r21002
187: T = 187 * r21002
188: T = 188 * r21002
189: T = 189 * r21002
190: T = 190 * r21002
191: T = 191 * r21002
192: T = 192 * r21002
193: T = 193 * r21002
194: T = 194 * r21002
195: T = 195 * r21002
196: T = 196 * r21002
197: T = 197 * r21002
198: T = 198 * r21002
199: T = 199 * r21002
200: T = 200 * r21002
201: T = 201 * r21002
202: T = 202 * r21002
203: T = 203 * r21002
204: T = 204 * r21002
205: T = 205 * r21002
206: T = 206 * r21002
207: T = 207 * r21002
208: T = 208 * r21002
209: T = 209 * r21002
210: T = 210 * r21002
211: T = 211 * r21002
212: T = 212 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 455
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

213: T = 213 * r21002

214: T = 214 * r21002
215: T = 215 * r21002
216: T = 216 * r21002
217: T = 217 * r21002
218: T = 218 * r21002
219: T = 219 * r21002
220: T = 220 * r21002
221: T = 221 * r21002
222: T = 222 * r21002
223: T = 223 * r21002
224: T = 224 * r21002
225: T = 225 * r21002
226: T = 226 * r21002
227: T = 227 * r21002
228: T = 228 * r21002
229: T = 229 * r21002
230: T = 230 * r21002
231: T = 231 * r21002
232: T = 232 * r21002
233: T = 233 * r21002
234: T = 234 * r21002
235: T = 235 * r21002
236: T = 236 * r21002
237: T = 237 * r21002
238: T = 238 * r21002
239: T = 239 * r21002
240: T = 240 * r21002
241: T = 241 * r21002
242: T = 242 * r21002
243: T = 243 * r21002
244: T = 244 * r21002
245: T = 245 * r21002
246: T = 246 * r21002
247: T = 247 * r21002
248: T = 248 * r21002
249: T = 249 * r21002
250: T = 250 * r21002
251: T = 251 * r21002
252: T = 252 * r21002
253: T = 253 * r21002
254: T = 254 * r21002
255: T = 255 * r21002
256: T = 256 * r21002
1001: T = 1 * r21003
1002: T = 2 * r21003
1003: T = 3 * r21003
1004: T = 4 * r21003
1005: T = 5 * r21003

Description of the DCC standard blocks

456 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

1006: T = 6 * r21003
1008: T = 8 * r21003
1010: T = 10 * r21003
1012: T = 12 * r21003
1016: T = 16 * r21003
1020: T = 20 * r21003
1024: T = 24 * r21003
1032: T = 32 * r21003
1040: T = 40 * r21003
1048: T = 48 * r21003
1064: T = 64 * r21003
1080: T = 80 * r21003
1096: T = 96 * r21003
3003: BEFORE speed setpoint channel
4000: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4001: Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4004: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive flexible PZD
Recommendation: On the drive objects of CU, TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31, TM41, TM120, the sampling time for supplementary functions
is preset to p0115[0] = 4 ms. If you wish to configure a DCC run-time group with a shorter sampling time on these
drive objects, then you should first set the sampling time for supplementary functions p0115[0] on this drive object to
the value of the shortest sampling time required.
Index: [0] = Run-time group 1
[1] = Run-time group 2
[2] = Run-time group 3
[3] = Run-time group 4
[4] = Run-time group 5
[5] = Run-time group 6
[6] = Run-time group 7
[7] = Run-time group 8
[8] = Run-time group 9
[9] = Run-time group 10
Dependency: See also: r7903, r21008

CAUTION
The properties of the run-time groups must not be changed during operation as this could result in discontinuous
signal transitions.

Note
For value = 1 ... 256 (free run-time group):
This selection value can only be selected online if the following applies for sampling time T_sample of this run-time
group:
1 ms <= T_sample < r21003.
At download, a value that violates this condition is not rejected, but a permissible equivalent value is set automatically
and fault F51004 is output.
For value > 2000 (fixed run-time group):
The fixed run-time groups p21000[x] >= 2000 log on with the sampling time of the associated basic system function,
subject to a minimum sampling time of 1 ms. If, as a result of this limit, the actual sampling time deviates from the
sampling time of the basic system function, then fault F51005 (during F51006 download) is output. In this case, another
run-time group with a sampling time >= 1 ms should be selected. When selecting the fixed run-time groups, a check
is not made as to whether the associated system block exists.
Example:
"BEFORE speed setpoint channel" means before function charts 3010, 3020, 3030, 3040, etc. are calculated, if the
setpoint channel is activated. If, e.g. for SERVO, a setpoint channel has not been configured (p0108.8 = 0), the
calculation is made before function chart 3095.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 457
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

p21000[0...9] Run-time group properties / RTG property

DCC Changeable: T Calculation: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
0 4004 0
Description: Allocates properties to run-time groups 1 to 10.
This property comprises the sampling time and, for p21000[x] >= 2000, the instant of the call within the sampling time.
The index x + 1 of p21000 corresponds to the number of the run-time group:
- p21000[0] is used to set the property of the run-time group 1
...
- p21000[9] is used to set the property of the run-time group 10
Value: 0: Do not calculate run-time group
1: T = 1 * r21002
2: T = 2 * r21002
3: T = 3 * r21002
4: T = 4 * r21002
5: T = 5 * r21002
6: T = 6 * r21002
7: T = 7 * r21002
8: T = 8 * r21002
9: T = 9 * r21002
10: T = 10 * r21002
11: T = 11 * r21002
12: T = 12 * r21002
13: T = 13 * r21002
14: T = 14 * r21002
15: T = 15 * r21002
16: T = 16 * r21002
17: T = 17 * r21002
18: T = 18 * r21002
19: T = 19 * r21002
20: T = 20 * r21002
21: T = 21 * r21002
22: T = 22 * r21002
23: T = 23 * r21002
24: T = 24 * r21002
25: T = 25 * r21002
26: T = 26 * r21002
27: T = 27 * r21002
28: T = 28 * r21002
29: T = 29 * r21002
30: T = 30 * r21002
31: T = 31 * r21002
32: T = 32 * r21002
33: T = 33 * r21002
34: T = 34 * r21002
35: T = 35 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

458 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

36: T = 36 * r21002
37: T = 37 * r21002
38: T = 38 * r21002
39: T = 39 * r21002
40: T = 40 * r21002
41: T = 41 * r21002
42: T = 42 * r21002
43: T = 43 * r21002
44: T = 44 * r21002
45: T = 45 * r21002
46: T = 46 * r21002
47: T = 47 * r21002
48: T = 48 * r21002
49: T = 49 * r21002
50: T = 50 * r21002
51: T = 51 * r21002
52: T = 52 * r21002
53: T = 53 * r21002
54: T = 54 * r21002
55: T = 55 * r21002
56: T = 56 * r21002
57: T = 57 * r21002
58: T = 58 * r21002
59: T = 59 * r21002
60: T = 60 * r21002
61: T = 61 * r21002
62: T = 62 * r21002
63: T = 63 * r21002
64: T = 64 * r21002
65: T = 65 * r21002
66: T = 66 * r21002
67: T = 67 * r21002
68: T = 68 * r21002
69: T = 69 * r21002
70: T = 70 * r21002
71: T = 71 * r21002
72: T = 72 * r21002
73: T = 73 * r21002
74: T = 74 * r21002
75: T = 75 * r21002
76: T = 76 * r21002
77: T = 77 * r21002
78: T = 78 * r21002
79: T = 79 * r21002
80: T = 80 * r21002
81: T = 81 * r21002
82: T = 82 * r21002
83: T = 83 * r21002
84: T = 84 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 459
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

85: T = 85 * r21002
86: T = 86 * r21002
87: T = 87 * r21002
88: T = 88 * r21002
89: T = 89 * r21002
90: T = 90 * r21002
91: T = 91 * r21002
92: T = 92 * r21002
93: T = 93 * r21002
94: T = 94 * r21002
95: T = 95 * r21002
96: T = 96 * r21002
97: T = 97 * r21002
98: T = 98 * r21002
99: T = 99 * r21002
100: T = 100 * r21002
101: T = 101 * r21002
102: T = 102 * r21002
103: T = 103 * r21002
104: T = 104 * r21002
105: T = 105 * r21002
106: T = 106 * r21002
107: T = 107 * r21002
108: T = 108 * r21002
109: T = 109 * r21002
110: T = 110 * r21002
111: T = 111 * r21002
112: T = 112 * r21002
113: T = 113 * r21002
114: T = 114 * r21002
115: T = 115 * r21002
116: T = 116 * r21002
117: T = 117 * r21002
118: T = 118 * r21002
119: T = 119 * r21002
120: T = 120 * r21002
121: T = 121 * r21002
122: T = 122 * r21002
123: T = 123 * r21002
124: T = 124 * r21002
125: T = 125 * r21002
126: T = 126 * r21002
127: T = 127 * r21002
128: T = 128 * r21002
129: T = 129 * r21002
130: T = 130 * r21002
131: T = 131 * r21002
132: T = 132 * r21002
133: T = 133 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

460 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

134: T = 134 * r21002

135: T = 135 * r21002
136: T = 136 * r21002
137: T = 137 * r21002
138: T = 138 * r21002
139: T = 139 * r21002
140: T = 140 * r21002
141: T = 141 * r21002
142: T = 142 * r21002
143: T = 143 * r21002
144: T = 144 * r21002
145: T = 145 * r21002
146: T = 146 * r21002
147: T = 147 * r21002
148: T = 148 * r21002
149: T = 149 * r21002
150: T = 150 * r21002
151: T = 151 * r21002
152: T = 152 * r21002
153: T = 153 * r21002
154: T = 154 * r21002
155: T = 155 * r21002
156: T = 156 * r21002
157: T = 157 * r21002
158: T = 158 * r21002
159: T = 159 * r21002
160: T = 160 * r21002
161: T = 161 * r21002
162: T = 162 * r21002
163: T = 163 * r21002
164: T = 164 * r21002
165: T = 165 * r21002
166: T = 166 * r21002
167: T = 167 * r21002
168: T = 168 * r21002
169: T = 169 * r21002
170: T = 170 * r21002
171: T = 171 * r21002
172: T = 172 * r21002
173: T = 173 * r21002
174: T = 174 * r21002
175: T = 175 * r21002
176: T = 176 * r21002
177: T = 177 * r21002
178: T = 178 * r21002
179: T = 179 * r21002
180: T = 180 * r21002
181: T = 181 * r21002
182: T = 182 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 461
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

183: T = 183 * r21002

184: T = 184 * r21002
185: T = 185 * r21002
186: T = 186 * r21002
187: T = 187 * r21002
188: T = 188 * r21002
189: T = 189 * r21002
190: T = 190 * r21002
191: T = 191 * r21002
192: T = 192 * r21002
193: T = 193 * r21002
194: T = 194 * r21002
195: T = 195 * r21002
196: T = 196 * r21002
197: T = 197 * r21002
198: T = 198 * r21002
199: T = 199 * r21002
200: T = 200 * r21002
201: T = 201 * r21002
202: T = 202 * r21002
203: T = 203 * r21002
204: T = 204 * r21002
205: T = 205 * r21002
206: T = 206 * r21002
207: T = 207 * r21002
208: T = 208 * r21002
209: T = 209 * r21002
210: T = 210 * r21002
211: T = 211 * r21002
212: T = 212 * r21002
213: T = 213 * r21002
214: T = 214 * r21002
215: T = 215 * r21002
216: T = 216 * r21002
217: T = 217 * r21002
218: T = 218 * r21002
219: T = 219 * r21002
220: T = 220 * r21002
221: T = 221 * r21002
222: T = 222 * r21002
223: T = 223 * r21002
224: T = 224 * r21002
225: T = 225 * r21002
226: T = 226 * r21002
227: T = 227 * r21002
228: T = 228 * r21002
229: T = 229 * r21002
230: T = 230 * r21002
231: T = 231 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

462 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

232: T = 232 * r21002

233: T = 233 * r21002
234: T = 234 * r21002
235: T = 235 * r21002
236: T = 236 * r21002
237: T = 237 * r21002
238: T = 238 * r21002
239: T = 239 * r21002
240: T = 240 * r21002
241: T = 241 * r21002
242: T = 242 * r21002
243: T = 243 * r21002
244: T = 244 * r21002
245: T = 245 * r21002
246: T = 246 * r21002
247: T = 247 * r21002
248: T = 248 * r21002
249: T = 249 * r21002
250: T = 250 * r21002
251: T = 251 * r21002
252: T = 252 * r21002
253: T = 253 * r21002
254: T = 254 * r21002
255: T = 255 * r21002
256: T = 256 * r21002
1001: T = 1 * r21003
1002: T = 2 * r21003
1003: T = 3 * r21003
1004: T = 4 * r21003
1005: T = 5 * r21003
1006: T = 6 * r21003
1008: T = 8 * r21003
1010: T = 10 * r21003
1012: T = 12 * r21003
1016: T = 16 * r21003
1020: T = 20 * r21003
1024: T = 24 * r21003
1032: T = 32 * r21003
1040: T = 40 * r21003
1048: T = 48 * r21003
1064: T = 64 * r21003
1080: T = 80 * r21003
1096: T = 96 * r21003
4000: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4001: Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4004: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive flexible PZD

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 463
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Recommendation: On the drive objects of CU, TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31, TM41, TM120, the sampling time for supplementary functions
is preset to p0115[0] = 4 ms. If you wish to configure a DCC run-time group with a shorter sampling time on these
drive objects, then you should first set the sampling time for supplementary functions p0115[0] on this drive object to
the value of the shortest sampling time required.
Index: [0] = Run-time group 1
[1] = Run-time group 2
[2] = Run-time group 3
[3] = Run-time group 4
[4] = Run-time group 5
[5] = Run-time group 6
[6] = Run-time group 7
[7] = Run-time group 8
[8] = Run-time group 9
[9] = Run-time group 10
Dependency: See also: r7903, r21008

CAUTION
The properties of the run-time groups must not be changed during operation as this could result in discontinuous
signal transitions.

Note
For value = 1 ... 256 (free run-time group):
This selection value can only be selected online if the following applies for sampling time T_sample of this run-time
group:
1 ms <= T_sample < r21003.
At download, a value that violates this condition is not rejected, but a permissible equivalent value is set automatically
and fault F51004 is output.
For value > 2000 (fixed run-time group):
The fixed run-time groups p21000[x] >= 2000 log on with the sampling time of the associated basic system function,
subject to a minimum sampling time of 1 ms. If, as a result of this limit, the actual sampling time deviates from the
sampling time of the basic system function, then fault F51005 (during F51006 download) is output. In this case, another
run-time group with a sampling time >= 1 ms should be selected. When selecting the fixed run-time groups, a check
is not made as to whether the associated system block exists.
Example:
"BEFORE speed setpoint channel" means before function charts 3010, 3020, 3030, 3040, etc. are calculated, if the
setpoint channel is activated. If, e.g. for SERVO, a setpoint channel has not been configured (p0108.8 = 0), the
calculation is made before function chart 3095.

p21000[0...9] Run-time group properties / RTG property

DCC Changeable: T Calculation: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
0 4004 0
Description: Allocates properties to run-time groups 1 to 10.
This property comprises the sampling time and, for p21000[x] >= 2000, the instant of the call within the sampling time.
The index x + 1 of p21000 corresponds to the number of the run-time group:
- p21000[0] is used to set the property of the run-time group 1
...
- p21000[9] is used to set the property of the run-time group 10
Value: 0: Do not calculate run-time group
1: T = 1 * r21002
2: T = 2 * r21002
3: T = 3 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

464 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

4: T = 4 * r21002
5: T = 5 * r21002
6: T = 6 * r21002
7: T = 7 * r21002
8: T = 8 * r21002
9: T = 9 * r21002
10: T = 10 * r21002
11: T = 11 * r21002
12: T = 12 * r21002
13: T = 13 * r21002
14: T = 14 * r21002
15: T = 15 * r21002
16: T = 16 * r21002
17: T = 17 * r21002
18: T = 18 * r21002
19: T = 19 * r21002
20: T = 20 * r21002
21: T = 21 * r21002
22: T = 22 * r21002
23: T = 23 * r21002
24: T = 24 * r21002
25: T = 25 * r21002
26: T = 26 * r21002
27: T = 27 * r21002
28: T = 28 * r21002
29: T = 29 * r21002
30: T = 30 * r21002
31: T = 31 * r21002
32: T = 32 * r21002
33: T = 33 * r21002
34: T = 34 * r21002
35: T = 35 * r21002
36: T = 36 * r21002
37: T = 37 * r21002
38: T = 38 * r21002
39: T = 39 * r21002
40: T = 40 * r21002
41: T = 41 * r21002
42: T = 42 * r21002
43: T = 43 * r21002
44: T = 44 * r21002
45: T = 45 * r21002
46: T = 46 * r21002
47: T = 47 * r21002
48: T = 48 * r21002
49: T = 49 * r21002
50: T = 50 * r21002
51: T = 51 * r21002
52: T = 52 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 465
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

53: T = 53 * r21002
54: T = 54 * r21002
55: T = 55 * r21002
56: T = 56 * r21002
57: T = 57 * r21002
58: T = 58 * r21002
59: T = 59 * r21002
60: T = 60 * r21002
61: T = 61 * r21002
62: T = 62 * r21002
63: T = 63 * r21002
64: T = 64 * r21002
65: T = 65 * r21002
66: T = 66 * r21002
67: T = 67 * r21002
68: T = 68 * r21002
69: T = 69 * r21002
70: T = 70 * r21002
71: T = 71 * r21002
72: T = 72 * r21002
73: T = 73 * r21002
74: T = 74 * r21002
75: T = 75 * r21002
76: T = 76 * r21002
77: T = 77 * r21002
78: T = 78 * r21002
79: T = 79 * r21002
80: T = 80 * r21002
81: T = 81 * r21002
82: T = 82 * r21002
83: T = 83 * r21002
84: T = 84 * r21002
85: T = 85 * r21002
86: T = 86 * r21002
87: T = 87 * r21002
88: T = 88 * r21002
89: T = 89 * r21002
90: T = 90 * r21002
91: T = 91 * r21002
92: T = 92 * r21002
93: T = 93 * r21002
94: T = 94 * r21002
95: T = 95 * r21002
96: T = 96 * r21002
97: T = 97 * r21002
98: T = 98 * r21002
99: T = 99 * r21002
100: T = 100 * r21002
101: T = 101 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

466 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

102: T = 102 * r21002

103: T = 103 * r21002
104: T = 104 * r21002
105: T = 105 * r21002
106: T = 106 * r21002
107: T = 107 * r21002
108: T = 108 * r21002
109: T = 109 * r21002
110: T = 110 * r21002
111: T = 111 * r21002
112: T = 112 * r21002
113: T = 113 * r21002
114: T = 114 * r21002
115: T = 115 * r21002
116: T = 116 * r21002
117: T = 117 * r21002
118: T = 118 * r21002
119: T = 119 * r21002
120: T = 120 * r21002
121: T = 121 * r21002
122: T = 122 * r21002
123: T = 123 * r21002
124: T = 124 * r21002
125: T = 125 * r21002
126: T = 126 * r21002
127: T = 127 * r21002
128: T = 128 * r21002
129: T = 129 * r21002
130: T = 130 * r21002
131: T = 131 * r21002
132: T = 132 * r21002
133: T = 133 * r21002
134: T = 134 * r21002
135: T = 135 * r21002
136: T = 136 * r21002
137: T = 137 * r21002
138: T = 138 * r21002
139: T = 139 * r21002
140: T = 140 * r21002
141: T = 141 * r21002
142: T = 142 * r21002
143: T = 143 * r21002
144: T = 144 * r21002
145: T = 145 * r21002
146: T = 146 * r21002
147: T = 147 * r21002
148: T = 148 * r21002
149: T = 149 * r21002
150: T = 150 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 467
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

151: T = 151 * r21002

152: T = 152 * r21002
153: T = 153 * r21002
154: T = 154 * r21002
155: T = 155 * r21002
156: T = 156 * r21002
157: T = 157 * r21002
158: T = 158 * r21002
159: T = 159 * r21002
160: T = 160 * r21002
161: T = 161 * r21002
162: T = 162 * r21002
163: T = 163 * r21002
164: T = 164 * r21002
165: T = 165 * r21002
166: T = 166 * r21002
167: T = 167 * r21002
168: T = 168 * r21002
169: T = 169 * r21002
170: T = 170 * r21002
171: T = 171 * r21002
172: T = 172 * r21002
173: T = 173 * r21002
174: T = 174 * r21002
175: T = 175 * r21002
176: T = 176 * r21002
177: T = 177 * r21002
178: T = 178 * r21002
179: T = 179 * r21002
180: T = 180 * r21002
181: T = 181 * r21002
182: T = 182 * r21002
183: T = 183 * r21002
184: T = 184 * r21002
185: T = 185 * r21002
186: T = 186 * r21002
187: T = 187 * r21002
188: T = 188 * r21002
189: T = 189 * r21002
190: T = 190 * r21002
191: T = 191 * r21002
192: T = 192 * r21002
193: T = 193 * r21002
194: T = 194 * r21002
195: T = 195 * r21002
196: T = 196 * r21002
197: T = 197 * r21002
198: T = 198 * r21002
199: T = 199 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

468 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

200: T = 200 * r21002

201: T = 201 * r21002
202: T = 202 * r21002
203: T = 203 * r21002
204: T = 204 * r21002
205: T = 205 * r21002
206: T = 206 * r21002
207: T = 207 * r21002
208: T = 208 * r21002
209: T = 209 * r21002
210: T = 210 * r21002
211: T = 211 * r21002
212: T = 212 * r21002
213: T = 213 * r21002
214: T = 214 * r21002
215: T = 215 * r21002
216: T = 216 * r21002
217: T = 217 * r21002
218: T = 218 * r21002
219: T = 219 * r21002
220: T = 220 * r21002
221: T = 221 * r21002
222: T = 222 * r21002
223: T = 223 * r21002
224: T = 224 * r21002
225: T = 225 * r21002
226: T = 226 * r21002
227: T = 227 * r21002
228: T = 228 * r21002
229: T = 229 * r21002
230: T = 230 * r21002
231: T = 231 * r21002
232: T = 232 * r21002
233: T = 233 * r21002
234: T = 234 * r21002
235: T = 235 * r21002
236: T = 236 * r21002
237: T = 237 * r21002
238: T = 238 * r21002
239: T = 239 * r21002
240: T = 240 * r21002
241: T = 241 * r21002
242: T = 242 * r21002
243: T = 243 * r21002
244: T = 244 * r21002
245: T = 245 * r21002
246: T = 246 * r21002
247: T = 247 * r21002
248: T = 248 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 469
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

249: T = 249 * r21002

250: T = 250 * r21002
251: T = 251 * r21002
252: T = 252 * r21002
253: T = 253 * r21002
254: T = 254 * r21002
255: T = 255 * r21002
256: T = 256 * r21002
1001: T = 1 * r21003
1002: T = 2 * r21003
1003: T = 3 * r21003
1004: T = 4 * r21003
1005: T = 5 * r21003
1006: T = 6 * r21003
1008: T = 8 * r21003
1010: T = 10 * r21003
1012: T = 12 * r21003
1016: T = 16 * r21003
1020: T = 20 * r21003
1024: T = 24 * r21003
1032: T = 32 * r21003
1040: T = 40 * r21003
1048: T = 48 * r21003
1064: T = 64 * r21003
1080: T = 80 * r21003
1096: T = 96 * r21003
2000: Read-in AFTER digital inputs
2001: Output BEFORE digital outputs
2002: Read-in AFTER analog inputs
4000: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4001: Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4004: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive flexible PZD
Recommendation: On the drive objects of CU, TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31, TM41, TM120, the sampling time for supplementary functions
is preset to p0115[0] = 4 ms. If you wish to configure a DCC run-time group with a shorter sampling time on these
drive objects, then you should first set the sampling time for supplementary functions p0115[0] on this drive object to
the value of the shortest sampling time required.
Index: [0] = Run-time group 1
[1] = Run-time group 2
[2] = Run-time group 3
[3] = Run-time group 4
[4] = Run-time group 5
[5] = Run-time group 6
[6] = Run-time group 7
[7] = Run-time group 8
[8] = Run-time group 9
[9] = Run-time group 10
Dependency: See also: r7903, r21008

CAUTION
The properties of the run-time groups must not be changed during operation as this could result in discontinuous
signal transitions.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

470 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Note
For value = 1 ... 256 (free run-time group):
This selection value can only be selected online if the following applies for sampling time T_sample of this run-time
group:
1 ms <= T_sample < r21003.
At download, a value that violates this condition is not rejected, but a permissible equivalent value is set automatically
and fault F51004 is output.
For value > 2000 (fixed run-time group):
The fixed run-time groups p21000[x] >= 2000 log on with the sampling time of the associated basic system function,
subject to a minimum sampling time of 1 ms. If, as a result of this limit, the actual sampling time deviates from the
sampling time of the basic system function, then fault F51005 (during F51006 download) is output. In this case, another
run-time group with a sampling time >= 1 ms should be selected. When selecting the fixed run-time groups, a check
is not made as to whether the associated system block exists.
Example:
"BEFORE speed setpoint channel" means before function charts 3010, 3020, 3030, 3040, etc. are calculated, if the
setpoint channel is activated. If, e.g. for SERVO, a setpoint channel has not been configured (p0108.8 = 0), the
calculation is made before function chart 3095.

p21000[0...9] Run-time group properties / RTG property

DCC Changeable: T Calculation: - Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
0 4004 0
Description: Allocates properties to run-time groups 1 to 10.
This property comprises the sampling time and, for p21000[x] >= 2000, the instant of the call within the sampling time.
The index x + 1 of p21000 corresponds to the number of the run-time group:
- p21000[0] is used to set the property of the run-time group 1
...
- p21000[9] is used to set the property of the run-time group 10
Value: 0: Do not calculate run-time group
1: T = 1 * r21002
2: T = 2 * r21002
3: T = 3 * r21002
4: T = 4 * r21002
5: T = 5 * r21002
6: T = 6 * r21002
7: T = 7 * r21002
8: T = 8 * r21002
9: T = 9 * r21002
10: T = 10 * r21002
11: T = 11 * r21002
12: T = 12 * r21002
13: T = 13 * r21002
14: T = 14 * r21002
15: T = 15 * r21002
16: T = 16 * r21002
17: T = 17 * r21002
18: T = 18 * r21002
19: T = 19 * r21002
20: T = 20 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 471
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

21: T = 21 * r21002
22: T = 22 * r21002
23: T = 23 * r21002
24: T = 24 * r21002
25: T = 25 * r21002
26: T = 26 * r21002
27: T = 27 * r21002
28: T = 28 * r21002
29: T = 29 * r21002
30: T = 30 * r21002
31: T = 31 * r21002
32: T = 32 * r21002
33: T = 33 * r21002
34: T = 34 * r21002
35: T = 35 * r21002
36: T = 36 * r21002
37: T = 37 * r21002
38: T = 38 * r21002
39: T = 39 * r21002
40: T = 40 * r21002
41: T = 41 * r21002
42: T = 42 * r21002
43: T = 43 * r21002
44: T = 44 * r21002
45: T = 45 * r21002
46: T = 46 * r21002
47: T = 47 * r21002
48: T = 48 * r21002
49: T = 49 * r21002
50: T = 50 * r21002
51: T = 51 * r21002
52: T = 52 * r21002
53: T = 53 * r21002
54: T = 54 * r21002
55: T = 55 * r21002
56: T = 56 * r21002
57: T = 57 * r21002
58: T = 58 * r21002
59: T = 59 * r21002
60: T = 60 * r21002
61: T = 61 * r21002
62: T = 62 * r21002
63: T = 63 * r21002
64: T = 64 * r21002
65: T = 65 * r21002
66: T = 66 * r21002
67: T = 67 * r21002
68: T = 68 * r21002
69: T = 69 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

472 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

70: T = 70 * r21002
71: T = 71 * r21002
72: T = 72 * r21002
73: T = 73 * r21002
74: T = 74 * r21002
75: T = 75 * r21002
76: T = 76 * r21002
77: T = 77 * r21002
78: T = 78 * r21002
79: T = 79 * r21002
80: T = 80 * r21002
81: T = 81 * r21002
82: T = 82 * r21002
83: T = 83 * r21002
84: T = 84 * r21002
85: T = 85 * r21002
86: T = 86 * r21002
87: T = 87 * r21002
88: T = 88 * r21002
89: T = 89 * r21002
90: T = 90 * r21002
91: T = 91 * r21002
92: T = 92 * r21002
93: T = 93 * r21002
94: T = 94 * r21002
95: T = 95 * r21002
96: T = 96 * r21002
97: T = 97 * r21002
98: T = 98 * r21002
99: T = 99 * r21002
100: T = 100 * r21002
101: T = 101 * r21002
102: T = 102 * r21002
103: T = 103 * r21002
104: T = 104 * r21002
105: T = 105 * r21002
106: T = 106 * r21002
107: T = 107 * r21002
108: T = 108 * r21002
109: T = 109 * r21002
110: T = 110 * r21002
111: T = 111 * r21002
112: T = 112 * r21002
113: T = 113 * r21002
114: T = 114 * r21002
115: T = 115 * r21002
116: T = 116 * r21002
117: T = 117 * r21002
118: T = 118 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 473
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

119: T = 119 * r21002

120: T = 120 * r21002
121: T = 121 * r21002
122: T = 122 * r21002
123: T = 123 * r21002
124: T = 124 * r21002
125: T = 125 * r21002
126: T = 126 * r21002
127: T = 127 * r21002
128: T = 128 * r21002
129: T = 129 * r21002
130: T = 130 * r21002
131: T = 131 * r21002
132: T = 132 * r21002
133: T = 133 * r21002
134: T = 134 * r21002
135: T = 135 * r21002
136: T = 136 * r21002
137: T = 137 * r21002
138: T = 138 * r21002
139: T = 139 * r21002
140: T = 140 * r21002
141: T = 141 * r21002
142: T = 142 * r21002
143: T = 143 * r21002
144: T = 144 * r21002
145: T = 145 * r21002
146: T = 146 * r21002
147: T = 147 * r21002
148: T = 148 * r21002
149: T = 149 * r21002
150: T = 150 * r21002
151: T = 151 * r21002
152: T = 152 * r21002
153: T = 153 * r21002
154: T = 154 * r21002
155: T = 155 * r21002
156: T = 156 * r21002
157: T = 157 * r21002
158: T = 158 * r21002
159: T = 159 * r21002
160: T = 160 * r21002
161: T = 161 * r21002
162: T = 162 * r21002
163: T = 163 * r21002
164: T = 164 * r21002
165: T = 165 * r21002
166: T = 166 * r21002
167: T = 167 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

474 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

168: T = 168 * r21002

169: T = 169 * r21002
170: T = 170 * r21002
171: T = 171 * r21002
172: T = 172 * r21002
173: T = 173 * r21002
174: T = 174 * r21002
175: T = 175 * r21002
176: T = 176 * r21002
177: T = 177 * r21002
178: T = 178 * r21002
179: T = 179 * r21002
180: T = 180 * r21002
181: T = 181 * r21002
182: T = 182 * r21002
183: T = 183 * r21002
184: T = 184 * r21002
185: T = 185 * r21002
186: T = 186 * r21002
187: T = 187 * r21002
188: T = 188 * r21002
189: T = 189 * r21002
190: T = 190 * r21002
191: T = 191 * r21002
192: T = 192 * r21002
193: T = 193 * r21002
194: T = 194 * r21002
195: T = 195 * r21002
196: T = 196 * r21002
197: T = 197 * r21002
198: T = 198 * r21002
199: T = 199 * r21002
200: T = 200 * r21002
201: T = 201 * r21002
202: T = 202 * r21002
203: T = 203 * r21002
204: T = 204 * r21002
205: T = 205 * r21002
206: T = 206 * r21002
207: T = 207 * r21002
208: T = 208 * r21002
209: T = 209 * r21002
210: T = 210 * r21002
211: T = 211 * r21002
212: T = 212 * r21002
213: T = 213 * r21002
214: T = 214 * r21002
215: T = 215 * r21002
216: T = 216 * r21002

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 475
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

217: T = 217 * r21002

218: T = 218 * r21002
219: T = 219 * r21002
220: T = 220 * r21002
221: T = 221 * r21002
222: T = 222 * r21002
223: T = 223 * r21002
224: T = 224 * r21002
225: T = 225 * r21002
226: T = 226 * r21002
227: T = 227 * r21002
228: T = 228 * r21002
229: T = 229 * r21002
230: T = 230 * r21002
231: T = 231 * r21002
232: T = 232 * r21002
233: T = 233 * r21002
234: T = 234 * r21002
235: T = 235 * r21002
236: T = 236 * r21002
237: T = 237 * r21002
238: T = 238 * r21002
239: T = 239 * r21002
240: T = 240 * r21002
241: T = 241 * r21002
242: T = 242 * r21002
243: T = 243 * r21002
244: T = 244 * r21002
245: T = 245 * r21002
246: T = 246 * r21002
247: T = 247 * r21002
248: T = 248 * r21002
249: T = 249 * r21002
250: T = 250 * r21002
251: T = 251 * r21002
252: T = 252 * r21002
253: T = 253 * r21002
254: T = 254 * r21002
255: T = 255 * r21002
256: T = 256 * r21002
1001: T = 1 * r21003
1002: T = 2 * r21003
1003: T = 3 * r21003
1004: T = 4 * r21003
1005: T = 5 * r21003
1006: T = 6 * r21003
1008: T = 8 * r21003
1010: T = 10 * r21003
1012: T = 12 * r21003

Description of the DCC standard blocks

476 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

1016: T = 16 * r21003
1020: T = 20 * r21003
1024: T = 24 * r21003
1032: T = 32 * r21003
1040: T = 40 * r21003
1048: T = 48 * r21003
1064: T = 64 * r21003
1080: T = 80 * r21003
1096: T = 96 * r21003
2000: Read-in AFTER digital inputs
2001: Output BEFORE digital outputs
2002: Read-in AFTER analog inputs
2003: Output BEFORE analog outputs
4000: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4001: Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD
4004: Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive flexible PZD
Recommendation: On the drive objects of CU, TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31, TM41, TM120, the sampling time for supplementary functions
is preset to p0115[0] = 4 ms. If you wish to configure a DCC run-time group with a shorter sampling time on these
drive objects, then you should first set the sampling time for supplementary functions p0115[0] on this drive object to
the value of the shortest sampling time required.
Index: [0] = Run-time group 1
[1] = Run-time group 2
[2] = Run-time group 3
[3] = Run-time group 4
[4] = Run-time group 5
[5] = Run-time group 6
[6] = Run-time group 7
[7] = Run-time group 8
[8] = Run-time group 9
[9] = Run-time group 10
Dependency: See also: r7903, r21008

CAUTION
The properties of the run-time groups must not be changed during operation as this could result in discontinuous
signal transitions.

Note
For value = 1 ... 256 (free run-time group):
This selection value can only be selected online if the following applies for sampling time T_sample of this run-time
group:
1 ms <= T_sample < r21003.
At download, a value that violates this condition is not rejected, but a permissible equivalent value is set automatically
and fault F51004 is output.
For value > 2000 (fixed run-time group):
The fixed run-time groups p21000[x] >= 2000 log on with the sampling time of the associated basic system function,
subject to a minimum sampling time of 1 ms. If, as a result of this limit, the actual sampling time deviates from the
sampling time of the basic system function, then fault F51005 (during F51006 download) is output. In this case, another
run-time group with a sampling time >= 1 ms should be selected. When selecting the fixed run-time groups, a check
is not made as to whether the associated system block exists.
Example:
"BEFORE speed setpoint channel" means before function charts 3010, 3020, 3030, 3040, etc. are calculated, if the
setpoint channel is activated. If, e.g. for SERVO, a setpoint channel has not been configured (p0108.8 = 0), the
calculation is made before function chart 3095.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 477
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

r21001[0...9] Run-time group sampling time / RTG sampling time

All objects Changeable: - Calculation: - Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the current sampling time of the run-time groups.
Index: [0] = Run-time group 1
[1] = Run-time group 2
[2] = Run-time group 3
[3] = Run-time group 4
[4] = Run-time group 5
[5] = Run-time group 6
[6] = Run-time group 7
[7] = Run-time group 8
[8] = Run-time group 9
[9] = Run-time group 10

r21002 Basis sampling time, hardware / Basis samp time HW

All objects Changeable: - Calculation: - Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the basis sampling time effective at this drive object for values 1 to 256 of p21000.
Sampling time T = p21000 * r21002

r21003 Basis sampling time, software / Basis samp time SW

All objects Changeable: - Calculation: - Access level: 1
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the basis sampling time effective at this drive object for p21000 = 1002 to 1096 as factor.
Sampling time T = (p21000 - 1000) * r21003
Dependency: Ensure that the basis sampling time on the SIMOTION D410 for the software time slices is always the same as the
configured PROFIBUS/PROFINET clock cycle.

r21005[0...9] Computing time load of the run-time group / RTG load

All objects Changeable: - Calculation: - Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
- [%] - [%] - [%]
Description: Share of the computing time load with which the DCC run-time group contributes to the utilization of the sampling time
during which it is called.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

478 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Index: [0] = Run-time group 1

[1] = Run-time group 2
[2] = Run-time group 3
[3] = Run-time group 4
[4] = Run-time group 5
[5] = Run-time group 6
[6] = Run-time group 7
[7] = Run-time group 8
[8] = Run-time group 9
[9] = Run-time group 10

Note
The computing time load can only be displayed for the run-time groups which are logged on (p21000[x] > 0). The
value for the computing time load is calculated in the drive unit based on the project loaded plus DCC chart. Therefore,
the values r21005[x] are not available in the offline mode of the SCOUT/STARTER.

In r21005 the computing time load is displayed, with which the DCC runtime group utilizes the sampling time in which
it is called. The runtime groups "Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD" (p21000 = 4000), "Send BEFORE IF1
PROFIdrive PZD" (p21000 = 4001) , "Receive BEFORE IF2 PZD" (p21000 = 4002) and "Send BEFORE IF2 PZD"
(p21000 = 4003) are called in the isochronous mode and in the non-isochronous mode, in different sampling times.
In the non-isochronous mode, these are IF1 / IF2 PZD sampling time (p2048 for p21000 = 4000 or 4001, p8848 for
p21000 = 4002 or 4003). In the isochronous mode, this is the current controller sampling time (p115[0]) which is
periodically called with the isochronous bus cycle time. The computing time load displayed in r21005 is always
calculated for the (more unfavorable) case of isochronous operation. This is why this value does not (always) act to
the full amount on the computing time load of the complete system.

r21008[0...24] Hardware sampling times available / HW t_samp

All objects Changeable: - Calculation: - Access level: 3
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
- [ms] - [ms] - [ms]
Description: Displays the assignment of the available hardware sampling times of the drive unit.
The designated sampling times are those created as a multiple of the hardware basis sampling time (r21002) and
which are always < r21003.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 479
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Index: [0] = Hardware 1

[1] = Hardware 2
[2] = Hardware 3
[3] = Hardware 4
[4] = Hardware 5
[5] = Hardware 6
[6] = Hardware 7
[7] = Hardware 8
[8] = Hardware 9
[9] = Hardware 10
[10] = Hardware 11
[11] = Hardware 12
[12] = Hardware 13
[13] = Hardware 14
[14] = Hardware 15
[15] = Hardware 16
[16] = Hardware 17
[17] = Hardware 18
[18] = Hardware 19
[19] = Hardware 20
[20] = Hardware 21
[21] = Hardware 22
[22] = Hardware 23
[23] = Hardware 24
[24] = Hardware 25
Dependency: See also: r7903, r21000
See also: F51001

NOTICE
For internal purposes, the drive unit always requires at least two (or several, depending on how p0115[0] is
parameterized for the drive objects) free hardware sampling times. Therefore the current number of free hardware
sampling times can be read out in r7903.
If r7903=0, no additional sampling time different from r21008[0...24] may be provided from the Control Unit. When
selecting in this state, if a run-time group with a sampling time < r21003 (p21000 <= 255) is selected in p21000, only
run-time groups whose sampling time is already provided in r21008[0...24] may be selected.

Note
A sampling time that is provided can be simultaneously used by system functions, several FBLOCK run-time groups
and several DCC run-time groups.
The sampling time of run-time groups that have been assigned to the PROFIBUS run-time groups (p21000 = 4000 ...
4004) is not displayed in r21008. For this sampling time, one of the internally and permanently assigned hardware
sampling times is used.
If the value of r21008[x] != 0 (not equal to 0), then the sampling time is specified in ms.
If the value of r21008[x] = 0, this sampling time can still be freely assigned. It should be noted that the basic system,
depending on the selected basis sampling times p0115[0], requires at least two (sometimes more) freely assignable
hardware sampling times for internal functions. The number of hardware sampling times that can still be freely assigned
can be read out in r7903.
If the value r21008[x] = 99999.00000, this hardware sampling time is not supported.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

480 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

p21030 Run-time group, computing time measurement / RTG comp_ti_meas

All objects Changeable: T, U Calculation: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
0 65535 0
Description: Only for internal Siemens service purposes.
Dependency: See also: p21032, r21035, r21036, r21037

p21031 Computing time measurement, blocks / Comp_ti_meas block

All objects Changeable: T, U Calculation: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
0 4294967295 0
Description: Sets the number of the run-time group to be measured 1 ... 10.
This starts measurement of the entire run-time group and the individual blocks.
At the end of the measurement the parameter is reset automatically to 0.

DANGER
During this measurement, the run-time group n is logged off and on again twice for the purpose of time slice
management. Since this procedure runs in a background task, the run-time group is not calculated for an indefinite
period on two occasions. This can lead to freezing or jumps in signal values. Logical signals can assume unexpected
values. This measurement must therefore never be carried out when an application is running!

Note
The run-time group to be measured has to be logged on.
Only one measurement can take place at a time.
The results are displayed in parameters r21035, r21036, r21037.

p21032 Computing time measurement, duration / Comp_ti_meas dur

All objects Changeable: T, U Calculation: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
60 [s] 10000 [s] 60 [s]
Description: Only for internal Siemens service purposes.
Dependency: See also: p21030, r21035, r21036, r21037

p21033 Computing time measurement, number of individual measurements / Comp_ti_meas qty

All objects Changeable: T, U Calculation: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
1 4294967295 10000
Description: Setting for the number of calls during the measurement of the individual blocks.
Dependency: See also: p21031

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 481
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

r21035[0...9] Computing time, minimum value / Computing time min

All objects Changeable: - Calculation: - Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
Description: Only for internal Siemens service purposes.
Index: [0] = Run-time group 1
[1] = Run-time group 2
[2] = Run-time group 3
[3] = Run-time group 4
[4] = Run-time group 5
[5] = Run-time group 6
[6] = Run-time group 7
[7] = Run-time group 8
[8] = Run-time group 9
[9] = Run-time group 10
Dependency: See also: p21030, p21032, r21036, r21037

r21036[0...9] Computing time, mean value / Computing tim av

All objects Changeable: - Calculation: - Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
Description: Only for internal Siemens service purposes.
Index: [0] = Run-time group 1
[1] = Run-time group 2
[2] = Run-time group 3
[3] = Run-time group 4
[4] = Run-time group 5
[5] = Run-time group 6
[6] = Run-time group 7
[7] = Run-time group 8
[8] = Run-time group 9
[9] = Run-time group 10

r21037[0...9] Computing time, maximum value / Computing time max

All objects Changeable: - Calculation: - Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
Description: Only for internal Siemens service purposes.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

482 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Index: [0] = Run-time group 1

[1] = Run-time group 2
[2] = Run-time group 3
[3] = Run-time group 4
[4] = Run-time group 5
[5] = Run-time group 6
[6] = Run-time group 7
[7] = Run-time group 8
[8] = Run-time group 9
[9] = Run-time group 10
Dependency: See also: p21030, p21032, r21035, r21036

r21041[0...49] Block ID of the measured block / Block ID

All objects Changeable: - Calculation: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
- - -
Description: Block ID of the measured block (block run-time measurement via parameter p21031. The blocks are measured in the
same sequence as they have been programmed in the execution sequence.
The parameter is designed for the measurement of 50 block instances

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 483
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Index: [0] = Block 1

[1] = Block 2
[2] = Block 3
[3] = Block 4
[4] = Block 5
[5] = Block 6
[6] = Block 7
[7] = Block 8
[8] = Block 9
[9] = Block 10
[10] = Block 11
[11] = Block 12
[12] = Block 13
[13] = Block 14
[14] = Block 15
[15] = Block 16
[16] = Block 17
[17] = Block 18
[18] = Block 19
[19] = Block 20
[20] = Block 21
[21] = Block 22
[22] = Block 23
[23] = Block 24
[24] = Block 25
[25] = Block 26
[26] = Block 27
[27] = Block 28
[28] = Block 29
[29] = Block 30
[30] = Block 31
[31] = Block 32
[32] = Block 33
[33] = Block 34
[34] = Block 35
[35] = Block 36
[36] = Block 37
[37] = Block 38
[38] = Block 39
[39] = Block 40
[40] = Block 41
[41] = Block 42
[42] = Block 43
[43] = Block 44
[44] = Block 45
[45] = Block 46
[46] = Block 47
[47] = Block 48
[48] = Block 49
[49] = Block 50

Description of the DCC standard blocks

484 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

r21042[0...49] First run / subsequent run identifiers / First

All objects Changeable: - Calculation: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned16 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
- - -
Description: In the block run-time measurements, the block run-times are measured. R21039 indicates whether the measurement
is the first or a subsequent call.
If the block type occurs only once in the run-time group, only the measured value for the first run will be supplied.
The parameter is designed for the measurement of 50 block instances

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 485
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Index: [0] = Block 1

[1] = Block 2
[2] = Block 3
[3] = Block 4
[4] = Block 5
[5] = Block 6
[6] = Block 7
[7] = Block 8
[8] = Block 9
[9] = Block 10
[10] = Block 11
[11] = Block 12
[12] = Block 13
[13] = Block 14
[14] = Block 15
[15] = Block 16
[16] = Block 17
[17] = Block 18
[18] = Block 19
[19] = Block 20
[20] = Block 21
[21] = Block 22
[22] = Block 23
[23] = Block 24
[24] = Block 25
[25] = Block 26
[26] = Block 27
[27] = Block 28
[28] = Block 29
[29] = Block 30
[30] = Block 31
[31] = Block 32
[32] = Block 33
[33] = Block 34
[34] = Block 35
[35] = Block 36
[36] = Block 37
[37] = Block 38
[38] = Block 39
[39] = Block 40
[40] = Block 41
[41] = Block 42
[42] = Block 43
[43] = Block 44
[44] = Block 45
[45] = Block 46
[46] = Block 47
[47] = Block 48
[48] = Block 49
[49] = Block 50

Description of the DCC standard blocks

486 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

r21043[0...49] Minimum measured block run-time in us / Computing time min

All objects Changeable: - Calculation: - Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
Description: Minimum measured run-time of the measured block (block run-time measurement via parameter p21031. The blocks
are measured in the same sequence as they have been programmed in the execution sequence.
The parameter is designed for the measurement of 50 block instances

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 487
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Index: [0] = Block 1

[1] = Block 2
[2] = Block 3
[3] = Block 4
[4] = Block 5
[5] = Block 6
[6] = Block 7
[7] = Block 8
[8] = Block 9
[9] = Block 10
[10] = Block 11
[11] = Block 12
[12] = Block 13
[13] = Block 14
[14] = Block 15
[15] = Block 16
[16] = Block 17
[17] = Block 18
[18] = Block 19
[19] = Block 20
[20] = Block 21
[21] = Block 22
[22] = Block 23
[23] = Block 24
[24] = Block 25
[25] = Block 26
[26] = Block 27
[27] = Block 28
[28] = Block 29
[29] = Block 30
[30] = Block 31
[31] = Block 32
[32] = Block 33
[33] = Block 34
[34] = Block 35
[35] = Block 36
[36] = Block 37
[37] = Block 38
[38] = Block 39
[39] = Block 40
[40] = Block 41
[41] = Block 42
[42] = Block 43
[43] = Block 44
[44] = Block 45
[45] = Block 46
[46] = Block 47
[47] = Block 48
[48] = Block 49
[49] = Block 50

Description of the DCC standard blocks

488 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

r21044[0...49] Average measured block run-time in us / Computing tim av

All objects Changeable: - Calculation: - Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
Description: Average measured run-time of the measured block (block run-time measurement via parameter p21031. The blocks
are measured in the same sequence as they have been programmed in the execution sequence.
The parameter is designed for the measurement of 50 block instances

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 489
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Index: [0] = Block 1

[1] = Block 2
[2] = Block 3
[3] = Block 4
[4] = Block 5
[5] = Block 6
[6] = Block 7
[7] = Block 8
[8] = Block 9
[9] = Block 10
[10] = Block 11
[11] = Block 12
[12] = Block 13
[13] = Block 14
[14] = Block 15
[15] = Block 16
[16] = Block 17
[17] = Block 18
[18] = Block 19
[19] = Block 20
[20] = Block 21
[21] = Block 22
[22] = Block 23
[23] = Block 24
[24] = Block 25
[25] = Block 26
[26] = Block 27
[27] = Block 28
[28] = Block 29
[29] = Block 30
[30] = Block 31
[31] = Block 32
[32] = Block 33
[33] = Block 34
[34] = Block 35
[35] = Block 36
[36] = Block 37
[37] = Block 38
[38] = Block 39
[39] = Block 40
[40] = Block 41
[41] = Block 42
[42] = Block 43
[43] = Block 44
[44] = Block 45
[45] = Block 46
[46] = Block 47
[47] = Block 48
[48] = Block 49
[49] = Block 50

Description of the DCC standard blocks

490 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

r21045[0...49] Maximum measured block run-time in us / Computing time max

All objects Changeable: - Calculation: - Access level: 4
Data type: FloatingPoint32 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
- [µs] - [µs] - [µs]
Description: Average measured run-time of the measured block (block run-time measurement via parameter p21031. The blocks
are measured in the same sequence as they have been programmed in the execution sequence.
The parameter is designed for the measurement of 50 block instances

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 491
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Index: [0] = Block 1

[1] = Block 2
[2] = Block 3
[3] = Block 4
[4] = Block 5
[5] = Block 6
[6] = Block 7
[7] = Block 8
[8] = Block 9
[9] = Block 10
[10] = Block 11
[11] = Block 12
[12] = Block 13
[13] = Block 14
[14] = Block 15
[15] = Block 16
[16] = Block 17
[17] = Block 18
[18] = Block 19
[19] = Block 20
[20] = Block 21
[21] = Block 22
[22] = Block 23
[23] = Block 24
[24] = Block 25
[25] = Block 26
[26] = Block 27
[27] = Block 28
[28] = Block 29
[29] = Block 30
[30] = Block 31
[31] = Block 32
[32] = Block 33
[33] = Block 34
[34] = Block 35
[35] = Block 36
[36] = Block 37
[37] = Block 38
[38] = Block 39
[39] = Block 40
[40] = Block 41
[41] = Block 42
[42] = Block 43
[43] = Block 44
[44] = Block 45
[45] = Block 46
[46] = Block 47
[47] = Block 48
[48] = Block 49
[49] = Block 50

Description of the DCC standard blocks

492 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

r21046[0...49] Library IDs of the measured blocks / Lib ID measured

All objects Changeable: - Calculation: - Access level: 4
Data type: Unsigned32 Dynamic index: - Function plan: -
P group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1
Min: Max: Default:
- - -
Description: Library ID of the measured block (block run-time measurement via parameter p21031.
Measurements with blocks from different libraries can thereby be carried out in one run-time group.
The blocks are measured in the same sequence as they have been programmed in the execution sequence.
The parameter is designed for the measurement of 50 block instances
Indices 0..49

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 493
Messages and parameters
A.2 Parameters

Index: [0] = Block 1

[1] = Block 2
[2] = Block 3
[3] = Block 4
[4] = Block 5
[5] = Block 6
[6] = Block 7
[7] = Block 8
[8] = Block 9
[9] = Block 10
[10] = Block 11
[11] = Block 12
[12] = Block 13
[13] = Block 14
[14] = Block 15
[15] = Block 16
[16] = Block 17
[17] = Block 18
[18] = Block 19
[19] = Block 20
[20] = Block 21
[21] = Block 22
[22] = Block 23
[23] = Block 24
[24] = Block 25
[25] = Block 26
[26] = Block 27
[27] = Block 28
[28] = Block 29
[29] = Block 30
[30] = Block 31
[31] = Block 32
[32] = Block 33
[33] = Block 34
[34] = Block 35
[35] = Block 36
[36] = Block 37
[37] = Block 38
[38] = Block 39
[39] = Block 40
[40] = Block 41
[41] = Block 42
[42] = Block 43
[43] = Block 44
[44] = Block 45
[45] = Block 46
[46] = Block 47
[47] = Block 48
[48] = Block 49
[49] = Block 50

Description of the DCC standard blocks

494 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
Appendix B
B.1 Data types
The table lists the data types relevant for the DCBLIB.

Table B-1 Overview: Data types of the block connections

Abbreviation Data width Data type ac‐ Postfix for PIN designator Can be connec‐ Description
cording to DCB identifier ○ Input ted
IEC 61131-3 ○ Output with data type

BO/B 1 bit BOOL _B* I, I1, I2,.... BOOL Bool

Q, Q1, Q2;....
BY 8 bit BYTE _BY IS BY, SINT, Bit string
QS USINT
W 16 bit WORD _W WORD, INT, Bit string
UINT
DW 32 bit DWORD _DW DWORD, DINT, Bit string
UDINT
SI 8 bit SINT _SI X, X1, X2, ... SINT, USINT, Signed Short In‐
Y, Y1, Y2, ... BY teger
I 16 bit INT _I INT, UINT, Signed Integer
WORD
DI/D 32 bit DINT _D DINT, UDINT, Signed Double
DWORD Integer
US 8 bit USINT _US SINT, USINT, Unsigned Short
BY Integer
UI 16 bit UINT _UI INT, UINT, Unsigned Inte‐
WORD ger
UD 32 bit UDINT _UD DINT, UDINT, Unsigned Dou‐
DWORD ble Integer
R 32 bit REAL _R* REAL, SDTIME Floating Point
Single Precision
according to
IEEE 754
LR 64 bit LREAL _LR LREAL Floating Point
Double Preci‐
sion according
to IEEE 754
TS 32 bit (SDTIME) - - SDTIME, REAL The SDTIME da‐
ta type is derived
from the REAL
data type, 1.0
corresponds to
1.0 ms. Nega‐
tive values are
not defined.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 495
Appendix
B.1 Data types

Abbreviation Data width Data type ac‐ Postfix for PIN designator Can be connec‐ Description
cording to DCB identifier ○ Input ted
IEC 61131-3 ○ Output with data type

AID 32 bit - - - DINT, UDINT, Alarm ID

DWORD
* - Block-defined - - See DCC editor See DCC editor
description description

The table lists the fields for DPV1 parameter job and response.

Table B-2 Overview: Fields in DPV1 parameter job and response

Field Data type Values Remark

Job reference Unsigned8 0x01 to 0xFF
Unique identification of the job/response pair for the master. The master changes the job
reference with each new job. The slave mirrors the job reference in its response.
Job identifier Unsigned8 0x010x02 Read job
Write job
Specifies the type of job. In the case of a write job, the changes are made in the volatile
memory (RAM). A save operation is needed in order to transfer the modified data to the non-
volatile memory (p0971, p0977).
Response ID Unsigned8 0x010x020x810x82 Read job
(+) write job
(+) read job
(-) write job (-)
Mirrors the job identifier and specifies whether job execution was positive or negative. Neg‐
ative means: The job could not be carried out totally or partly. For each subresponse, the
error values are transferred instead of the values.
Drive object number Unsigned8 0x01 to 0x27 Number 1 ... 39
Limited by DPV1 telegram
length
Defines the number of adjoining areas for the parameter address and/or parameter value for
multi-parameter jobs. The number of parameters = 1 for single jobs.
Attribute Unsigned8 0x100x200x30 Value
Description
Text
(not implemented)
Type of parameter element accessed
Number of elements Unsigned8 0x000x01 ... 0x75 Special function
Number 1 ... 117
Limited by DPV1 telegram
length
Number of array elements accessed
Parameter number Unsigned16 0x0001 to 0xFFFF No. 1 to 65535
Addresses the parameter accessed
Subindex Unsigned16 0x0000 to 0xFFFF No. 0 to 65535
Addresses the first array element of the parameter accessed

Description of the DCC standard blocks

496 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Appendix
B.1 Data types

Field Data type Values Remark

Format Unsigned8 0x020x030x040x050x060x0 Integer8 data type
70x08 Other values Integer16 data type
0x400x410x420x430x44
Integer32 data type
Unsigned8 data type
Unsigned16 data type
Unsigned32 data type
Floating-point data type
See PROFIdrive PROFILE
v3.1
Zero (without values as a pos‐
itive subresponse of a write
request)
Byte
Word
Double Word
Error
The format and number specify the adjoining space containing values in the telegram. For
write access, it is preferable to specify data types according to the PROFIdrive profile. Bytes,
words, and double words are also possible as a substitute.
Number of values Unsigned8 0x00 to 0xEA Number 0 ... 234
Limited by DPV1 telegram
length
Specifies the number of subsequent values.
Error values Unsigned16 0x0000 to 0x00FF Meaning of the error values,
see Appendix A.2
The error values in the event of a negative response. If the values make up an odd number
of bytes, a zero byte is attached. This ensures the integrity of the word structure of the tele‐
gram.
Values Unsigned16 0x0000 to 0x00FF
The values of the parameter for read or write access. If the values make up an odd number
of bytes, a zero byte is attached. This ensures the integrity of the word structure of the tele‐
gram.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 497
Appendix
B.2 Error values in PROFIdrive parameter responses, data types

B.2 Error values in PROFIdrive parameter responses, data types

Table B-3 Error values in DPV1 parameter responses

Error value Meaning Remark Additional in‐

fo
0x00 Illegal parameter number. Access to a parameter that does not exist. -
0x01 Parameter value cannot be changed. Modification access to a parameter value that Subindex
cannot be changed.
0x02 Lower or upper value limit exceeded. Modification access with value outside value Subindex
limits.
0x03 Invalid subindex. Access to a subindex that does not exist. Subindex
0x04 No array. Access with subindex to an unindexed param‐ -
eter.
0x05 Wrong data type. Modification access with a value that does not -
match the data type of the parameter.
0x06 Illegal set operation (only reset permitted). Modification access with a value not equal to Subindex
0 in a case where this is not permitted.
0x07 Description element cannot be changed. Modification access to a description element Subindex
that cannot be changed.
0x09 No description data available Access to a description that does not exist (the -
parameter value exists).
0x0B No parameter change rights. Modification access with no parameter -
change rights.
0x0F No text array available. Access to a text array that does not exist (the -
parameter value exists).
0x11 Request cannot be executed due to operating Access is temporarily not possible for unspe‐ -
status. cified reasons.
0x14 Illegal value. Modification access with a value that is within Subindex
the limits but is illegal for other permanent rea‐
sons (parameter with defined individual val‐
ues).
0x15 Response too long. The length of the present response exceeds -
the maximum transfer length.
0x16 Illegal parameter address. Illegal or unsupported value for attribute, num‐ -
ber of elements, parameter number, subindex
or a combination of these.
0x17 Illegal format. Write request: illegal or unsupported parame‐ -
ter data format.
0x18 Number of values inconsistent. Write request: a mismatch exists between the -
number of values in the parameter data and
the number of elements in the parameter ad‐
dress.
0x19 Drive object does not exist. You have attempted to access a drive object -
that does not exist.
0x20 The text element of the parameter cannot be - -
changed.
0x21 BMP service is not supported; invalid request - -
ID.
0x22 Multi-parameter accessing is not supported. - -

Description of the DCC standard blocks

498 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Appendix
B.2 Error values in PROFIdrive parameter responses, data types

Error value Meaning Remark Additional in‐

fo
0x65 Parameter presently deactivated. Access to a parameter that, although availa‐ -
ble, is currently inactive (e.g. n control set and
access to parameter from V/f control).
0x6B Parameter %s [%s]: No write access for the - -
enabled controller.
0x6C Parameter %s [%s]: Unit unknown. - -
0x6D Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state, encoder (p0010 = 4).
0x6E Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state, motor (p0010 = 3).
0x6F Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state, power unit (p0010 = 2).
0x70 Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
quick commissioning mode (p0010 = 1).
0x71 Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
ready mode (p0010 = 0).
0x72 Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state, parameter reset (p0010
= 30).
0x73 Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state, Safety (p0010 = 95).
0x74 Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state, tech. application/units
(p0010 = 5).
0x75 Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state (p0010 not equal to 0).
0x76 Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state, download (p0010 = 29).
0x77 Parameter %s [%s] must not be written during - -
download.
0x78 Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state, drive configuration (de‐
vice: p0009 = 3).
0x79 Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state, define drive type (de‐
vice: p0009 = 2).
0x7A Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state, data set basis configura‐
tion (device: p0009 = 4).
0x7B Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state, device configuration (de‐
vice: p0009 = 1).
0x7C Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state, device download (de‐
vice: p0009 = 29).
0x7D Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state, device parameter reset
(device: p0009 = 30).

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 499
Appendix
B.2 Error values in PROFIdrive parameter responses, data types

Error value Meaning Remark Additional in‐

fo
0x7E Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state, device ready (device:
p0009 = 0).
0x7F Parameter %s [%s]: Write access only in the - -
commissioning state, device (device:
p0009 not equal to 0).
0x81 Parameter %s [%s] must not be written during - -
download.
0x82 Transfer of the control authority (master) is in‐ - -
hibited by BI: p0806.
0x83 Parameter %s [%s]: Requested BICO intercon‐ BICO output does not supply float values. The -
nection not possible. BICO input, however, requires a float value.
0x84 Parameter %s [%s]: Parameter change inhibi‐ - -
ted (refer to p0300, p0400, p0922).
0x85 Parameter %s [%s]: Access method not de‐ - -
fined.
0xC8 Below currently valid limit. Modification request for a value that, although -
within "absolute" limits, is below the currently
valid lower limit.
0xC9 Above currently valid limit. Modification request for a value that, although -
within "absolute" limits, is above the currently
valid lower limit (e.g. governed by the current
converter rating).
0xCC Write access not permitted. Write access is not permitted because an ac‐ -
cess code is not available.
0xFF Successful read/write operation. The value has been successfully read or writ‐ -
ten.

Description of the DCC standard blocks

500 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Appendix
B.3 Block overview

B.3 Block overview

The version as of which they are available must be specified for new blocks.

Block Description SIMOTION SINAMICS

ACOS Arc cosine function x
ADD Adder (REAL type) x x
ADD_D Adder (double integer type) x x
ADD_l Adder (integer type) x x
ADD_M Modulo adder for addition in correct axis cycle x x
AND Logic AND operation (BOOL type) x x
AND_W Logic AND operation (WORD type) x
ASIN Arc sine function x
ATAN Arc tangent function x
AVA Absolute value generator, with sign evaluation x x
AVA_D Absolute value generator (double integer) x x
BF Flashing function (BOOL type) x x
BF_W Flashing function for status word (WORD type) x
BSW Binary change-over switch (BOOL type) x x
BY_B Status byte to eight binary variables converter x
BY_W Status byte to status word converter x x
B_BY Eight binary variables to status byte converter x
B_DW 32 binary variables to status double word converter x x
B_W 16 binary variables to status word converter x x
CNM Controllable numeric memory (REAL type) x x
CNM_D Controllable numeric memory (DOUBLE INTEGER type) x x
CNM_I Controllable numeric memory (INTEGER type) x x
COS Cosine function x V4.4
CTD Time difference determination from an internal time stamp x
CTR Counter (BOOL type) x x
DCA Diameter calculator x x
DEL Dead zone element x x
DEZ Dead zone element x x
DFR Reset-dominant D-type flip-flop (BOOL type) x x
DFR_W Reset-dominant D-type flip-flop (WORD type) x
DIF Derivative action element x x
DIV Divider (REAL type) x x
DIV_D Divider (double integer type) x x
DIV_I Divider (integer type) x x
DLB Delay element (REAL type) x x
DT1 Smoothing element x x
DW_B Status double word to 32 binary variables converter x x
DW_R Acceptance of bit string as REAL value x x
DW_W Status double word to status word converter x x
DX8 Demultiplexer, eight outputs, cascadable (REAL type) x x

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 501
Appendix
B.3 Block overview

Block Description SIMOTION SINAMICS

DX8_D Demultiplexer, eight outputs, cascadable (DOUBLE INTEGER type) x x
DX8_I Demultiplexer, eight outputs, cascadable (INTEGER type) x x
D_I DOUBLE INTEGER to INTEGER converter x x
D_R DOUBLE INTEGER to REAL converter x x
D_SI DOUBLE INTEGER to SHORT INTEGER converter x
D_UI DOUBLE INTEGER to UNSIGNED INTEGER converter x x
D_US DOUBLE INTEGER to UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER converter x x
ETE Edge evaluator (BOOL type) x x
GTS Reads out a time stamp x
INCO Axial winder moment of inertia x x
INT Integrator x x
I_D INTEGER to DOUBLE INTEGER converter x x
I_R INTEGER to REAL converter x x
I_SI INTEGER to SHORT INTEGER converter x
I_UD INTEGER to UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER converter x x
I_US INTEGER to UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER converter x x
LIM Limiter (REAL type) x x
LIM_D Limiter (DOUBLE INTEGER type) x x
LR_R LONG REAL to REAL converter x
LVM Double-sided limit monitor with hysteresis (BOOL type) x x
MAS Maximum evaluator x x
MFP Pulse generator (BOOL type) x x
MIS Minimum evaluator x x
MUL Multiplier (REAL type) x x
MUL_D Multiplier (double integer type) x x
MUL_I Multiplier (integer type) x x
MUX8 Multiplexer, cascadable (REAL type) x x
MUX8_D Multiplexer, cascadable (DOUBLE-INTEGER type) x x
MUX8_I Multiplexer, cascadable (INTEGER type) x x
MVS Sliding-type mean value generator x x
N2_R 16-bit fixed-point format (N2) to REAL converter x x
N4_R 32-bit fixed-point format (N4) to REAL converter x x
NAND Logic AND operation (BOOL type) x x
NCM Numeric comparator (REAL type) x x
NCM_D Numeric comparator (DOUBLE INTEGER type) x x
NCM_I Numeric comparator (INTEGER type) x x
NOP1 Dummy block (REAL type) x x
NOP1_B Dummy block (BOOL type) x x
NOP1_D Dummy block (DOUBLE INTEGER type) x x
NOP1_I Dummy block (INT type) x x
NOP8 Dummy block (REAL type) x x
NOP8_B Dummy block (BOOL type) x x
NOP8_D Dummy block (DOUBLE INTEGER type) x x

Description of the DCC standard blocks

502 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Appendix
B.3 Block overview

Block Description SIMOTION SINAMICS

NOP8_I Dummy block (INTEGER type) x x
NOR Logic OR operation (BOOL type) x x
NOT Inverter (BOOL type) x x
NOT_W Status word inverter (WORD type) x
NSW Numeric change-over switch (REAL type) x x
NSW_D Numeric change-over switch (DOUBLE INTEGER type) x x
NSW_I Numeric change-over switch (INTEGER type) x x
OCA Software cam controller x x
OR Logic OR operation (BOOL type) x x
OR_W Logic OR operation (WORD type) x
PC P controller x x
PCL Pulse shortener (BOOL type) x x
PDE Switch-on delay (BOOL type) x x
PDF Switch-off delay (BOOL type) x x
PIC PI controller x x
PLI20 Polyline, 20 breakpoints x x
PST Pulse stretching block (BOOL type) x x
PT1 Delay element x x
RAA Reset all messages V4.3
RDA Reads out a message V4.3
RDAA Reads out all messages V4.3
RDP Reads drive parameters (REAL type) x
RDP_D Reads drive parameters (DOUBLE INTEGER type) x
RDP_I Reads drive parameters (INTEGER type) x
RDP_UD Reads drive parameters (UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER type) x
RDP_UI Reads drive parameters (UNSIGNED INTEGER type) x
RDP_US Reads drive parameters (UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER type) x
RGE Ramp-function generator x x
RGJ Ramp-function generator with jerk limiting x x
RMDP Reads drive parameters from the controller V4.2
RSR RS flip-flop, R-dominant (BOOL type) x x
RSS RS flip-flop, S-dominant (BOOL type) x x
R_D REAL to DOUBLE INTEGER converter x x
R_DW Acceptance of bit string as DWORD x x
R_I REAL to INTEGER converter x x
R_LR REAL to LONG REAL converter x
R_N2 REAL to 16-bit fixed-point format (N2) converter x x
R_N4 REAL to 32-bit fixed-point format (N4) converter x x
R_SI REAL to SHORT INTEGER converter x
R_UD REAL to UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER converter x x
R_UI REAL to UNSIGNED INTEGER converter x x
R_US REAL to UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER converter x x
SAH Sample & hold (REAL type) x

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 503
Appendix
B.3 Block overview

Block Description SIMOTION SINAMICS

SAH_B Sample & hold (BOOL type) x
SAH_BY Sample & hold (BYTE type) x
SAH_D Sample & hold (DOUBLE INTEGER type) x
SAH_I Sample & hold (INTEGER type) x
SAV Value buffering (REAL type) x x
SAV_BY Value buffering (BYTE type) x x
SAV_D Value buffering (DOUBLE INTEGER type) x x
SAV_I Value buffering (INTEGER type) x x
SH Shift block (WORD type) x
SH_DW Shift block (DWORD type) x x
SII Inverter x x
SIN Sine function x V4.4
SI_D SHORT INTEGER to DOUBLE INTEGER converter x
SI_I SHORT INTEGER to INTEGER converter x
SI_R SHORT INTEGER to REAL converter x
SI_UD SHORT INTEGER to UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER converter x
SI_UI SHORT INTEGER to UNSIGNED INTEGER converter x
SQR Square-root extractor x
SRA Triggers/resets a message V4.3
STM Fault/alarm trigger x
SUB Subtractor (REAL type) x x
SUB_D Subtractor (DOUBLE INTEGER type) x x
SUB_I Subtractor (INTEGER type) x x
TAN Tangent x
TRK Tracking/memory element (REAL type) x x
TRK_D Tracking/memory element (DOUBLE INTEGER type) x x
TTCU Winding harshness characteristic x x
UD_I UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER to INTEGER converter x x
UD_R UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER to REAL converter x x
UD_SI UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER to SHORT INTEGER converter x
UI_D UNSIGNED INTEGER to DOUBLE INTEGER converter x x
UI_R UNSIGNED INTEGER to REAL converter x x
UI_SI UNSIGNED INTEGER to SHORT INTEGER converter x
US_D UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER to DOUBLE INTEGER converter x x
US_I UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER to INTEGER converter x x
US_R UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER to REAL converter x x
WBG Wobble generator x x
WMDP Writes drive parameters from the controller V4.2
WRP Writes drive parameters (REAL type) x
WRP_D Writes drive parameters (DOUBLE INTEGER type) x
WRP_I Writes drive parameters (INTEGER type) x
WRP_UD Writes drive parameters (UNSIGNED DOUBLE INTEGER type) x
WRP_UI Writes drive parameters (UNSIGNED INTEGER type) x

Description of the DCC standard blocks

504 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Appendix
B.3 Block overview

Block Description SIMOTION SINAMICS

WRP_US Writes drive parameters (UNSIGNED SHORT INTEGER type) x
W_B Status word to 16 binary variables converter x x
W_BY Status word to status byte converter x x
W_DW Status word to status double word converter x x
XOR Logic exclusive OR operation (BOOL type) x x
XOR_W Logic exclusive OR operation (WORD type) x

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 505
Appendix
B.3 Block overview

Description of the DCC standard blocks

506 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
Index
ASIN
SIMOTION, 36
A ATAN
SIMOTION, 38
ACOS
AVA
SIMOTION, 29
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 40
ADD
AVA_D
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 31
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 42
ADD_D
Average measured block run-time in us
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 32
r21044[0...49], 489
ADD_l
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 33
ADD_M
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 34
B
Alert B_BY
A51032, 403 SIMOTION, 183
A51060, 407 B_DW
A51061, 407 SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 185
A51062, 408 B_W
A51063, 408 SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 188
A51064, 408 Basis sampling time, hardware
A51065, 408 r21002, 478
A51066, 409 Basis sampling time, software
A51067, 409 r21003, 478
A51068, 409 BF
A51069, 409 SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 77
F51000, 401 BF_W
F51001, 401 SIMOTION, 79
F51004, 401 Block ID of the measured block
F51005, 402 r21041[0...49], 483
F51006, 402 BSW
F51008, 402 SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 81
F51009, 403 BY_B
F51033, 403 SIMOTION, 179
F51034, 403 BY_W
F51035, 404 SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 181
F51050, 404
F51051, 404
F51052, 405 C
F51053, 405
CNM
F51054, 405
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 83
F51055, 405
CNM_D
F51056, 406
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 85
F51057, 406
CNM_I
F51058, 406
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 87
F51059, 407
Computing time load of the run-time group
AND
r21005[0...9], 478
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 73
Computing time measurement, blocks
AND_W
p21031, 481
SIMOTION, 75

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 507
Index

Computing time measurement, duration DW_B

p21032, 481 SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 191
Computing time measurement, number of individual DW_R
measurements SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 194
p21033, 481 DW_W
Computing time, maximum value SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 195
r21037[0...9], 482 DX8
Computing time, mean value SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 100
r21036[0...9], 482 DX8_D
Computing time, minimum value SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 102
r21035[0...9], 482 DX8_I
COS SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 104
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 44
CTD
SIMOTION, 241 E
CTR
ETE
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 89
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 106

D F
D_I
First run / subsequent run identifiers
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 196
r21042[0...49], 485
D_R
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 197
D_SI
SIMOTION, 198
G
D_UI GTS
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 199 SIMOTION, 243
D_US
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 200
DCA H
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 327
Hardware sampling times available
DEL
r21008[0...24], 479
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 343
DEZ
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 347
DFR
I
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 92 I_D
DFR_W SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 201
SIMOTION, 95 I_R
DIV SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 202
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 46, 350 I_SI
DIV_D SIMOTION, 203
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 48 I_UD
DIV_I SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 204
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 50 I_US
DLB SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 205
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 98 INCO
DP_UD SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 332
SINAMICS, 258 INT
DT1 SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 356
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 352

Description of the DCC standard blocks

508 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Index

NCM_D
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 125
L NCM_I
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 127
Library IDs of the measured blocks
NOP1
r21046[0...49], 493
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 129
LIM
NOP1_B
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 359
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 130
LIM_D
NOP1_D
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 362
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 131
LR_R
NOP1_I
SIMOTION, 206
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 132
LVM
NOP8
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 108
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 133
NOP8_B
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 135
M NOP8_D
MAS SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 137
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 52 NOP8_I
Maximum measured block run-time in us SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 139
r21045[0...49], 491 NOR
MFP SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 141
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 110 NOT
Minimum measured block run-time in us SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 143
r21043[0...49], 487 NOT_W
MIS SIMOTION, 144
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 53 NSW
MUL SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 146
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 54 NSW_D
MUL_D SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 148
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 55 NSW_I
MUL_I SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 150
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 56
MUX8
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 112 O
MUX8_D
OCA
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 115
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 335
MUX8_I
OR
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 118
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 152
MVS
OR_W
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 365
SIMOTION, 154

N P
N2_R
PC
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 207
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 368
N4_R
PCL
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 208
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 156
NAND
PDE
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 121
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 158
NCM
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 123

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 509
Index

PDF RGJ
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 160 SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 390
PIC RMDP
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 371 SIMOTION, 267
PLI20 RSR
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 57 SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 164
PST RSS
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 162 SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 166
PT1 Run-time group properties
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 380 p21000[0...9], 410, 416, 423, 430, 437, 444, 451,
458, 464, 471
Run-time group sampling time
R r21001[0...9], 478
Run-time group, computing time measurement
R_D
p21030, 481
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 209
R_DW
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 210
R_I
S
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 211 SAH
R_LR SINAMICS, 274
SIMOTION, 212 SAH_B
R_N2 SINAMICS, 277
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 213 SAH_BY
R_N4 SINAMICS, 280
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 215 SAH_D
R_SI SINAMICS, 283
SIMOTION, 217 SAH_I
R_UD SINAMICS, 286
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 218 SAV
R_UI SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 289
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 219 SAV_BY
R_US SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 292
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 220 SAV_D
RAA SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 295
SIMOTION, 244 SAV_I
RDA SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 298
SIMOTION, 245 SH
RDAA SIMOTION, 168
SIMOTION, 247 SH_DW
RDP SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 170
SINAMICS, 249 SI_D
RDP_D SIMOTION, 221
SINAMICS, 252 SI_I
RDP_I SIMOTION, 222
SINAMICS, 255 SI_R
RDP_UI SIMOTION, 223
SINAMICS, 261 SI_UD
RDP_US SIMOTION, 224
SINAMICS, 264 SI_UI
RGE SIMOTION, 225
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 383 SIN
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 64

Description of the DCC standard blocks

510 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5
 Index

Sll W_BY
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 62 SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 237
SQR W_DW
SIMOTION, 66 SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 239
SRA WBG
SIMOTION, 301 SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 340
STM WMDP
SINAMICS, 304 SIMOTION, 308
SUB WRP
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 68 SINAMICS, 315
SUB_D WRP_D
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 69 SINAMICS, 317
SUB_I WRP_I
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 70 SINAMICS, 319
WRP_UD
SINAMICS, 321
T WRP_UI
SINAMICS, 323
TAN
WRP_US
SIMOTION, 71
SINAMICS, 325
TRK
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 172
TRK_D
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 174
X
TTCU XOR
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 337 SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 176
XOR_W
SIMOTION, 177
U
UD_I
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 226
UD_R
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 227
UD_SI
SIMOTION, 228
UI_D
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 229
UI_R
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 230
UI_SI
SIMOTION, 231
US_D
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 232
US_I
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 233
US_R
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 234

W
W_B
SIMOTION, SINAMICS, 235

Description of the DCC standard blocks

Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5 511
Index

Description of the DCC standard blocks

512 Function Manual, 11/2017, 6SL3097-4AQ00-0BP5